JP2022179743A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest.

SOLUTION: A game machine is configured to allow a game ball to enter first entry means earlier when the game ball enters second ball entry means. Therefore, dynamic display of first identification information is executed before second identification information, and dynamic display of the second identification information to which privilege can be given is executed after the dynamic display of the first identification information. A player watches the dynamic display of the first identification information while expecting that the dynamic display of the second identification information is started, thus enhancing player's interest.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In some cases, a privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games.

JP 2003-265765 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first entering means. determining means for performing a first determination based on the game ball entering the ball means and performing a second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means; display means for simultaneously displaying first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, and dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; a dynamic display period determining means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification based on a specific determination result; privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the information is displayed; the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result; When the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed at the same time, and the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends first, dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result by displaying the second identification information indicating a determination result based on a determination result different from the specific second determination result; and termination means for forcibly terminating.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means in which a game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the second privilege A special privilege game execution means for executing a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the game, a first action in which the game ball is likely to enter the specific ball entering means, and a second action in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first action. and an operating means for operating the ball-entry guiding member in two actions, wherein the operating means facilitates execution of the first action when the second privilege game is executed rather than the first privilege game. It is.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the operating means sets the period of moving the ball-entering induction member to a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means. The first motion is set longer than the second motion.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the game ball in the first ball entering means Determination means for performing a first determination based on the entry of the ball, and performing a second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means; and determination of the first determination display means for simultaneously displaying first identification information based on the result and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively A dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying, and a dynamic display period for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. a determining means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and displaying the second identification information based on a specific determination result; the first privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the first identification information and the specific second discrimination based on the predetermined first discrimination result. When the second identification information based on the result is dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends first, the specific second identification information Dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result is displayed with the second identification information indicating the determination result based on the determination result different from the specific second determination result, and the dynamic display is forcibly terminated. and terminating means. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means and the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game is executed. a privilege game execution means; and an operation means for operating a ball-entering guide member in a first operation in which a game ball easily enters the specific ball-entering means and in a second operation in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first operation. However, the operating means is easier to execute the first action when the second privilege game is executed than the first privilege game. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, the operating means moves the ball-entering guide member to a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means. The operating period is set longer for the first operation than for the second operation. This has the effect of reducing the control load.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. It is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along La-La, (b) is a cross-sectional view along Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (a)-(b) are rear views of a part of the first variable winning device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the relationship of the stop timing of the variable display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (a) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the stop timings of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 3A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. 2C, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fusion effect selection table in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a work RAM of the display control device; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 forced stop processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 small per stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 forced stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device, (b) is a special figure 2 small hit stop processing performed by the MPU in the main control device It is a flow chart showing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows small hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command reception processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation time measurement processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing fusion effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. (a) is a flow chart showing V winning effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a per variation pattern selection table provided in the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) ~ (c) is the voice in the second embodiment 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the lamp control device; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen of a third symbol display device in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a third embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of a RAM of a main controller in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. (a) to (e) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a rear image provided in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the details of a selection table, and FIG. 8C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation stop process 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 small per stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation stop process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 small hit stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing rear image change processing executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is an expansion perspective view of the croon provided in the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 4 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) and (c) are provided in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various tables in the table; It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit ending process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 6 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing SP reach selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a modification of the third embodiment; (b) is a schematic view of the audio ramp control device according to a modification of the third embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM typically. (a) is a judgment value calculation pattern table provided in the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the third embodiment, and (b) to (d) are the sound in the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a rear image selection table provided in a RAM within the lamp control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 7 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing rear image change processing 7 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a post-jackpot pattern selection table provided in a ROM of a main controller in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in an example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or when a predetermined reach is reached, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and each of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or flashing of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball while the pressing operation is being performed, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always urged rightward, and by sliding it leftward against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64a, second winning opening 64b, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal symbol starting opening (through gate ) 67, a variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 11) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64a or the second prize winning port 64b. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 64b, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A and the second symbol display device 37B are configured to be operable (variable) at the same time, and the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed at the same time. It is configured so that it can be notified to the player (simultaneously displayed in a variable manner).

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64a and the second prize winning port 64b. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. A 15R jackpot (jackpot A) is prepared as the jackpot type determined here. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. . Here, "15R jackpot (jackpot A)" means a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. It is a jackpot in which a maximum of 15 jackpot rounds are performed in which a ball can be entered.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is determined that there is no big winning in the big winning lottery performed when the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b is won, it is determined as a small winning. When it is determined as a small hit, the determination of the small hit type is performed. As the types of small wins determined here, small wins A, B and C are set as small wins based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64a. Also, a small win D is set as a small win based on the ball entering the second winning hole 64b. When the result of the lottery is a small win, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display a symbol corresponding to the type of the small win as a stop symbol after the end of variation.

Here, the "small win A" is a small win with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and is a small win in which the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed twice at maximum. . Similarly, the “small win B”, “small win C”, and “small win D” are also small wins with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, but each period during which the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened ( time) are configured differently. Although the details will be described later, it is set differently depending on the type of small win whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 can win.

Specifically, in the small winnings A to D, the switching member 65h rotates downward for 2 seconds from the start of the small winning game, the guide piece 65h2 rotates downward, and the special discharge port 65e2 The flow path to is opened. Then, in the "small win A", two seconds after the start of the small win game, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened and closed twice for 1 second. 65f1 is opened and closed twice for 1 second, and in the case of "small win C", the open/close door 65f1 is opened and closed twice for 1 second after 2 seconds from the start of the small win game. On the other hand, in the "small win D", opening and closing operations are performed twice for 1 second from the start of the small win game (immediately after the start of the small win game).

That is, in the small winnings A to C, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened after 2 seconds from the start of the small winning game. The state of guiding the ball (see FIG. 10(b)) (hereinafter referred to as normal guidance state) is switched to, and the game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 with small hits A to C. However, it is difficult to pass the game ball to the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, the small wins A to C are set to be disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the small win D, since the open/close door 65f1 is opened from the start of the small win game, it is possible for the game ball entering the first variable winning device 65 to pass through the V winning switch 65e3. Thus, the switching member 65h is operated at the same operation timing from the start of the small winning game regardless of the small winning type. On the other hand, by configuring the opening timing of the open/close door 65f1 differently depending on the type of the small win, the small win D advantageous to the player and the small win A to C disadvantageous to the player are provided. are set respectively. By configuring in this way, the operation control of the switching member 65h can be facilitated. Further, since the operation timing of the switching member 65h is constant regardless of the type of small win, the player can expect the game ball to pass through the V prize switch 65e3. Therefore, the small win D is set to a small win advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, since it is possible to win the small winning D only in the second special symbol, for the player, the second winning opening 64b is an advantageous winning opening, and the first winning opening 64a is disadvantageous. It is set as a winning entrance.

Here, in each small winning game, a display mode (in-round display mode) indicating that the small winning game is in progress is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning game. Specifically, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Right shot!" A notification prompting you to Then, the characters "Get a big hit with V winning!" ) will be started after this small winning game is notified to the player. The timing at which the display mode displayed during the small winning game is displayed is 3 seconds before the opening and closing door 65f1 in each small winning game is in an open state, and the game ball enters at the timing when the opening and closing door 65f1 opens. It is the timing when the ball becomes possible. As a result, the player can recognize the start of the small winning game as the timing when the display mode of the small winning game is started on the third symbol display device 81, and the small winning game is displayed at each small winning. Since the period from when the mode is displayed to when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened is constant at 3 seconds, it is difficult to recognize that the opening timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 differs depending on the type of small win. there is Therefore, it can be suppressed that the small hit type is determined at the opening timing of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the small winning game is started, there is an effect that the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch 65e3 can be expected regardless of the small winning type.

Further, in each small hit (small hits A to C), a variation pattern table (see FIG. 16) when the second special symbol set after the end of the small hit game is set. Specifically, when the small hit game of "small hit A" ends, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 1 (state A) is set (see FIG. 16(b)). When the small hit game of "small hit B" is completed, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 2 (state B) is set (see FIG. 16(c)). When the small hit game of "small hit C" ends, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 3 (state C) is set (see FIG. 16(d)). Although the details of each variation pattern table will be described later, each variation pattern table is configured to vary the easily selected variation time. Therefore, it is possible to vary the variation time (dynamic display time) selected in the second special symbol according to the small hit type of the first special symbol. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, the second special symbol stops first, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol is If it is a small hit D, the small hit game of the small hit D is executed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol stops first, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol during fluctuation is a small hit D, it is forced to stop as a loss. Therefore, when the variation time of the second special symbol is likely to be selected shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it can be said that the player is set in a favorable state. Therefore, by setting a variation pattern table in which a short variation time is likely to be selected according to the type of small hit by the first special symbol, a state advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, by variably setting the variation pattern table, the state advantageous to the player can be varied, and the enjoyment of predicting not only the big win but also the type of the variation pattern table can be provided to the player.

In this embodiment, it is configured so as not to shift to a high probability state or a time saving state (electrical support state) after the end of the jackpot, but it is not limited to this, and a jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot is provided. good too. Here, the "high-probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a time during probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, it is easy to shift to a special game state. It is the game state. The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 64b. "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged, so that the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 64b. refers to the state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 64b more than when the electric accessory 64b1 is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 64b, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 associated with the second winning opening 64b during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 64b1 is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second pattern is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 64b1 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 64b1 associated with the second prize winning opening 64b is opened and one win. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the time for opening the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b or the number of times the electric accessory 64b1 is opened per hit is not set, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64a and the second winning port 64b is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and a normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67 Triggered by the passage of the ball, the second pattern is displayed variably. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64a (start winning), the first special symbol variation is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using this as a trigger. Also, when the ball enters the second winning hole 65b (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers the variation of the second special symbol. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively displayed (referred to as a special symbol in the second step), the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. As for the third symbol, a dedicated symbol is variably displayed with respect to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed. It should be noted that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variably displayed at the same time.

Since the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time, more lottery games can be executed in the same time and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the first special symbol is always in the process of being variably displayed. The details of this configuration will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the third symbol (○×) is the first special symbol. , is displayed for each of the second special symbols. Also, a fusion effect indicating whether or not a small win D advantageous to the player has been won is displayed in a display area larger than the third symbol. Details will be described later, but when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit D, the display mode indicating whether the second special symbol stops earlier than the first special symbol is a rabbit and a turtle. The player is notified in a display mode simulating competition. If the tortoise beats the rabbit, it means winning the jackpot D.

In this embodiment, the turtle wins only when the small win D is won. As a configuration in which a winning effect may be executed, the player may be given the pleasure of whether or not the game ball can enter the V winning prize switch 67e3 in the subsequent small winning game. Also, the result of the competition between the rabbit and the turtle may not be displayed when a small win is won, and the game ball may be entered into the V winning switch 65e3 so that the tortoise's victory is determined. By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the small winning game more.

As for the third pattern, as shown in FIG. 4(a), a first display area Ds1 in which the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed is set at the lower left of the third pattern display device 81, and the right A second display area Ds2 in which a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed is set below. In both the first display area Ds1 and the second display area, ``○×'' symbols are displayed in parallel in two rows, and when the winning judgment result is a big win, ``◯◯'' is displayed. In the case of a small win, "◯×" is displayed, and in the case of a loss, "XX" is displayed. During the variable display, the "○" symbols and "X" symbols in each row are alternately displayed at high speed.

In the display area of the third pattern display device 81, in addition to the third pattern and the fusion effect, character patterns, characters, etc. are displayed as an advance notice display mode to be displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third pattern. be done. Further, when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest of the ready-to-win display mode is displayed.

A second symbol display device (not shown) displays a symbol “○” and a symbol “×” as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. '' alternately lighting up for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 64b1 associated with the second prize winning opening 64b is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is assembled at a position above the first winning opening 64a in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and all game balls entering the first winning opening 64a is configured to pass through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and then enter the ball. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not suspended. Therefore, only when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 when the normal symbol variation is stopped, the winning lottery of the second symbol is performed, and the normal symbol variation display is started. be.

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. It should be noted that the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 0 times, and may be set to 1 or more times (for example, 4 times). In addition, the number of normal symbol start openings (through gates) 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the lower side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

Below the variable display device unit 80 and below the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a first winning opening 64a in which a ball can win is provided. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64a, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 11), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64a in front view, there is provided a second winning opening 64b in which a ball can win. When the ball enters the second winning hole 64b, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 11), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

As shown in FIG. 2, the second prize winning port 64b is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64a. The second winning opening 64b passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the position where the game ball that did not win the first winning opening 64a can enter, or the game passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 Placed in a position where the ball can enter. In addition, above the second prize winning port 64b, a normal electric accessory 64b1 configured in a bow shape capable of closing the ball entrance of the second prize winning port 64b is arranged. As shown, it is arranged at a position that restricts (does not allow) the game ball to enter the second starting port 64a, and when the normal pattern hits, it rotates counterclockwise about 90 degrees to the second start port 64a. The normal electric accessory 64b1 guides the game ball to the winning opening 64b, and the second winning opening 64b becomes in a state where the game ball can enter (hereinafter referred to as an open state).

Here, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a variation time of 0.5 second or 1 second is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol. After the variation time, when the winning pattern is normal, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is changed to the open state for 0.5 seconds. That is, the period in which the game ball can pass through the second winning hole 64b after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 is 0.5 seconds to 1 second after the game ball passes through the through gate 67. (In the case of 0.5 second fluctuation time of the normal design) or 1 second to 1.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (in the case of 1 second fluctuation time of the normal design). Sometimes. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to enter the first winning hole 64a without fail after that, and the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and enters the first winning hole 64a. Since the period until it is detected by a detection switch (not shown) that detects is about 0.2 seconds, after the first special symbol starts to change, the game ball is placed in the second start port 64b. The period during which the ball can be entered is the period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the game ball enters the first winning hole 64a (when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds) ), the period from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. In other words, the timing at which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate is the period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, or from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. There are two types of periods until later. Therefore, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is configured 1.3 seconds after the fluctuation start of the first special symbol even at the latest timing.

In this embodiment, when the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a small hit (in this embodiment, in the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, all the lottery results other than the big hit are small hits), the fluctuation of the shortest fluctuation time Even if it is a pattern, it is 5 seconds, and it is configured so that the first special symbol is always fluctuating when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery at the start of the variation of the second special symbol is also a small hit except for the big hit, and there is a variation in which the lottery result is a small hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At the same time, it is configured to be easily changed. However, when they are fluctuating at the same time, the small hit of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped first is executed, and the one special symbol is forcibly stopped by the result of determination that it is out. Therefore, when a small win is achieved with the second special symbol, the small win D is always executed, which is advantageous for the player, but the remaining variation of the first special symbol at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. If the time is shorter than the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol, the lottery small win D is forcibly stopped as a failure, and a small win advantageous to the player is forcibly stopped. It is configured so that winning D is not executed.

In addition, since the first winning opening 64a (first special symbol) and the second starting opening 64 (second special symbol) are configured so that the held ball is not stored, the game is played continuously to the second winning opening 64b. Even if two balls enter, the problem that the second special symbol fluctuates independently can be suppressed.

Also, the first winning hole 64a and the second winning hole 64b are also one of the winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64a and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 64b are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64a and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 64b are different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64a The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 64b may be set to five.

The probability of a big win and the probability of a small win are the same when a ball enters the first winning hole 64a and when a ball enters the second winning hole 64b (see FIG. 14(b)). However, the type of small win selected in the case of a small win is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 64b than when the ball enters the first winning port 64a. It is configured to select a small hit D that allows the game ball to easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to win a small prize at the second winning hole 64b.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the second prize winning port 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a small win is discriminated in the big win lottery performed due to the winning in the first prize winning port 64a or the second prize winning port 64b, a variable time is selected based on the result of the discrimination. When the variation of the special symbol is started and it is stopped and displayed before the other special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a small winning stop symbol, and the small symbol is displayed. A stop symbol corresponding to the win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the small win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (small win) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the open/close door 65f1 is opened twice with an open time of 1 second at the opening timing according to the small hit type already described above.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided above the first variable winning device 65 . Specifically, the second variable prize winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the second specific prize winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid ( not shown). The second specific prize winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, and the tilted opening/closing plate receives the game ball flowing down the front surface of the game board, thereby causing the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. An open state in which it is easy to win a prize is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed as a result of winning a prize in the first prize winning port 64a or the second prize winning port 64b results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot is won. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to become a stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the second variable winning device 65 is opened by the jackpot game. This open state is continued until 10 game balls enter the second specific winning port 650a or 30 seconds elapse, and then closed. This operation is regarded as one round, and after repeating up to 15 rounds, the jackpot game ends. In addition, although the details will be described later, a big hit also occurs when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 650 described above. After that, the game state transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state) in which the ball is likely to win.

It should be noted that the jackpot game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used instead of the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64a.

An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first prize winning port 64a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 11) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
Details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. The first variable prize winning device 65, as shown in FIG. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. A LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening and closing for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d An opening/closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that protrudes to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear cover body 65j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g, and its rear cover A channel solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the channel solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. consists of

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 9(c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 9(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 9B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 9(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 10(b).

As shown in FIG. 9(b), the opening of the specific winning slot 65a is opened and closed by an open/close door 65f1 constructed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring in this way, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves toward the second winning port 64b. configured to be induced.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 9(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 9(b). As shown in FIG. 9A, a magnetic sensor 65c1 having a detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 10, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 10(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . A game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a V winning switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be.

In this embodiment, in small hits A to D (all small hits), the induction piece 65h2 is switched to the open state shown in FIG. 10(a) for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, the open/close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened 2 seconds after the start of the small winning game in the small winnings A to C. A game ball that has won the opening 65a cannot be guided to the specific discharge opening 65e2. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set to be impossible (difficult) to win.

On the other hand, in the small winning D, the door 65f1 is opened for 1 second from the start of the small winning game, closed for 0.2 seconds, and opened again for 1 second. As a result, when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance 65a in the open state in the small hit D, it becomes a period in which the guide piece 65h2 is set to the open state, so the game ball is discharged to the special discharge port 65e2 by the guide piece 65h2. is induced to win the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small winning D, the start of the big winning game is executed.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 described above during the small winning game (small winning D), so that the big winning game is played after the small winning game. is started. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set as a winning opening for awarding a jackpot game. The probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 1/400, but the probability of winning a small win is as high as 399/400. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting a big winning game by winning the small winning D rather than a big winning by lottery of special symbols.

With reference to FIG. 10(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described. In addition, in the small hits A to D in the present embodiment, when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit game, it is changed to the closed state shown in FIG. 10(b). FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state (closed state) in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge port 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls entering the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V winning switch 65e3.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the V prize switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed to determine whether or not to give a big win game state. can. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting a jackpot game state separately from the first variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

In this embodiment, it is configured such that a big hit is given based on the game ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 described above. As a result, even if the big winning lottery does not result in a big winning, the player plays the small winning game expecting the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol execution area 203a corresponding to winning to the first winning opening 64a and a second special symbol performing area 203b corresponding to winning to the second winning opening 64b. A first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter are provided in each of these areas in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b. Each value of C3 and small hit type counter C4 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal pattern execution area 203c consisting of one execution area. Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 44).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 14(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is If the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table matches, it is determined as the big win of the special symbol.

Here, the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). The jackpot random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determined values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "399" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If the result is "399", it is determined to be a big win. Further, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 398".

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, a special symbol small hit If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop design displayed on the first design display device 37 will be the one at the time of the small hit of the special design (when one special design is stopped earlier).

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol execution area 203a.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first hit random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 400 as described above, the total number of random number numbers for a big hit is 1, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/400".

Further, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within a range of 0-198. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is any one of "0 to 198" is "15R jackpot (jackpot A)". In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of jackpot is provided, but the invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected.

The small hit type counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-198. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A to D) are selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIGS. 15(c) and 16) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202 .

A plurality of variation pattern tables (see FIGS. 15(c) and 16) are set in the variation pattern selection table 202f. As for this variation pattern table, a plurality of dedicated variation pattern tables are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each variation pattern table is set for each result of determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning pattern is set by the random number table 202b (see FIG. 14(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. However, when it coincides with the value of the random number set by the random number table 202b per normal pattern, it is determined as a normal pattern (second pattern).

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the random number table 202b per normal figure described above. In this random number table for normal symbols 202b, there are 10 random numbers that become normal symbol wins when the probability of normal symbols is low, and the range is "0 to 9". These random numbers are stored in the random number table 202b per normal pattern. Since the total number of winning random numbers is 10 out of 100 random numbers, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 0.5 seconds or 1 second. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 64b is opened only for "0.5 seconds x 1 time". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 339), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 44).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 44) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 43) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 42) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 13, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the jackpot random number table 202a, the normal pattern random number table 202b, and the jackpot type table 202c, which have already been described above, a small hit type selection table 202d, a state transition table 202e, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, and a normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g , small winning scenario table 202h, big winning scenario table 202i, and other data table 202z are set respectively.

With reference to FIG.14(d), small hit classification selection table 202d is demonstrated. This small hit type selection table 202d is selected based on the small hit type selection counter C4 that acquires the small hit type to be executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. is a selection table of The small hit type selection counter C4 is a random value that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is based on the game ball entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Numeric value. FIG.14(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table 202d. In the small hit type selection table 202d, dedicated small hit types are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, three types of small winning A, small winning B, and small winning C are set. In the small hit A, "0 to 179" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4, and in the small hit B, "180 to 195" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4. The small hit C is set to "196 to 198" as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit D, and the small hit D is always set in the small hit of the second special symbol. is configured as follows.

In the present embodiment, by executing the small hits A to D, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is configured to be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), when the small hit A is executed, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) is set as the state A, When the small hit B is executed, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 2 (see FIG. 16 (c)) is set as the state B, and when the small hit C and the small hit D are executed, As the state C, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern table 3 (see FIG. 16(d)) is set. In addition, as will be described later, when state B and state C are set, when the number of transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15(a)) is executed, It is configured so that state A is set. That is, after the small win B, the small win C, and the small win D are executed, each variation pattern table is selected only during the set number of transitions, and then switched to the variation pattern table of the state A. is configured as Therefore, the variation pattern table set in state A is set as a variation pattern table for normal times.

FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state transition table 202e. This state transition table 202e is a data table in which periods for which states A to C are set are set, as described above. In state A, an infinite number of times is set. That is, the state A is set until any one of the small hits B to D is executed. In state B, the number of state transitions is set to 40 times. When the small hit B is executed and the state B is set, the state B is set until the number of times of variation of the special symbols (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 40 times, and then the state A is set. In state C, the number of state transitions is set to 30 times. When the small hit C or the small hit D is executed and the state C is set, the state C is set until the number of times of variation of the special design (total of the first special design and the second special design) reaches 30 times. and then state A is set. In this embodiment, when the number of state transitions has elapsed, the state is shifted to state A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to shift to another state. For example, the state C may be changed to the state B, and then the state A may be changed. Further, in the state C, the number of state transitions is the same for the small winnings C and D, but the number of transitions may be different between the small winnings C and D. Furthermore, when the small win D is executed, a state other than the state C may be set. In addition, although the small hit type of the second special symbol is one type, two types are set, one of which has a finite number of transitions (for example, 30 times) and the other has an infinite number of transitions, thereby increasing the probability variation game. Thus, a variation pattern table that facilitates winning of the next small win D can be continuously set, and a state in which the next big win game is likely to be given to the player and a state in which it is difficult to give the next big win can be sorted.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 15(c) and 16. FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202f is set with variation pattern tables exclusively selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. FIG. 15(c) is a hit variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 when the result of determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a selection table 202f; FIG. The winning variation pattern selection table 202f includes, as variation patterns of the first special symbol, special figure 1 big winning variation pattern A (variation time 0.5 seconds), special figure 1 big winning variation pattern B (variation time 3 seconds), special figure 1 A big hit variation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set respectively. For the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern A, "0 to 50" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and for the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern B, the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 51 to 100" is set, and for the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C, "101 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. Thus, when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C configured with a variation time of 4 seconds is most likely to be selected, and the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern A, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern B is set at substantially the same selection ratio. In this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, if the variation of one of them stops first, the variation of the other is forcibly rewritten to the winning lottery result. is forced to stop even in the middle of the variable time. Therefore, even if the variation of the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, if the variation of the first special symbol of the first special symbol is stopped first, the variation of the first special symbol of the jackpot will be the result of the lottery. There is a possibility that the game will be rewritten and forcibly displayed to stop, invalidating the jackpot. However, as will be described later, the shortest variation time for the small hit of the second special symbol is 4 seconds, so the variation of the second special symbol of the small hit, which always starts to fluctuate after the first special symbol, stops first. It is configured so that there is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the fluctuation drawn by the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes invalid.

On the other hand, a special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern D (variation time 0.5 seconds) is set as a variation pattern for the second special symbol jackpot. In this embodiment, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and when the big hit is determined with the second special symbol, the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern D is always selected. It is configured. Since the variation time of this special figure 2 big hit variation pattern D is composed of 0.5 seconds, it is set to a variation time that always stops earlier than the variation of the first special symbol that is a small hit, so the second When a big win is determined with a special pattern, the change of the first special pattern to become a small win is stopped and displayed first, and the problem of invalidating the change of the second special pattern to become a big win can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(a), when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a small hit, special figure 1 small for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol The hit variation pattern selection table 202f will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small per variation pattern selection table 202f. In this embodiment, as a lottery result of the first special symbol, when it is not a big hit, that is, when it is out, it is configured to be determined as a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 16 (a), in the special figure 1 small per variation pattern selection table 202f, as the type of variation pattern to be selected, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern B (Variation time 7 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) are set . For the special figure 1 variation pattern A, "0 to 99" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and for the special figure 1 variation pattern B, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 "100 to 149" is set, for the special figure 1 variation pattern C, "150 to 179" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, for the special figure 1 variation pattern D , "180 to 190" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and for the special figure 1 variation pattern E, "191 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. It is Therefore, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit, it is set so that the special figure 1 variation pattern A of 5 seconds with the shortest variation time is selected with the highest probability of 100/199. is configured as follows. Therefore, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit, a short variation time is likely to be selected. Variation time of 7 seconds Special figure 1 Variation pattern B has a probability of 50/199 and a variation time of 10 seconds Special figure 1 Variation pattern C has a probability of 30/199 and a variation time of 15 seconds Special figure 1 The variation pattern D is configured to be selected with a probability of 11/199 and the special figure 1 variation pattern E with a variation time of 20 seconds with a probability of 8/199.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the longer the variation pattern is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol stops first when the second special symbol varies. Therefore, it is configured to be advantageous to the player by executing a small winning of the second special symbol. Therefore, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the longer the fluctuation time, the lower the probability of selection of the fluctuation pattern is set, so that the disadvantage of the game parlor can be suppressed, and the gambling property can be suppressed from becoming too high. .

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of second special symbol variation pattern selection tables, which will be described later, are provided, and the probability (percentage) of each variation pattern being selected in each table is set to be different. Since the switching of the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol can be switched according to the small winning type of the first special symbol, even if the small winning of the first special symbol is disadvantageous to the player, By switching the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol to a variation pattern selection table in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected, a game state that is advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state that makes it easy to execute a small win with the second special symbol) and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (a game state that makes it difficult to execute a small win with the second special symbol) There is an effect that it can be performed by switching the variation pattern selection table of 2 special symbols.

With reference to FIGS. 16(b) to (d), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection tables 1 to 3 for selecting the variation pattern will be described. do. FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1. As shown in FIG. This special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 is a table that is set when the state A is set. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, states A to C are selected and set. As for the states A to C, when the small winning of the first special symbol is executed, the state corresponding to the small winning type is set (see FIG. 14(d)). When the state B and the state C are set, the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively variably displayed (the number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined specified number of times, or a new number of times. It is continuously set until it is set to a different state in the small hit of the first special symbol. When the specified number of times is reached, the state is shifted to state A and set. Therefore, state A is a state that is set at normal time (including the case where the power is turned on after being initialized). As described above, the specified number of times for state B and state C is set by the state transition table 202e shown in FIG. 40 times, and in state C, 30 times as the total number of fluctuations is set as the prescribed number.

Details will be described later, but when the state B is set, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2, and when the state C is set, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 are set respectively. The special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 is set with a higher probability that a short variation pattern is selected than the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1, and the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 The special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 is set with a high probability that a short variation pattern is selected. That is, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table in which the most advantageous game state is set for the player, and the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 is next It is advantageous to the player, and the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 1 becomes the variation pattern selection table that makes the game state most disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 16 (b) to (d), in the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2, special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds ), special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) is special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 to 3 are set.

As shown in FIG. 16 (b), in the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1, "0" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F, and the special figure "1 to 7" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the 2 variation pattern G, and "8 to 27" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. is set, "28 to 47" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J is " 48 to 198” is set. The probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time is selected is 1/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time is selected is 7/199, The probability that a short fluctuation time is selected is set low. On the other hand, the probability of selecting the special figure 2 variation patterns H to J, which is a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, is set higher than other variation pattern selection tables. Therefore, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 is set to a low probability that a short variation pattern is selected, and is set to a variation pattern selection table disadvantageous to the player (game state disadvantageous to the player) ing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(c), the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 will be described. FIG. 16(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2. As shown in FIG. Special Figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-described state B is set. Since it is only different from the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16(b)) already described above in that the selection ratio of each variation pattern is different, only the selection ratio will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16 (c), in the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2, "0 to 2" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F, and the special "3 to 17" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the FIG. 2 variation pattern G, and "18 to 47" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. It is set, "48 to 97" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J "98 to 198" is set. The probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time is selected is 3/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time is selected is 15/199. Therefore, compared to the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)), the special figure 2 variation pattern F is set with a selection probability of 3 times, and the special figure 2 variation pattern G is about 2 It is set with a double selection probability. Therefore, since the probability of selecting a variation pattern with a short variation time is high, the variation pattern in which the variation of the second special symbol stops before the variation of the first special symbol is easily selected, which is advantageous to the player. A small hit of the second special symbol is set to be easily executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(d), the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 will be described. FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3. As shown in FIG. Special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-described state C is set. With the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) and the special figure 2 per variation pattern selection table 2 (see FIG. 16 (c)), the selection ratio of each variation pattern is Since they are different only in different points, only the selection ratio will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 16 (d), in the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3, "0 to 7" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F, and the special "8 to 48" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the FIG. 2 variation pattern G, and "49 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. It is set, "99 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J It is not set, that is, the special figure 2 variation pattern J is configured not to be selected. The probability that Special Figure 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time is selected is 8/199, and the probability that Special Figure 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time is selected is 41/199. Therefore, compared to the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)), the special figure 2 variation pattern F is set with a selection probability of 8 times, and the special figure 2 variation pattern G is about 6 It is set with a double selection probability. Therefore, since the probability of selecting a variation pattern with a short variation time is high, the variation pattern in which the variation of the second special symbol stops before the variation of the first special symbol is easily selected, which is advantageous to the player. A small hit of the second special symbol is set to be easily executed. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 3 is configured so that the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected.

Here, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern J (19 seconds) has already been described with reference to FIG. 18, the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the variation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds special figure 1 variation pattern E (selection probability 8/199) is selected, the second special symbol can be stopped first, and the probability that the second special symbol stops first is set extremely low. Therefore, in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3, since it is configured so that the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected, it is set more advantageously for the player.

Thus, in this embodiment, by varying the probability that the variation time of the second special symbol is selected, it is set to switch between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, referring to FIGS. 17 and 18, the combination of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) with the variation pattern stops the variation of the second special symbol first. A combination of fluctuation patterns will be described. FIG. 17 is a quick reference table showing a combination of variation patterns in which the second special symbol stops first, and FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the stop timing of each variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. be.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, the case where the fluctuation display periods of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may overlap will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, the first special symbol is always varied. The game ball entering the first winning hole 64a, which triggers the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, passes through the through gate 67 about 0.2 seconds before entering the first winning hole 64a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the variation of the normal symbol starts 0.2 seconds before the ball enters the first winning hole 64a (special figure 1 winning). The variation pattern selected for the determination result of the small hit of the first special symbol is the special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated as "A"), the special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B" ), Special Figure 1 variation pattern C (abbreviated as "C"), Special Figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as "D"), Special Figure 1 variation pattern E ("E" and are omitted), and each variation period is shown in a timing chart in FIG. 18(a).

As the fluctuation time of the normal design, two types of 0.5 seconds and 1 second are set, and the time chart of each fluctuation period of the second special design when the fluctuation time of the normal design is 0.5 seconds. FIG. 18(b) shows a time chart of each variation period of the second special symbol when the normal symbol variation time is 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, the normal symbol fluctuation ends 0.3 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, In the case of winning the normal pattern, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in an open state for 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 64b is set for 0.5 seconds. . That is, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is a period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate. In FIG. 18(b), as an example in which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate the earliest, the timing when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and wins in the second winning opening 64b 0.3 seconds later and starts to fluctuate. showed the chart. The variation pattern when it is determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol is, as shown in FIG. (abbreviated as "G"), special figure 2 variation pattern H (abbreviated as "H"), special figure 2 variation pattern I (abbreviated as "I"), special figure 2 variation pattern There are five types of J (abbreviated as "J"), and the fluctuation end timing is shown for each fluctuation pattern.

In the case of special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), even if special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) with the shortest variation time of the first special symbol is executed, the special The variation time of the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends 0.7 seconds earlier than the variation time of FIG. 1 variation pattern A ends. From this, even if any variation pattern is executed in the first special symbol, the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends first, and the small hit of the second special symbol is performed (see FIG. 17 (a) ). In addition, as the variable period of the second special symbol, there is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. 0.2 seconds earlier special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F will be stopped. Therefore, the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and when the special figure 2 variation pattern F is selected, the variation of the second special symbol always stops earlier than the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. A small prize advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the execution of the special figure 2 variation pattern F can be made an advantageous state for the player.

Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern G (6 seconds of variation time) stops earlier than 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern B (7 seconds of variation time). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern B, the special figure 1 variation pattern C, the special figure 1 variation pattern D, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E, the variation pattern to be stopped first Become. Special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops earlier than 0.7 seconds earlier than special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), it becomes a variation pattern that stops first with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern C, the special figure 1 variation pattern D, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops earlier than 0.7 seconds earlier than special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), the variation pattern stops earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern D and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special Figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops earlier than 0.7 seconds earlier than Special Figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), only for the special figure 1 variation pattern E, it becomes a variation pattern that stops earlier. As described above, the state shown in FIG. 17(a) does not change even if the ball is entered into the second winning hole 64b at the late timing (after 0.5 seconds). Therefore, when the normal pattern fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, if the ball is entered during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state, the player is not disadvantaged by the timing of entering the ball. It is

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(c), the case where the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second will be described. When the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the normal electric accessory 64b1 becomes an open state 1.3 seconds after the start of variation of the first special symbol shown in FIG. is a hit). Therefore, when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the period from 1.3 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the start of variation of the first special symbol is the period during which the second winning opening 64b can be won. . In FIG. 18(c), when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the second winning opening 64b is 1.3 seconds after the start of variation of the first special symbol, which is the timing at which the second special symbol starts to vary the earliest. A timing chart of a small hit variation pattern of each second special symbol when winning is shown.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), in the case of special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern A with the shortest variation time of the first special symbol (variation time 5 seconds) Even if is being executed, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends 0.3 seconds later than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation pattern A ends. From this, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A will be stopped first, and at that timing, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F will be rewritten to the off and will be forcibly stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends first with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern B to the special figure 1 variation pattern E, and the small hit of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, although there is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. 18(c) as the period during which the second special symbol can be varied, even if the variation starts after the slowest 0.5 seconds, each of the above-described first special symbols The relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop timing remains unchanged. Therefore, when the variation time of the normal design is 1 second, if the special figure 1 variation pattern BE is executed, the special figure 2 variation pattern F is executed is advantageous to the player Become.

Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 variation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), it becomes a variation pattern that stops first with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern C, the special figure 1 variation pattern D, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern D and the special figure 1 variation pattern E, it becomes a variation pattern that stops first. Special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), only the special figure 1 variation pattern E becomes a variation pattern that stops first. Special figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), it is a variation pattern that cannot be stopped earlier than all variation patterns of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the variation pattern is such that the small hit of the first special symbol is always executed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a summary will also be described for the variation stop timing when the small hit variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol vary simultaneously. In FIG. 17(a), when the variation pattern of the normal symbol having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected after passing through the through gate 67, the variation opens the normal electric accessory 64b1, When it is possible to stop the second special symbol first in combination with the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol and the variation pattern made in the second special symbol when winning the second prize opening 64b. is indicated by "O", and when the combination in which the first special symbol is stopped first (the combination in which the second special symbol cannot be stopped first) is indicated by "X".

When the special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated and indicated by the symbol "A") is selected in the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 variation pattern F ( Only when abbreviated and indicated by the symbol "F") is selected, it is possible for the second special symbol to stop first. When the other special figure 2 fluctuation patterns G to J are selected, the first special symbol is stopped first, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped as being forced out.

Similarly, in the special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B" and symbolized) in the first special design, in the special figure 2 variation pattern F and the special figure 2 variation pattern G, the special figure 1 variation pattern C (abbreviated as "C" and symbolized), special figure 2 variation pattern F ~ H, special figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as "D" and symbolized), special figure 2 variation pattern F ~ I, in the special figure 1 variation pattern E (abbreviated and indicated by the symbol "E"), the special figure 2 variation pattern F to J (that is, the second special symbol can be stopped first), the second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected in the first special symbol, it is most advantageous to the player, and by winning the second winning opening 64b, a small win is executed in the second special symbol. (If the lottery result is a small hit). In this embodiment, although omitted, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected, the player is notified to prompt the player to win the second winning opening 64b by voice or the display mode on the third symbol display device 81 , by notifying with a lamp or the like, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to win a prize through the second prize winning port 64b.

FIG. 17(b) is a quick view showing a combination of variation patterns in which the second special symbol is stopped first when 1 second is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol in relation to FIG. 17(a). display. As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated as "A" and symbolized) in the first special symbol, for the small hit variation pattern of all the second special symbols, The small hit of the first special symbol is executed without the second special symbol stopping first.

In the first special pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B" and indicated by the symbol), the special figure 2 variation pattern F, the special figure 1 variation pattern C (abbreviated as "C" and indicated by the symbol) ), special figure 2 variation pattern F and special figure 2 variation pattern G, special figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as "D" symbol), special figure 2 variation pattern F ~ H, special figure 1 In the variation pattern E (abbreviated and indicated by the symbol "E"), the second special symbol stops first in the special figure 2 variation pattern F to I (that is, the variation pattern that becomes the small hit of all the second special symbols possible), the second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, if 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the period during which the second winning opening 64b can be won is delayed, so the second special symbols can be stopped earlier than in the case of 0.5 seconds. The number of possible combinations is reduced, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, not only the combination of the variation type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but also the variation pattern type of the normal symbol can vary the player's disadvantage and advantage. When 0.5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the normal pattern, the type of variation start sound of the normal pattern is varied, or the third pattern display device 81 displays an effect suggesting the variation type of the Futsu pattern. By doing so, it may be configured to suggest that the player is in an advantageous state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 13) of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g. This normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 acquired, to determine the normal pattern fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is a selection table of In this embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern A and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern B are set as the fluctuation patterns of the normal symbols to be selected. Ordinary figure fluctuation pattern A is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern B is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms (1 second). The general pattern fluctuation pattern A is set to "0 to 29" as the determination value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern B is set to "30 to 198" as the determination value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. is set. In this way, as the variation time of the normal symbol, the variation time of 1 second is set to be more easily selected than the variation time of 0.5 seconds.

Here, in the present embodiment, the length of the variation time of the normal symbols gives different advantages and disadvantages to the player. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is detected by the detection switch in the first winning opening 64a after 0.2 seconds, and the variation of the first special symbol is started. Here, since the second special symbol stops earlier than the first special symbol, the small winning D is likely to be executed, so the second winning opening 64b at an earlier timing after the first special symbol starts to change. It is advantageous for the player to win the game ball at the time. Therefore, the shorter normal pattern fluctuation time is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, the normal pattern variation pattern A (0.5 second variation) is set to be less likely to be selected than the normal pattern variation pattern B (1 second), so it is configured to suppress the gambling property.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table is constant, but not limited to that, it is configured to switch depending on when a small hit is executed or when a big hit game is executed. may By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch to a state advantageous to the player by switching to the regular pattern variation pattern table in which the variation time shorter than the normal time is easily selected.

The small winning scenario table 202h (see FIG. 13) is a data table for executing opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 65 when a small winning game is executed. In this small winning scenario table 202h, each small winning scenario table is set corresponding to each small winning type. The pointers are set in chronological order, and are updated one by one as time elapses. Each control of the first variable winning device 65 set by the pointer is executed. Thereby, even when opening control etc. differ for every small hit classification, control can be performed easily.

The jackpot scenario table 202i (see FIG. 13) will be described. The jackpot scenario table 202i is a scenario table that is set when a jackpot game is executed, and is a data table that defines the control contents of the second variable prize winning device 650 . As with the small winning scenario table 202i, the control contents of the second variable winning device 650 are defined for each pointer set in chronological order, and the pointer is updated by one with the passage of time, and the updated pointer Control is executed according to the specified control contents.

The miscellaneous data table 202z is set with various data, tables, etc. necessary for other games, but since they are well-known contents unrelated to the contents of the present invention, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19 . FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol execution area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a general pattern execution area 203c, a first winning counter 203d1, a second winning counter 203d2, a V winning flag 203e, and a jackpot. Flag 203f, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h, special figure 1 small hit flag 203i, special figure 2 small hit flag 203j, state counter 203k, state setting area 203m, other memory area 203z is doing.

The first special symbol execution area 203a is composed of one execution area as shown in FIG. In the first special symbol execution area 203a, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64a (start winning), the first special symbol is stopped (the fluctuation is finished), not during the small winning game or the big winning game. state), the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small per type counter C4 obtained based on the winning are stored respectively. . After that, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes each process for starting the variation of the first special symbol.

The second special symbol execution area 203b is different from the first special symbol execution area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for the winning to the second winning opening 64b are stored respectively, and the other configurations are different. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The general pattern execution area 203c has one execution area like the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second special symbol execution area 203b. In this general pattern execution area 203c, the values of the second per random number counter C4 and the general pattern variation type counter CS2 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, the normal symbol is not in the winning game, and the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol variation is finished) ), the values of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 are acquired, and the obtained data is stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the reservation first area of the normal pattern execution area 203c is the normal pattern execution area. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 that is shifted (moved) to 203c and stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c, a determination such as a winning lottery for normal symbols is performed. After that, based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 that has been acquired, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is selected, and the normal pattern fluctuation is executed.

The first winning counter 203d1 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 in one round (open state) in the small winning game (that is, the number of balls entering the second variable winning device 650). number of game balls hit), the second prize winning counter 203d2 counts the number of game balls that have won the first specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the first variable prize winning device It is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered 65). Specifically, when the game ball passes through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 8) provided in the first variable winning device 65 and is detected by the detection switch, the second winning counter 203d2 is incremented by one. The first winning counter 203d1 is incremented by 1 and updated based on the passage of the game ball being detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 650. be done. On the other hand, the value of the first winning counter 203d1 determines whether or not the number of winnings of the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches the discharged number when one round is completed. After that, it is reset to the initial value "0". Also, the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to the initial value of "0" based on the end of one round. The value of the winning number counter 203d is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The big hit flag 203e is a flag indicating that the result of determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. This jackpot flag 203e is configured to be able to identify whether it is the jackpot determination of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is set to ON when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is stopped for the second special symbol (see S913 in FIG. 39 and S941 in FIG. 40(b)). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203g is on during variation of the first special symbol, it is set to off (S611 in FIG. 34). As a result, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing at which the variation of the second special symbol's big win or small win stops first.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the second special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is stopped for the second special symbol (see S603 in FIG. 33 and S621 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203h is on during variation of the second special symbol, it is set to off (S931 in FIG. 40(a)). As a result, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing at which the variation of the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol stops first.

The state counter 203k is a counter for counting the prescribed number of times of state B or state C in which special figure 2 per variation pattern 2 or special figure 2 per variation pattern 3 is selected. In this embodiment, as described above, when the small winning B or the small winning C of the first special symbol and the small winning D of the second special symbol are won, the small winning variation pattern table of the second special symbol is prepared after that. It is set to switch to a predetermined variation pattern table only a specified number of times. The specified number of times defines the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol have changed, and when the specified number of times is reached, the state is shifted to the state A, and a variation pattern table corresponding to the state A is set. . When the small winning of the first special symbol and the small winning of the second special symbol are finished, the corresponding states are set in the state counter 203k, and the value of the state counter corresponding to the set state is set. (S1807, S1809 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to fluctuate respectively, they are decremented by one and updated (S305 in FIG. 30, S705 in FIG. 36).

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol reservation lamp 84, a solenoid for opening and closing the first specific winning port 65a, A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing plate forward of the second specific winning opening 650a and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to them via the port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 42) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and gives instructions to the display control device 114 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 20, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a fusion effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs required for game control.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a data table in which variation pattern data for displaying variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is stored. In this embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 222a includes a variation display pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 shown in FIG. is stored. As the variable display pattern, a pattern is set in which the "○" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately displayed according to the variable time period determined by the main controller 110. FIG.

The fusion effect selection table 222b is composed of a win fusion effect selection table 222b1, a losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, a preparing effect selection table 222b3, and a special effect selection table 222b4, as shown in FIG. 20(b). This is a selection table for selecting a fusion effect to be displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the display device 81. FIG. The winning fusion effect and the losing fusion effect are fusion effects displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 during the period when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time. Specifically, in the win fusion effect, the display mode in which the rabbit and the tortoise start a competition shown in FIG. After that, it consists of a blackout production. The losing fusion effect differs from the winning fusion effect in that the rabbit wins. The victory of the tortoise informs that the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol and that the small win D of the second special symbol is executed. On the other hand, when the rabbit wins, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped first, and one of the small wins A to C of the first special symbol is executed.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol always starts to fluctuate before the second special symbol (see FIG. 4(a)). Here, for the player, even if the first special symbol is stopped first and the small winning of the first special symbol is executed, the profit obtained by the player is a small amount of balls (prize balls) or the first prize. The change pattern table of the second special symbol is switched, etc., which does not directly trigger the granting of the big win, and is set disadvantageously compared to the small win of the second special symbol. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the second special symbol starting to fluctuate.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the third symbols (symbols displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2) showing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are indicated by "○", The display area was further reduced by the "x" display, and placed at the lower left and right ends of the display area so as not to stand out. On the other hand, the effect display area Ds3 is set larger than the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 so as to be conspicuous to the player. Therefore, the player plays the game mainly looking at the effect display area Ds3.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the second special symbol is started and the variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed simultaneously, the effect display area Ds3 shown in FIG. The race between the rabbit and the tortoise shown in FIG. The player is given a chance to win a V prize, which is advantageous to the player when the turtle wins, by displaying "Chance if the turtle wins the race!" It has been reported that In addition, in this embodiment, a small winning game is executed in which a game ball can pass through the V winning prize switch 65e3 by executing the small winning D of the second special symbol. Since the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the player is given the right to start the big win game after the small win game, so the execution of the small win D gives an advantageous condition for the player. It is assumed that

In the fusion effect, when the first special symbol stops first, a performance is executed in which the rabbit reaches the finish line before the turtle (see FIG. 5(a)), and when the second special symbol stops first. , an effect is executed in which the turtle reaches the goal ahead of the rabbit (see FIG. 5(b)). After that, after the first special symbol is stopped first and the fusion effect (see FIG. 5(a)) in which the rabbit reaches the goal ahead of the turtle is displayed, the message "Unfortunately!!" Normal chance!" is displayed. When the display mode of this fusion effect is displayed, the fluctuation time of the first special design passes and stops (stops at the combination of "○ ×" indicating a small hit), and at that timing the second special design is, In the middle of the variable time, the game is forcibly stopped by a symbol indicating a failure (stop with a combination of "xx"). In addition, when the display mode of the fusion effect of FIG. 6(a) is displayed, the player has a chance to win a V winning prize (that is, the right to execute a jackpot game). However, it can be recognized that a ball can be obtained in a small winning game. Therefore, the player prepares for a game in which a game ball is made to enter the first variable prize winning device 650 by a game method of causing the game ball to flow down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the fusion effect in which the turtle wins the race is displayed, the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, and the symbol indicating the small win ("○×" At that timing, the first special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with a pattern (a stop pattern of the combination of 'xx') indicating a deviation in the middle of the fluctuation time.例文帳に追加After that, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the characters "Congratulations! V winning chance!" be. Therefore, the player can prepare for a game aiming at winning a V prize by playing a right-handed game. Thus, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. Then, it is possible to determine whether or not a small winning game advantageous to the player is started by the content of the fusion performance, and the game can be played more easily.

It should be noted that the above-described fusion effect in which the rabbit and turtle race is performed is executed when the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both small hits. If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation display of the fusion effect is not started, and the character "big hit" is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern has passed. appears suddenly. Also, after the first special symbol fluctuates (the result of the judgment is a small hit), if the second special symbol does not start to fluctuate during the fluctuation period of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display of the fusion effect is not started. , a display mode indicating that a small winning game of the first special symbol shown in FIG. be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the fusion effect is not started, but not limited to that, the first special symbol At the timing when the fluctuation is started, the fluctuation of the fusion effect may be started (start of the rabbit and tortoise race). In this case, at the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, based on the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol whose fluctuation stops first, the control for resetting the fusion effect is set. In addition, in the present embodiment, only when the second special symbol stops first (the result of the determination is a small hit), the turtle is configured to execute the victory effect in the fusion effect, but not limited to that, the second special symbol A performance lottery is executed with a predetermined probability at the start of the variation of the special pattern, and whether the turtle wins or the rabbit wins is determined based on the lottery result. In this case, when the second special symbol is a combination of variation patterns that stop first (the result of the judgment is a small hit), the execution probability of the fusion effect that the turtle wins is set high, and the first special symbol In the case of a combination of variation patterns in which the symbols stop first (the result of the judgment is a small hit), the execution probability of the fusion effect in which the rabbit wins is set high. When the rabbit wins or the turtle wins, the display modes shown in FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are not displayed. A performance is executed to make the player think that there is a possibility of the following in the small winning game. Here, if the rabbit wins, the possibility of winning the V prize is low, and if the tortoise wins, the possibility of winning the V prize is high. Even during the small win game, the game can be played with the expectation of the V winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, in the modified example described above, the fusion effect is started from the start of the variation of the second special symbol, but the fusion effect may be started from the start of the variation of the first special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the player is notified of the determination result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner by the fusion effect, but not limited to this, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (For example, it is composed of three rows of pattern rows, and the judgment result is notified by the combination of the symbols) and the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern (for example, it is composed of three rows of pattern rows, and the combination of the symbols ) are displayed in a variable manner, and the game may be played in anticipation of the display of the third symbol indicating a small hit with the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variably displayed.

The preparation effect selected from the preparation effect selection table 222b3 is the display mode before the start of the competition between the rabbit and the turtle shown in FIG. 4(a). In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped, and when the variable display of only the first special symbol is started, the preparation effect is selected and displayed. .

The special effect selection table 222b4 is a table in which a special effect to be selected when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate before the first special symbol is set. In this special effect, the characters "abnormal variation" are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an error comment. As a result, it is possible to quickly notify that normal prize winning and games are not being played.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20(c). As shown in FIG. 20(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 1 Stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f, production counter 223g, slave state setting area 223h, special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i, special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j, fusion production start flag 223k, etc. At least a memory area 223z is provided.

The command storage area 223a is a storage area for temporarily storing commands output to the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 and each control device.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and one execution area corresponding to the second special symbol. Information such as the variation pattern output from the main controller 110 when the second special symbol starts to vary, and the success/failure determination result is stored.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command for the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2301 in FIG. 54), and the first special in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the variable display of symbols is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern for the first special symbol indicated by this display variation pattern command causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol. Display control of the variable effect is started so as to be performed.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2401 in FIG. 55), and the second special in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the variable display of symbols is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. The display variation pattern command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the variation pattern command for the first special symbol described above.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the special figure 1 stop type command corresponding to the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol display It is turned off when the stop type of the first special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. In the present embodiment, the stop mode of the display displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the special figure 2 stop type command corresponding to the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol display It is turned off when the stop type of the second special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. In the present embodiment, the stop mode of the display displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The sub-state setting area 223h is a storage area for storing state information (any of states A to states A to C) set by the main controller 110. FIG. In the sub-state setting area 223h, when a state command (S308 in FIG. 30, S708 in FIG. 36, S1808 in FIG. 49) output from main controller 110 is received, state information indicated by the state command is stored. (S2210 in FIG. 53). By configuring in this manner, the same state can be set by the sound lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the state set by the main controller 110 .

The special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol. When the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received, the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i sets the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command as the remaining variation time (see S2310 in FIG. 54). When the remaining variation time is set to the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i (special figure 1 remaining variation time > 0), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed time for each execution cycle of the main process (see FIG. 52) ( In this embodiment, 1) is subtracted and updated (see S2702 in FIG. 58). In addition, this special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is set to 0 in the initial state.

The special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the variation time of the second special symbol. This special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j determines the remaining variation time (value of special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i) of the first special symbol during variation when receiving the special figure 2 variation pattern command. , When the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the selected second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is set to the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j. set. On the other hand, when the variation time of the selected second special symbol is shorter than the remaining variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time of the selected second special symbol is set in the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j. By configuring in this way, even when the small winning variation of the second special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped when the small winning of the first special symbol is executed, the accurate second special symbol can be obtained. Residual fluctuation time can be set. In addition, the value of this special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is used to determine the fluctuation time of the fusion production when selecting the fusion production. Also in this case, since the correct remaining variation time for the second special symbol to stop varying is set in the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j, the fusion effect is stopped by the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively. It is possible to set the fusion effect of the variable time according to the timing.

The fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is time to start the fusion effect. This fusion production start flag 223k receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command for the second special symbol, and is set to ON when the lottery result is a small hit (S2405 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the fusion effect command for display indicating the display mode (fusion effect pattern) of the selected fusion effect is set, it is set to OFF (S2609 in FIG. 57). It should be noted that this fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial setting such as when the power is turned on.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 81) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

Thus, in this embodiment, based on the reception of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and the second special symbol output from the main controller 110, each third symbol is variably displayed, A fusion performance is selected and executed in accordance with the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate and in accordance with the period until the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating. As a result, the small hit of the present embodiment is drawn with a high probability (398/399 for both the first special pattern and the second special pattern), and the small prize of the first special pattern is frequently executed. Even if there is, by displaying the fusion effect, the player can determine whether or not it is time to play the game with anticipation, and the game can be played with sharpness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the effect indicating that the small winning of the first special symbol is performed is frequently performed, and it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored.

Further, the game property of the present embodiment is that when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed as a result of the small winning lottery, the small winning of the special symbol that stops after the fluctuation time passes first. is executed. The small winning of the second special pattern is set to be more advantageous than the small winning of the first special pattern, and the variation of the second special pattern stops earlier than the first special pattern, which is advantageous to the player. A state (a state in which a second special symbol is executed) can be provided. However, it is difficult to identify from the third symbol whether or not the variation of the second special symbol stops first, and the interest in the game is also reduced. In this embodiment, the fluctuation of the fusion effect is started in accordance with the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol, and whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped first is notified by the race of the rabbit and the turtle. did. By doing so, the player simultaneously monitors the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol, and can see the fusion performance without discriminating the type of the special symbol to be stopped first. , you can learn about the special symbols that stop first. Therefore, even if the game is complicated, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner with a simple presentation.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed after the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 59) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 27) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 61(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 59).

The power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "O" and "X" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, an image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variation performance in the case of ``a special pattern jackpot'', and an image is displayed for a fixed period after the suspension of the variation performance in the case of ``out of the special pattern''.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entry is detected in the first ball entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the area 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. directed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64a, the variation performance is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation performance is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the through gate 67, so the chances of lottery of the normal pattern are increased and the chance of winning the normal pattern is also increased. As a result, there are more chances that the electric accessory will be released as a jackpot of normal symbols, so that the ball will easily enter the second winning hole 64b, and the special symbol lottery will be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64a is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64a. If it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information change over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also describes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The created configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start-up winning. .

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image). This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2805 in FIG. 59). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4705 in FIG. 72(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3101 in FIG. 61(b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61B) and the simple display setting process (see S3108 in FIG. 61(b) S3109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed.

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 72(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data that is not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 72(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 27) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 61(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 69) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 27), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed (Fig. 61(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4307 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 73). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 73). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4902 in FIG. 74).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 61B) is executed (see S4902 in FIG. 74).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 50. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 299, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed as well as the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). The details of this special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the special symbol variation processing, the processing for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the normal symbol variation processing for performing the processing associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are performed. (S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various judgments and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determined variation display is performed by predetermined control. In this mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to simultaneously perform variable display, or control is executed to stop display in a display mode showing the determination result. The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of a big hit game or a small hit game (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot or small hit is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the big hit or the small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed (S202). When it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), a first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), when the prescribed variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has passed, the processing of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. be done. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), the variation of the second special symbol is stopped in the symbol indicating the big win (or small win), and the big win game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during variable display is executed. It should be noted that, when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped with a symbol indicating a big win (or a small win), the variation of the first special symbol being displayed may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot, an extremely short variation time is selected so as not to be forcibly stopped due to the variation of the other. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the judgment of a big win from being forcibly stopped and displayed with the result of the lottery that is lost due to the forced stop. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), a process related to the start of variation of the first special symbol is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) or the second special symbol variation stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S205: Yes), a second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) will be described later in detail, but similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has passed , the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. The details of this second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), the process necessary to start the variation of the second special symbol is executed. This second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S301). If there is no winning in the first winning opening 64a (S301: No), this process is terminated. If there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S301: Yes), next, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. (S302).

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S303). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) will be described later in detail, but based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a, the set game state Judgment of a big hit, a small hit, etc. is executed based on. The details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S304). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), the variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. A process is performed to select based on each counter value. The details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the first symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), 1 is subtracted from the value of the state counter 203k (S305), and it is determined whether the value of the state counter 203k is greater than 0 (S306). If the value of the state counter 203k is greater than 0 (S306: Yes), this process is terminated. If the value of the state counter 203k is 0 (S306: No), then state A is set in the state setting area 203m (S307), a state command indicating state A is set (S308), and then this process is performed. exit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the value of the state counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and when the state counter 203k becomes 0, the state A, which is the initial state (normal state), is set. be done. As a result, when state B or state C is set, the value of the state counter becomes 0, so that state A is automatically set. Thus, by shifting the state according to the number of times of variation of the special symbols and switching the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol, it is possible to give the player an advantageous state for a certain period of time by easy control. can do.

Next, referring to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a is obtained (S401). Next, based on the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 14(a)), the lottery result is acquired based on whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value (S402). Here, as shown in FIG. 14(a), "399" is set as the big hit determination value with respect to the value of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 398" is set as the small hit determination value. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, when it is not a big hit, it is determined to be a small hit.

It is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S403), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the jackpot flag 203f is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S404). , The special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is set to the big hit (S405), and the first special symbol big hit displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is based on the value of the acquired winning type counter. A pattern is set (S406), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S403, the lottery result is not a big hit, that is, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S403: No), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203i is set to ON (S407), and the special figure 1 The lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is set to a small hit (S408), the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and then this process is executed. finish.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S501), and then in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), the first It is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big win, that is, whether or not the big win flag is set to ON for the first special symbol (S502).

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S502: Yes), a jackpot variation pattern is selected based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 (S503). , S505. In the process of S503, based on the hit variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 15 (c)) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, select one of the special figure 1 jackpot variation patterns A to C do.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (that is, the big hit flag 203f for the first special symbol is off) (S502: No), the acquired variation type counter Based on the value of CS1, a small hit variation pattern is selected from the set small hit variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 16(a)) (S504), and then the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, to indicate the selected variation pattern, to generate a special figure 1 variation pattern command (S505), and then, to end this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the jackpot flag 203f is turned on for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set (S602). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203f is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON (S603). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is turned on is set.

After completing the processing of S603, the special figure 1 stop classification command indicating the set stop classification is set (S604). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, a special figure 1 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S606). Then, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the jackpot flag 203f is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S602: No), the special figure 1 small hit stop process is executed (S610), and this process ends as it is. do. In this special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610), the process regarding the stop of the 1st special design corresponding to the small hit of the determination result is performed. In addition, this special figure 1 small hit stop processing (S610) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203g is on. Determine (S608). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is off in the process of S608 (S608: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203g is ON in the process of S608 (S608: Yes), the second special symbol is stopped by the big hit or the small hit, so the second special symbol being executed In order to stop the variation based on the 1 special symbol, a special figure 1 forced stop process is executed (S609). The details of this special figure 1 forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop processing (S204), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol during variable display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game A process (S603 to S609 or S612) for stopping the variable display is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is a symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) and the variation is stopped, and the big win game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable display is performed. A process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is a symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) and the variation is stopped (S610: Yes), it is configured to interrupt (temporarily stop) the variation of the second special symbol during variation display. You may

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, special figure 1 forced stop processing (S609), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 forced stop processing (S609).

In the special figure 1 forced stop process (FIG. 34, S609), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is set to off (S611), then the special figure 1 fluctuation indicating the off of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g A stop command is set (S612). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to be off (S613), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped by the off symbol (S614), and the special figure 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is set (S615), the process ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is turned on (the timing at which the fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit with the second special symbol stops), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has not yet reached. Even if it has passed, it is forcibly stopped as a result of the determination that it is out of line. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is only necessary to execute a small win or a big win for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610) which is one process of 1st special symbol fluctuation|variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204) is demonstrated. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 small per stop process (S610).

In the special figure 1 small per stop process (FIG. 35, S610), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON (S621), then the special figure 2 indicating the ON of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h A fluctuation stop command is set (S622). Then, a small winning scenario corresponding to the selected small winning type is set (S623), a confirmation command of the first special design is set (S624), and the first special design of the first design display device 37 changes. After stopping (S625), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. 36 to 38 are flow charts showing this second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 36, S206), the process for the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol in contrast to the above-described first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203). , The only difference is that the processing for the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol, and since the same processing is executed for the other processing, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 36, S206), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703).

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37, S703) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) in the following points. In the processing of S801 corresponding to the processing of S401, the first special design execution area 203a is changed to the second special design execution area 203b, and in each processing of S804 to S809 corresponding to each processing of S404 to S409 , Each differs in that special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to special figure 2 (second special symbol). Since the other points are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 38, S704) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304) in the following points. In the process of S902 corresponding to the process of S502, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), S503 to S505 In each process of S903 to S905 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (first special symbol variation pattern command) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207). The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204) in the following points. In the process of S912 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2", and in the process of S913 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The point that the fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag, the process of S1914 corresponding to the process of S604, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command, S608 In the process of S918 corresponding to the process, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the process of S917 corresponding to the process of S607, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is the second 920 corresponding to the processing of S610, the point of changing to the special symbol fluctuation stop, the processing of S919 corresponding to the processing of S609, the point of changing the special figure 1 forced stop processing to the special figure 2 forced stop processing, and the processing of S610 In the process, the special figure 1 small per stop process is changed to the special figure 2 small per stop process, respectively. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

In addition, the special figure 2 forced stop processing (see S919 of FIG. 39, FIG. 40(a)) executed in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 39), and the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 39 See) Special figure 2 small per stop processing (see S920 in FIG. 39, see FIG. 40 (b)) is similarly the above-mentioned special figure 1 forced stop processing (see FIG. 34) and special figure 1 small per Since the same processing as the stop processing (see FIG. 35) is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description is omitted.

Thus, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variably displayed. can be made Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can play the game while concentrating on the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big win or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1001). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display device (not shown) displays the winning to when the electric accessory 632 is controlled to open and close. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is being variably displayed (S1002). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1011 ). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1009, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

In the process of S1011, if the variation time has not passed (S1011: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols displayed in a variable manner has passed (S1011: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1012). In the processing of S1012, if the lottery of normal symbols is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1007, the second symbol display device (not shown) stops the "○" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the processing of S1010, the second symbol display device (not shown) displays the "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set so that it is stopped (lighted up). When the stop display is set by the process of S1012, the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol display mode set by the process of S1007 and the process of S1009. Stopped display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1013). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1013: Yes), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1014). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a loss (S1013: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S1003). When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S1003: No), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 are stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c. (S1004). The second hit random number value obtained based on the normal figure hit random number table 202b is executed to determine whether it is right or wrong (S1005). It is determined whether or not the lottery result of S1005 is winning (S1006). When it is determined that the lottery result of S1005 is winning (S1006: Yes), the display mode for winning is set (S1007). The opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1008). After that, the variation time of the second symbol is selected based on the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S1004 and the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g (S1009). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that the second symbol is out, the display mode at the time of the out is set (S1010), and after that, after executing the process of S1009, this process is finished.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1101), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 43), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1201). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1202). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1203).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1204), and if it is turned on (S1204: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205). (S1205: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1512.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1206). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data has been destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1212, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1212). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1213, S1514).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall opens, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed during startup processing, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1213, S1214).

Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1213, S1214) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1213, S1214), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1213), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1214). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1210.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1205: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is If it is normal (S1207: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1208). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S1209), and the process proceeds to S1210. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1210). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1211). Then, the process proceeds to main processing (S1600), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1600). This main process (see FIG. 44) is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 44), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1301).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 .

When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303). A jackpot control process is executed (S1304). Details of this jackpot control process (S1304) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but a process of setting the operation of the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S1304) is executed, the small hit control process (S1305) is executed. In this small winning control process (S1305), the process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 in the small winning game is executed. This small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric accessary product opening/closing process is executed (S1306). In this electric accessory opening/closing process (S1306), the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 64b1 is executed. Thereafter, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S3607).

Next, display control processing of the second pattern (for example, the pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display device 83 is executed (S1308). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Then, the variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol occurs, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1309). ), if the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process proceeds to S1310, and the above-described processes after S1301 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous main process (S1310: No), the second main process is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1311). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1301 (S1312).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1301 to S1308 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and displayed as a variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1308, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1309: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 42 has been executed, so the power-off process from S1313 onwards is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1313), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1314). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1315), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1316), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1319 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1301 to S1308, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1311 and S1312 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1251. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1301. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1304). This jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1621). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the pointer of the jackpot scenario that is set is updated (S1402). Here, in the jackpot scenario, processes specified for pointers updated in chronological order are respectively set, and processes necessary for the jackpot game are set in chronological order.

It is determined whether or not the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the updated pointer is the timing indicating the start of the jackpot game (S1403). Jackpot Start is data that is set the first time the pointer is updated after the jackpot scenario is set. When it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1403: Yes), an opening command is set (S1404). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1403, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the big win (S1403: No), it is determined whether data indicating that it is time to start a new round is set (S1405). When it is determined that the data indicating the start of a new round is set (S1405: Yes), the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1406). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1405: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407). When it is determined that the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407: Yes), the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1408). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1407 that the data does not indicate the end timing of the round (S1407: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the timing of the ending (S1409). When it is determined that the data indicates the start timing of the ending (S1409: Yes), a display command indicating the display mode of the ending is set (S1410), the set jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that the data does not indicate the timing of starting the ending (S1409: No), the first winning process is executed (S1412).

Here, referring to FIG. 46, the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 45, S1304) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first winning process (S1412). In this first winning process (S1412), the number of balls entered by the second variable winning device 650 during the round is counted, and the corresponding control logic is executed.

In the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), first, it is determined whether the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the pointer corresponds to the round period (S1501). If it is determined that it is not during the round period (S1501: No), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1502). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during the round period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650a (S1503). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650a (S1503: Yes), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is updated by adding 1 (S1504). It is determined whether the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1505). If it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is less than the upper limit (S1505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is equal to or higher than the upper limit (S1505: Yes), the second variable winning device 650 is set to the closed state (S1506). The pointer of the jackpot scenario is updated to the position indicating the data corresponding to the end of the round (S1507), after which this process is terminated. Thus, in the present embodiment, the end condition of one round is until 10 balls are entered or the release period of 30 seconds elapses. By updating the pointer at the end of the round, it is possible to immediately set the end of the round when 10 balls are won, and to shift to the subsequent process related to the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the small hit control process (S1305), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S1305). In the small winning control process (S1305), opening control of the first variable winning device 65 in the small winning game and the like are executed.

In the small hit control process (FIG. 47, S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S1601). If it is determined that the small winning scenario is not set (S1601: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the small winning scenario is set (S1601: Yes), the pointer of the small winning scenario is updated by 1 (S1602). Here, the small winning scenario is set for each small winning type, and the processing related to the first variable winning device 65 executed in each small winning game is set to the pointer in chronological order.

It is determined whether the data of the small winning scenario indicated by the updated pointer is data corresponding to the start timing of the small winning game (S1603). When it is determined that the data corresponds to the start timing of the small winning game (S1603: Yes), an opening command indicating the start of the small winning game is set (S1604). After that, this process ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B is displayed at the opening of the small winning game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small winning game (S1603: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1605). When it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1605: Yes), small winning operation setting processing is executed (S1606). In this small winning operation setting process (1606), the operation of the channel solenoid 65k (the solenoid that operates the switching member 65h) of the first variable winning device 65 and the operation timing of the open/close door 65f are set. The details of this small hit operation setting process (S1606) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning operation setting process (S1606) which is one process in the small winning control process (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. FIG. In the small winning operation setting process (S1656), first, the opening operation data of the first variable winning device 65 corresponding to the small winning type is read from the small winning scenario (S1701). As the opening operation data read here, the opening timing of the open/close door 65f1 and the operation timing of the channel solenoid 65k are respectively read.

Based on the opening operation data read in S1701, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k is set (S1702). As for the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k, the operation from turning on the solenoid to turning it off is set. The opening operation (opening timing) of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set (S1703). After that, this process ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, the operation of the flow path solenoid corresponding to the small hit type and the opening and closing door 65f1 are set respectively. As a result, it is possible to easily switch and set the opening operation that makes it possible to enter the V winning switch 65e3 and the opening operation that makes it difficult to enter the V winning switch 65e3 (impossible to enter the ball).

In this embodiment, in small hits A to D (all small hits), the induction piece 65h2 turns on the flow path solenoid 65k to the open state shown in FIG. 10 (a) for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game can be switched by On the other hand, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is in the open state after 2 seconds from the start of the small prize game in the small prizes A to C, and at that time, the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that the specific prize winning is achieved. A game ball that has won the opening 65a cannot be guided to the specific discharge opening 65e2. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set to be impossible (difficult) to win.

On the other hand, in the small win D, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened for 1 second from the start of the small win game, and then closed for 0.2 seconds (interval period between the next rounds), and then opened and closed again for 1 second. The door 65f1 is opened. As a result, when a game ball enters the specific ball entrance 65a in the open state in the small hit D, the period in which the guide piece 65h2 is set to the open state is reached, so the game ball is discharged to the special discharge port 65e2 by the guide piece 65h2. is induced to win the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small winning D, the start of the big winning game is executed.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description continues. In the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a new round (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the round (open period of 2 seconds has elapsed) (S1607). When it is determined that it is time to end the round (S1607: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S1608). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1607 that it is not the time to end the round (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the round (S1609). When it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1609: Yes), small winning ending processing is executed (S1610). The small winning ending process (S1610) will be described later with reference to FIG. If so, control processing such as setting of a jackpot game is executed.

With reference to FIG. 49, the small winning ending process (S1610) which is one process in the small winning control process (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning ending process (S1610).

In the small hitting ending process (FIG. 49, S1610), first, a small hitting ending command is set (S1801). It is determined whether the V winning flag 203e is set to ON (S1802). Here, the V winning flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small winning game, and is the second winning executed in the small winning control process (S1305) described later. In the process (FIG. 50, S1611), when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is ON, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203e is set to ON. be.

In the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is ON (S1802: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot A is set (S1803). The V winning flag 203e is set to OFF (S1804), and then the processing of S1805 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1802: No), the process of S1805 is executed. In the processing of S1805, the state (state A to state C) corresponding to the small hit type executed this time is set in the state setting area 203m (S1805). The state counter value corresponding to the set state is set in the state counter 203k (S1806).

The state corresponding to the small hit type set here is set based on the state after the small hit set in the small hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14(d)). Also, the value of the state counter corresponding to each small win is set based on the value of the number of state transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15(a)). After S1806 is executed, a state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1807).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed, the state C, which is the most advantageous state, is set. Therefore, even after the small winning D is executed and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and the big winning game is executed, the state C advantageous to the player is set, so that the small winning D is easily executed. , it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Furthermore, even if the game ball cannot pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the execution of the small win D, the state C is set after the small win D, so it is expected that the small win D will be executed again. can be given to the player, and a significant decrease in the player's motivation for the game can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description continues. In the process of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing, the second winning process is executed (S1611). After that, this process ends. As for the second winning process (S1611), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 50, a process relating to entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 65 is executed.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second winning process (S1661) which is one process in the small winning control process (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In the second winning process (S1661), first, it is determined whether or not the data indicated by the small winning scenario pointer is within the round valid period (S1901). During the valid period of the round means the period from when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened, when the closing condition is satisfied and when it is closed, to when the game ball that entered the first variable winning device 65 is discharged. This period includes the brushing time. In this embodiment, the ball sweeping period is set to 2 seconds.

If it is determined in S1901 that the round is valid (S1901: Yes), the first winning counter 203d1 is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1902). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is determined that the round valid period is not reached (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first specific winning hole 65a (S1903). When it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first specific winning hole 65a (S1903: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first specific ball entrance 65a (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the first winning counter 203d1 to update it. It is determined whether or not the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1905). When it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is less than the upper limit, the process of S1908 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or higher than the upper limit (S1905: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S1906). The small winning scenario pointer is updated to the position of the data indicating the end timing of the round (S1907). After that, the process of S1908 is executed.

In the processing of S1908, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 203e is ON (S1908). When the V winning flag 203e is ON (S1908: Yes), the game ball has already passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (the right to execute the big winning game in the small winning game has been acquired), so this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1908: No), it is determined whether the V winning switch 65e3 is ON, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (S1909). If it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is off (S1909: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is on (S1909: Yes), the V winning flag 203e is set to ON (S1910), and the V winning command is set (S1911). After that, this process ends. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this V winning command, a notification mode indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set. In this embodiment, the character "V" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect "cuin" is output, and the corresponding lamp is lit.

<Control Processing Executed by Sound Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 51, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S2117 (see FIG. 52) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of power failure from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52, S2114), it executes power failure processing in S2117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2003. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S2117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see FIG. 52 and S2116). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010).

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 52, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or the previous process (S2101: Yes) was executed (S2101). , if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the processing of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S2102 to S2110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S2111 and the variable display setting process of S2112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). After that, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Thereafter, variation time measurement processing for measuring the remaining variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed (S2111). This fluctuation time measurement process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. Run.

When the process of S2111 is executed, the command determination process (S2112) for performing the process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2113. The details of this command determination process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S2113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off processing is executed (S2117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2112). This command determination process (S2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S2112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 53, S2112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S2201). Here, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is the command in order to indicate the fluctuation in the 1st special design, mainly it is the command which designates the fluctuation time in the 1st special design. And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), special figure 1 variation start processing is executed to variably display the first special symbol (S2202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described. Figure 54 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202). In the special figure 1 variation start process (Fig. 54, S2202), first, the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the variation pattern type is selected from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command. Extract (S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. From this variation pattern type, the success/failure determination result (small win or big win) can be determined.

When the process of S2302 is executed, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) indicated by the received variation pattern command is determined (S2303). It is determined whether or not the lottery result indicated by the received variation pattern command is a small hit (S2304). It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit of the first special symbol (S2304). If the lottery result is not a small win, that is, if it is a big win (S2304: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2304: Yes), the fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON (S2305). It is determined whether the second special symbol is stopped (S2306). When it is determined that the variation of the second special symbol is stopped (S2306: Yes), based on the variation time of the first special symbol and the effect counter 223g, the effect selection table during preparation in the fusion effect selection table 222b The effect under preparation is selected from 222b3 (S2307). After that, the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, in the configuration of this embodiment, the first special symbol always starts to fluctuate first. Therefore, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, it indicates that the game is normal. Also, in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed, the variable display of the fusion effect is started. In the period when the variation of the first special symbol is started and the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, the fusion effect before the competition shown in FIG. 4(a) is started (before the start) is displayed. Here, a plurality of kinds of fusion effects before starting the competition as shown in FIG. A value of the effect counter 223g is assigned to each of the fusion effects before starting a plurality of competitions, and the corresponding fusion effect is selected based on the obtained value of the effect counter 223g. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify fusion effects before the start of the competition, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored. It should be noted that the fusion effect before the competition is configured in a display mode for, for example, 5 seconds, and is repeatedly set until a new fusion effect is set or a new display mode is set in the third symbol display device 81. be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect before the competition is configured to be selected by the value of the effect counter 223g, but it is not limited to that, for example, it may be selected according to the variation pattern of the normal symbol currently being varied. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the variation pattern of the normal symbol from the fusion effect before the race, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol that is advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, the variation pattern with a short variation time (0 The player can be notified that the variation pattern of .5 seconds)) is selected. Furthermore, by switching the type of the fusion effect selected according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in an open state, and the game ball can be entered into the second winning hole 64b. It is possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to win a prize through the second prize-winning port 64b by stopping shooting.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating (S2306: No), based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter, the special effect selection table in the fusion effect selection table 222b A special effect is set from 222b4 (S2308). An abnormal change command is set (S2309), and then the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, when the second special symbol is already being varied when the variation of the first special symbol is started, the configuration of the present embodiment is in an abnormal state. When the variation of the second special symbol has already started when the variation of the first special symbol starts, it is possible that before winning the game ball that wins the first winning opening 64a 64a), the game ball is stopped by a magnet or the like, and the game ball is entered into the second winning opening 64b, or the game is played between the second winning opening 64b and the ordinary electric accessory 64b1. It is conceivable that the game ball enters the second winning hole 64b after a while after the ball is caught. In this case, the special effect displayed in the effect display area Ds3 is an effect in which the characters "winning prize abnormal" are displayed. Also, an alarm sound is output to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the game parlor. Also, a command is output from the external output terminal to the hall computer to indicate that there is an abnormal change (a prize-winning abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from fluctuating before the first special symbol due to dishonesty, trouble, etc., or from causing only the second special symbol to fluctuate and display, thereby preventing the game parlor side from being greatly disadvantaged. .

In the process of S2310, the special figure 1 remaining variation time is set to the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i based on the variation time of the first special symbol (S2310). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description continues. After the processing of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (figure 54, S2202) is executed, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S2203). Here, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is the special design which shows the fluctuation display feature in order to variably display the 2nd special design. Special Figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for mainly notifying the validity determination result of the second special symbol and the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol. And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204) is executed. The details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described. Figure 55 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204). In the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2401), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command ( S2402). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) described later. It is used when setting a second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the second special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When the process of S2402 is executed, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined from the received variation pattern command (S2403). It is determined whether or not the lottery result indicated by the received variation pattern command is a small hit (S2404). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2404: Yes), the fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON (S2405). It is determined whether the first special symbol is fluctuating (S2406). When it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating (S2406: Yes), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is more than the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time). It is determined whether the time is long (S2407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time is shorter than the special figure 2 variation time (S2407: Yes), the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player stops first, and the first special symbol is small. Since winning is executed, a losing fusion effect is selected from the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 of the fusion effect selection table 222b based on the special figure 1 remaining variation time and the effect counter 223g (S2408).

In this losing fusion effect, the effect of starting the competition shown in FIG. 4B is displayed, and the effect of the rabbit winning shown in FIG. It is a performance that is executed. By displaying the effect that the turtle loses, the player can recognize that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first. In the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, a plurality of types of losing fusion effects are set corresponding to the values of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, the player can see various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early or predicting the result before the result of the effect is displayed.

After that, based on the special figure 1 remaining variation time, the second special symbol variation time is set to the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j as the second special symbol remaining variation time (special figure 2 remaining variation time) (S2409) . After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2407, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining variation time is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (S2407: No), the variation time of the special figure 2 and the value of the production counter 223g Based on this, the winning fusion effect is selected and set from the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 of the fusion effect selection table 222b (S2410). The variation time of the second special symbol is set to the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i (S2411). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is set to the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time counter 223j (S2412).

Here, when the second special symbol determined as No in S2407 stops earlier than the first special symbol, the small hit of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, as the fusion effect, the effect of starting the competition shown in FIG. 4(b) is executed, and as the result of the competition, the winning fusion effect shown in FIG. 5(b) where the turtle wins is selected as the second special symbol. Runs for variable time. Also, as for this win fusion effect, a plurality of types of win fusion effect are set in the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, it is possible to select various win fusion effects, and to provide a wide variety of effects to the player.

It should be noted that each winning fusion production described above is set to win production corresponding to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, respectively, and the losing fusion production starts to fluctuate the second special symbol from the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. A production period is set by subtracting the minimum possible period (the period until the earliest second special symbol starts to fluctuate). In the losing fusion effect, the blackout screen is set for 3 seconds until the end, and by adjusting the display period of the blackout according to the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the remaining fluctuation of the first special symbol set on time.

In addition, in the processing of S2406, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not fluctuating (S2413), since it is an abnormal state in which only the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the fluctuation time and production of the second special symbol A special effect is selected based on the value of the counter 223g (S2413). An abnormal variation command indicating abnormal variation is set (S2414). After that, the process of S2412 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description continues. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is received from the main controller 110 (S2205). When it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the contents of this stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop classification command is received, the special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2501). The stop type (jackpot A, small hit A to D, off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2502). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. After executing the processing of S2502, this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description continues. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2205, if it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is not received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the state command is received from the main controller 110 (S2209 ). If it is determined that the state command has been received (S2209: Yes), the state information (one of state A to state C) indicated by the state command is set in the sub-state setting area 223h (S2210). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2209 that the status command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether the V winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2211). When it is determined that the V winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2211: Yes), the V winning effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set (S2212). A display V winning effect command for instructing a V winning effect (displaying the letter "V" on the third symbol display device 81) is set (S2213). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, when it is determined that the V winning command is not received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S2214). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S2214: Yes), the special figure 1 confirmation command for display (if the special figure 1 confirmation command is received) or the special figure 2 for display Confirmation command (when special figure 2 confirmation command is received) is set (S2213). Reset the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i (when special figure 1 decision command is received) or special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j (when special figure 2 decision command is received) to 0 which is the initial value. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is not received in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S2217), this End the process.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2113). This variable display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A, small hit A to D), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type Run.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2601). And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2601: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S2604 Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2601: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S2702).

Next, in the processing of S2603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the processing of S2203 of the command determination processing (FIG. 53, S2112) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. 223z, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S2603). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S2603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2604). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2604: No), the state of not receiving the special figure 2 variation pattern command from the main controller 110 Therefore, the process of S2607 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S2706). In the processing of S2402 of the special figure 2 variation start processing (Fig. 55, S2204), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is obtained from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is generated (S2606). Here, variable display of "o" and "x" displayed in the second display area Ds2 is set.

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S2606 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 54). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607). When it is determined that the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607: Yes), it is time to set the fusion effect in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, so the fusion effect start flag 223k is turned off. (S2608), and sets a fusion effect command for display indicating the selected fusion effect (S2609). After that, the process of S2610 is executed.

In the process of S2610, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON (S2610). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f are not set to ON (that is, they are OFF) (S2610: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is on , the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is set to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2612 ). After that, this process ends.

Next, the variation time measurement process (S2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the contents of this fluctuation time measurement process (S2111). In this variation time measurement process (S2111), a process of subtracting the remaining variation time of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the passage of time is executed.

It is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is a value greater than 0 (S2701). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is a value greater than 0 (S2701: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i and updated (S2702). After that, the process of S2703 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is 0 (S2701: No), the process of S2703 is executed.

In the processing of S2703, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is a value greater than 0 (S2703). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is a value greater than 0 (S2703: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S2704). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is 0 (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol are updated by subtracting about 1 ms corresponding to the counter value 1, so that the correct first special symbol and second special symbol are updated. The remaining fluctuation time of the pattern can be measured.

In the configuration of the present embodiment, it is configured to switch the variation pattern selection table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol according to the small hit type of the first special symbol, but not limited to that, the variation of the small hit of the first special symbol The pattern selection table may be switched. In this case, by switching to a variation pattern selection table in which a long variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to set an advantage for the player. In addition, not only the small hit of the first special symbol, but also a predetermined lottery (for example, every variation, table switching lottery with a predetermined probability) may be executed. Further, the table for selecting the variation time of the normal symbol may be switched by the small hit type of the first special symbol, or may be switched by the hit type of the normal symbol. In this case, it is advantageous for the player if the table is switched to a table in which the fluctuation time of the short normal symbols is easily selected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol were not set with reserved balls, but a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls) of reserved balls are set for both or only one of them. You may For example, by setting the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the first special symbol can be changed efficiently. Further, by setting a reserved ball for the second special symbol, the second special symbol can be changed efficiently. In addition, when setting the reserved ball to the second special symbol, it is preferable to set the open period of the normal electric accessory 64b1 to the open state only once in the period in which one game ball is entered. By constructing in this way, there is no difference between the number of reserved first special patterns (number of winning prizes) and the number of reserved second special patterns (number of winning prizes), and the problem that only the second special pattern fluctuates can be suppressed.

<Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 74. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2801), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2801) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used as a processor, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2902, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2902, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2904), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 59) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) (S2905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2801) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 60, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2903 to S2905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2901 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S2901. and the processing of S2902 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2903 to S2905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2903 to S2905 without performing the processes of S2901 and S2902 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2803). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2803, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2804, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 72(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 72(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 23 is drawn. Determination processing (see S3108 in FIG. 61B) and simple display setting processing (see S3109 in FIG. 61B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first winning hole 64a (starting winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. It is possible to perform a variable performance. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2805, interrupt permission is set (S2806), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(a). FIG. 61(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(b). FIG. 61(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 27) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 61(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101). If it is off (S3101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, command determination processing (S3102) is executed, and then display setting processing (S3103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3102), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S3103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3102), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S3104). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S3103) or the simple display setting processing (S3109). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S3106). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S3104), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S3105), 27, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and back reach, front and rear reach other than front and back, complete loss, chance The stop type table corresponding to the second eye) is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3101: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68, the details of the command determination process (S3102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3201). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3202). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S3203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S3204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3204: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S3205) and returns to the processing of S3201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. 63(a). FIG. 63(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3301).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3304), both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3305), and this processing ends.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 63), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3304, the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301 From the display data table, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, it is transferred by the processing of S3302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S3303 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S3206), If there is a display variation type command (S3206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3207), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the stop type command process (S3207) will now be described with reference to FIG. 63(b). FIG.63(b) is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S3401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop design counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) is executed, and the third design display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S3402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the stop symbols set by the processing of S3402 are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to OFF (S3403), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3402. In the above-described task processing (S3104), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3403, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description is continued. In the process of S3206, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S3206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command in the unprocessed commands (S3208), If there is a command (S3208: Yes), a jackpot-related command process is executed (S3209), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S3209) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S3209). This jackpot-related command processing (S3209) executes processing corresponding to the jackpot-related commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) received from the sound lamp control device 114. FIG.

In the jackpot-related command process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display in the unprocessed commands (S3501), and if there is an opening command for display (S3501: Yes), the opening command process is executed. (S3502), and the process proceeds to S3503.

Details of the opening command process (S3502) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3605), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description is continued. In the process of S3501, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S3503), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S3503: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Details of the round number command processing (S3504) will now be described with reference to FIG. 65(b). FIG. 65(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3503, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S3503: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3505). If there is an ending command for (S3505: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3506), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the ending command process (S3506) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3802).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3208, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S3208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3210), and the back image change command is determined. If there is a command (S3210: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S3211), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the back image change command process (S3211) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to ON ( S3901). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3902), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3901 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3902. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

In the task processing (S3104), if it is specified to display one of the back faces A to C according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S3902 is determined. , the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3902, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3210, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S3210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fusion effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3212), and the command is displayed. If there is a fusion effect command for use (S3212: Yes), the fusion effect command process is executed (S3213), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the fusion effect command process (S3213) will now be described with reference to FIG. 67(b). FIG. 67(b) is a flow chart showing the fusion effect command process (S3213). This fusion effect command process (S3213) executes the process corresponding to the display fusion effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the fusion effect command process (S3213), first, the fusion effect display data table is determined based on the display fusion effect command, the determined fusion effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S4001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S4002).

Then, based on the fusion effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4005), the fusion effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Thus, when the display fusion effect command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the fusion effect command process (S3213) is executed, and the fusion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIGS. 4 to 7). be. As described above, in the present embodiment, when only the first special symbol is fluctuating (the second special symbol is stopped), the display for displaying the production during preparation (see FIG. 7(a)) as the fusion production A fusion effect command is notified from the sound lamp control device 113 . On the other hand, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating, the fusion effect is a winning fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 and 5 (b)) or a losing fusion effect (FIG. 4 and The voice lamp control device 113 notifies a fusion effect command for display showing (see FIG. 5(a)). As a result, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a fusion effect corresponding to the varying state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description is continued. In the processing of S3212, if it is determined that there is no fusion effect command for display (S3212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a V winning effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3214). If there is a V winning effect command for display (S3214: Yes), V winning effect command processing is executed (S3215), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, the details of the V winning effect command process (S3215) will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). FIG. 68(a) is a flow chart showing the V winning effect command process (S3215). This V winning effect command process (S3215) is to execute the process corresponding to the display V winning effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the V winning effect command processing (S3215), first, the V winning effect display data table is determined based on the V winning effect display data table for display, and the determined V winning effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S4102).

Then, based on the V winning effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4105), the V winning effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, when the V winning effect command for display is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the V winning effect command processing (S3215) is executed, and the V winning effect (Fig. not shown) is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the V prize has been won.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description is continued. In the processing of S3214, if it is determined that there is no display V prize effect command (S3214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3216), and the error command If there is (S3216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3217), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the error command processing (S3219) will now be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3216, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3216: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3218), and the process returns to S3201.

In the process of S3201, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes ), and the processing of S3202 to S3218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S3201 to S3218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 63(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63(a)) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3301. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in this case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3302, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S3103), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4302), S4303-S4304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4401).

In the task processing (S3104), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304), or if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4303: No), then the process proceeds to S4305.

In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4505), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4502: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 69, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S4306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S4310), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S3104), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S4315, the stop design of the fluctuation effect performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4309, if the fixed display flag is ON (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing contents so that is displayed.

In the process of S4316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S3109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 23B or 23C) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, details of the transfer setting process (S3105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 72(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S4602), transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S4601, that is, if it is turned off (S4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 will be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 72(b). FIG. 72B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S4701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4702). In the processing of S4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4702 that the transfer process has not ended (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Also, as a result of the processing of S4701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing in S4703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 61B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S3108 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 73) (see S4601: No in FIG. 72(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 73, normal image transfer setting processing (S4603), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the previously executed display setting process (S3103) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Also, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4806).

In the process of S4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S4806 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4806: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so the normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4807. Also, as a result of the process of S4805, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807). is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S4807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is ON (S4809).

If the back image change flag 233w is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

In the process of S4809, if the back image change flag 233w is not ON, but OFF (S4809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S4815, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, details of the drawing process (S3106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S3104) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated (S4901). That is, in the process of S4901, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S3104), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S4902, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 61(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit compared to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. It is configured as follows. In the fusion effect based on the big win, a so-called cut-in effect called SP effect (see FIG. 75(b)) is displayed. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that the SP effect will be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the above-described SP effect is displayed even in the fusion effect executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed in spite of the fact that the lottery result is a small hit, an effect (shake performance) is displayed. As a result, even if a big win is not achieved in spite of the SP performance being displayed, the player is provided with a privilege that it becomes easy to determine the state to be shifted after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's desire to play.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the presentation mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 is partially changed. The configuration of the win variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the configuration of the winning fusion effect selection table provided in the voice ramp control device 113 is partially changed. 3, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, an example of the fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 75(a) to (c) are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the fusion effect.

In the present embodiment, when winning the jackpot or small win with the second special symbol, various win fusion effects (win fusion effects A, B, C) are displayed, and the jackpot or small win with the first special symbol is won. In this case, various losing fusion effects (losing fusion effects A, B, C, D, E, F) are displayed (see FIGS. 76(b) and (c)).

In the winning fusion effect A or the losing fusion effect A displayed when the jackpot is won, a performance simulating a competition between a rabbit and a tortoise is started as in the first embodiment described above (FIG. 75 ( a) see). Then, after a predetermined period of time (two seconds in the present embodiment) has passed since the start of the competition between the rabbit and the tortoise, an SP effect (so-called cut-in) in which the words "SP Chance!" effect) is displayed (see FIG. 75(b)). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "777") indicating a big win is displayed (not shown). As a result, the player can be notified that the jackpot has been won. Also, since the player plays the game expecting that the SP effect will be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the fusion performance displayed when winning various small hits, various fusion performances with SP performance (winning fusion performance B, losing fusion performance B, C, D, E) in which the above-mentioned SP performance is displayed, and SP Various fusion effects without effects (winning fusion effect C, losing fusion effect F) are prepared (see FIG. 76(b)).

In various fusion effects with SP effects, SP effects are displayed after a predetermined time (2 seconds) from the start of the fusion effect, as in the above-described winning fusion effect A or losing fusion effect A (FIG. 75 ( b) see). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "341" etc.) indicating a small win is displayed (see FIG. 75(c)). The stop symbol indicating the small hit is shaken up and down a predetermined number of times (2 to 8 times in this embodiment), and then becomes a complete stop display (still state). The number of times the stop symbol shakes is determined corresponding to various fusion effects (win fusion effect B, loss fusion effect B, C, D, E), details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 76(b). do. As a result, the player can predict the type of small winning won from the number of times the stop symbol shakes (that is, it is possible to predict the game state to be set), so the number of times the stop symbol shakes It is possible to attract the attention of the player and improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the fusion effect without SP effect (winning fusion effect C, losing fusion effect F), the winning fusion effect similar to the above-described first embodiment or the losing fusion effect is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, the stop symbol indicating the small win may be stop-displayed. In this case, an effect in which the stop symbols sway is executed, and a privilege is given that the game state to be set can be predicted. As a result, even if a small win (not a big win) occurs after the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, the player's desire to participate in the game is not lost. It can be prevented (suppressed).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 76, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 76(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Other configurations of the ROM 202 are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so illustration and description thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the hit variation pattern selection table 202f of the present embodiment, special figure 1 big hit variation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, for the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thereby, it is possible to secure the effect time of the fusion effect (losing fusion effect A) displayed when the above-mentioned jackpot is won.

On the other hand, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern E (variation time 4 seconds) is set. Then, for the second big hit variation pattern E, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, like the first special symbol, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to ensure the performance time of the win fusion effect (win fusion effect A) displayed when the above-described jackpot is won.

FIG. 76(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 provided in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 110 in the second embodiment, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the loss fusion production|presentation selection table 222b2 provided in ROM222 of the audio ramp control apparatus 110 in 2 embodiment. Other configurations of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76(b), the contents of the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 will be described. The win fusion effect selection table 222b1 is provided with win fusion effect A as a fusion effect type when the result of determination of whether the second special symbol is a jackpot. Then, for the win fusion effect A, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, when the result of judging whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit, the win fusion effect A of the second special symbol is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223g.

On the other hand, winning fusion production B and winning fusion production C are provided as the fusion production type in the case where the result of judging whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit D (outside). The determination value of the performance counter 223g is set to "0 to 99" for the win fusion effect B, and the determination value of the effect counter 223g is set to "100 to 198" for the win fusion effect C. It is Therefore, when the success/failure determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit D (out), the winning fusion effect B with SP effect is selected with a probability of 100/199, and the SP effect is absent with a probability of 99/199. win fusion effect C is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 76(c), the contents of the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 will be described. In the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, the losing fusion effect A is selected as the fusion effect type when the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol is a jackpot. For the losing fusion effect A, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit, the losing fusion effect A is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223g.

On the other hand, loss fusion effects B, C, and F are provided as the fusion effect type in the case where the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit A (out). Then, "0 to 19" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production B, and "20 to 49" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production C. , and "50 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g for the losing fusion effect F. Therefore, when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit A (missing), the loss fusion effect B with SP effect is selected (2 swings) with a probability of 20/199, and 30/199 Loss fusion effect C with SP effect (the number of shakes is 4 times) is selected with a probability of , and Loss fusion effect F without SP effect is selected with a probability of 149/199.

In addition, loss fusion production C, D, and F are provided as the fusion production type in the case where the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit B (out). Then, "0 to 49" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production C, and "50 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production D. 100 to 198 are set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g for the losing fusion effect F. Therefore, when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit B (missing), the loss fusion effect C with SP effect is selected (four shakes) with a probability of 50/199, and 50/199 Loss fusion effect D with SP effect (six shaking times) is selected with a probability of , and Loss fusion effect F without SP effect is selected with a probability of 99/199.

Furthermore, loss fusion effects D, E, and F are provided as the fusion effect type when the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol is a small hit C (off). Then, "0 to 74" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production D, and "75 to 149" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production E. , and "150 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g for the losing fusion effect F. Therefore, when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit C (off), the loss fusion effect D (swinging number of times 6) with SP effect is selected with a probability of 75/199, and 75/199 Loss fusion effect E with SP effect (8 swings) is selected with a probability of , and Loss fusion effect F without SP effect is selected with a probability of 49/199.

Thus, in the present embodiment, after the SP effect is displayed, if the symbol indicating the small win is stopped and displayed, the stopped symbol is completely stopped and displayed according to the type of the small win ( The number of times it shakes until it stops) is set. As a result, the type of the small win can be predicted (that is, the game state to be set can be predicted) based on the number of times the pattern indicating the small win shakes until it is completely stopped and displayed (stopped). It is possible to make the player pay attention to the stopped display of the shown symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the player. Incidentally, the selection ratio of each SP effect described above may be determined arbitrarily.

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the type of small winning won, until the design indicating the small winning is completely stopped, the number of times that the pattern is shaken is configured to be variable, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Specifically, a specific character image (for example, an image of a boy) may naturally be displayed in accordance with the type of small prize won.

In the present embodiment, in the fusion effect corresponding to all small hit types (or big hits), it is configured so that there is a possibility that the SP effect is displayed, but it is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in the fusion effect corresponding to a specific small win type (for example, the game state is switched to an advantageous state for the player). As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the specific small win type has been won (that is, the game state has become advantageous for the player).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. First, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 77, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (S2202) in the second embodiment, like the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment, is executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 processing. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and the description is abbreviate|omitted about the same part as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (refer FIG. 54) in 1st Embodiment, and only a different part is demonstrated.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, the processing of S2301 to S2303 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S2305 without executing the process of S2304. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win, the process proceeds to S2305. Thereby, even when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fusion effect can be displayed.

The processing after S2305 (processing of S2305 to S2310) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 78, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, like the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment, is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 . It should be noted that the same parts as the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, the explanation thereof is omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

In special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, the processing of S2401 to S2403 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S2405 without executing the process of S2404. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the process proceeds to S2405. Thereby, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win, the fusion effect can be displayed.

The processing after S2405 (processing of S2405 to S2410) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the processing of S2408 is different in that the losing fusion effect is selected using the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 76(c). Moreover, in the processing of S2410, it is different in that the win fusion effect is selected using the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 76(b). As a result, in the fusion effect, the SP effect can be displayed, and then the effect of shaking the stop symbol of the small win can be displayed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, and the fusion effect is the SP effect (Fig. 75 (b) ) is configured to display a so-called cut-in effect. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that the SP effect will be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the above-described SP effect is displayed even in the fusion effect executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed in spite of the fact that the lottery result is a small hit, an effect (shake performance) is displayed. As a result, even if a big win is not achieved in spite of the SP performance being displayed, the player is provided with a privilege that it becomes easy to determine the state to be shifted after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the fusion effect corresponding to all small hit types (or big hits), it is configured so that there is a possibility that the SP effect is displayed, but it is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in the fusion effect corresponding to a specific small win type (for example, the game state is switched to an advantageous state for the player). As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the specific small win type has been won (that is, the game state has become advantageous for the player).

In the present embodiment, the number of times of shaking the pattern until the pattern indicating the small win is completely stopped is varied according to the kind of the small win won, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may of course be displayed according to the type of the winning small prize.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect is displayed as the SP effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of displaying a cut-in effect, the background image may be changed, the display mode of the effect may be changed, or a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may be displayed. You may make it display, and you may make it output an information sound, of course.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 90. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol. Also, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. Thereby, the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of each special symbol, that is, the game time elapses. Since the game state changes according to the time, the game can be varied, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count of the number of lotteries for the first special symbols is reset when a big hit or a specific small hit (in this embodiment, a small hit E). Also, the count (count) of the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is reset when a big win or a specific small win (in this embodiment, a small win G). As a result, the timing at which the number of lotteries for the first special symbol and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to the game state changing according to the lapse of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game and improve the interest of the player.

In the third embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on a variation pattern selection table that is set for selecting variation patterns for each special symbol. According to this rear image, the current game state is a game state (that is, a game state disadvantageous to the player) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier than the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the second special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, in a state advantageous to the player). As a result, the player can be interested in the setting (display) of the back image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 The configuration of the small hit type selection table 202d provided is partially changed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 The point is that some of the processes that are executed have been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display mode of an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment.

In this embodiment, the rear image is set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. . According to this rear image, the current game state is a game state (that is, a game state disadvantageous to the player) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier than the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the second special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, in a state advantageous to the player).

For example, a short variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a long variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. If so, the back image of "city" indicating that the expectation level is 1 (lowest) is displayed (see FIG. 82(b)). On the other hand, a long variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a short variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. In this case, a back image of a "school of fish" indicating that the expectation level is 5 (highest) is displayed (see FIG. 82(b)). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 79(a) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the back image of "mountain" is set as the back image. In this case, as in the first embodiment described above, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the lower left display area Ds1 of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the second special symbol is displayed in the lower right display area Ds2 of the screen. A variable display of special symbols is displayed. At the center of the screen, an effect (fusion effect) simulating a competition between a rabbit and a turtle is displayed, and a back image of a "mountain" is displayed as the back image.

Similarly, FIG. 79(b) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the back image of "sand beach" is set as the back image. c) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when a back image of "bottom of the sea" is set as the back image.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82(b), but each rear image includes a variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and a variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. is set in combination with Specifically, when a variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, the back image to be selected is a highly expected back image. Further, when a variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the back image to be selected becomes a highly expected back image. That is, when there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol will be stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the rear image with a high degree of expectation is selected. .

As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the display of the highly anticipated back image, which enhances the interest of the player.

In this embodiment, the rear image is set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. Instead of changing the setting of the back image, for example, it may be configured to display a character design, to change the presentation mode, or to output a notification sound. good.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the ROM202 of the present embodiment has the configuration of the ROM202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13), the contents of the small hit type selection table 202d are partially changed, and the variation table A setting information storage area 202j is added. Details of the small hit type selection table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 80(c).

The variation table setting information storage area 202j is an area for storing information defining the relationship between the number of lotteries and the variation pattern selection table to be set. A variation pattern selection table for each special symbol is set based on the information in the variation table setting information storage area 202j.

This variation table setting information storage area 202j is referred to when determining whether it is time to change the setting of the variation pattern table in the first special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 83) (see S352 in FIG. 83). It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n (see S353 in FIG. 83). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 86), it is similarly referred to when determining whether it is time to change the setting of the variation pattern table (see S752 in FIG. 86), and the special figure 2 lottery number of times It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol based on the value of the counter 203p (see S753 in FIG. 86).

Details of the variation table setting information storage area 202j will now be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 81(a), the variation table setting information storage area 202j has a special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 and a special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2. The special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 is a storage area in which the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n. The special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 is a storage area in which the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p.

First, with reference to FIG.81(b), the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 provided in MPU201 of the main control unit 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, as a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, a first short variation table (a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected) and a second 1 medium fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the 1st short fluctuation table) and the 1st long fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the 1st medium fluctuation table) ) and are provided. Details of the first short variation table, first medium variation table, and first long variation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81(d).

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, the first short fluctuation table is set for the value "0 to 7" of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, and the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n "8 to 18", the first medium fluctuation table is set for the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n value "19 to 48", the first long fluctuation table is set for the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n value " 49 to 98" is set to the first medium variation table, and the first long variation table is set to the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n "99 ~".

Next, with reference to Drawing 81 (c), special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 provided in MPU201 of main control unit 110 in a 3rd embodiment is explained.

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, as a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p, a second long variation table (a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected), A second medium fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the second long fluctuation table is more likely to be selected) and a second short fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the second medium fluctuation table) ) and are provided. The details of the second long variation table, the second medium variation table, and the second short variation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81(e).

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, a second long variation table is set for the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p "0 to 7", and the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p "8 to The second medium fluctuation table is set for 18 ”, the second short fluctuation table is set for the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p “19 to 48”, and the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p “ 49 to 98" is set to the second medium variation table, and the second short variation table is set to the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p "99 ~".

Next, with reference to Drawing 81 (d), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202f provided in MPU201 of main control unit 110 in a 3rd embodiment is explained. The special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202f defines a first short variation table, a first medium variation table, and a first long variation table.

The first short variation table is a variation pattern table in which the special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) with a short variation time is likely to be selected. Specifically, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 149" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "150 to 197" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first short variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 150/199, special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 48/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199.

As for the first medium fluctuation pattern, compared to the first short fluctuation table, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are likely to be selected. pattern table. Specifically, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 99" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "100 to 195" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "196 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first medium variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 100/199, special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 96/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 3/199.

In the first long variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and the special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) with a long variation time are more likely to be selected than in the first medium variation table. pattern table. Specifically, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 49" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "50 to 189" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "190 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first long variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 50/199, special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 140/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 9/199.

Next, with reference to Drawing 81 (e), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202f provided in MPU201 of main control unit 110 in a 3rd embodiment is explained. The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202f defines a second long variation table, a first medium variation table, and a first short variation table.

The second long variation table is a variation pattern table in which the special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) with a long variation time is likely to be selected. Specifically, a special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special figure 2 for the value "1 to 49" of the variation type counter CS1 A variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and a special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value "50 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the second long variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199, special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 50/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 149/199.

In the second medium fluctuation table, compared to the second medium fluctuation table, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) with a short fluctuation time are likely to be selected. pattern table. Specifically, a special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 3" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "4 to 99" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value of variation type counter CS1 "100 to 198". That is, when the second medium variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 4/199, special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 96/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 99/199.

In the second short variation table, compared to the second short variation table, the special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and the special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) with a short variation time are likely to be selected Variation pattern table. Specifically, a special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 9" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "10 to 149" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value of variation type counter CS1 "150 to 198". That is, when the second short variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 10/199, special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 140/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 49/199.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. FIG. 80(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80(b), the RAM 203 of the present embodiment has, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19), a special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n and a special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p. is added.

The special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is a counter for counting the lottery number of lotteries based on the first special symbol. This special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is incremented by 1 when the lottery based on the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 83) (see S351 in FIG. 83). In the 1 special symbol variation stop process 3 (see FIG. 84), it is initialized to 0 (see S651 in FIG. 84) when the stop process for a big hit is executed. In addition, in the special figure 1 small per stop processing 3 (see FIG. 85), it is initialized to 0 also when the stop processing that becomes a specific small per (small per E) is executed (see S662 in FIG. 85) .

The special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is a counter for counting the lottery number of lotteries based on the second special symbol. This special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is incremented by 1 when the lottery based on the second special symbol is executed in the second special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 86) (see S751 in FIG. 86). In the 1 special symbol variation stop process 3 (see FIG. 87), it is initialized to 0 (see S951 in FIG. 87) when the stop process for a big hit is executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 small hit stop processing 3 (see FIG. 88), it is initialized to 0 also when the stop processing to be a specific small hit (small hit G) is executed (see S962 in FIG. 88) .

Next, with reference to FIG.80(c), small hit classification selection table 202d provided in MPU201 of the main control unit 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. This small hit type selection table 202d is based on the value of the small hit type selection counter, the small hit type, the presence or absence of V passage, and each lottery number counter after the small hit (special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, special figure 2 This table is used to select whether or not to reset the lottery number counter 203p).

In the small hit type selection table 202d, dedicated small hit types are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, two kinds of small winning E and small winning F are set, and two kinds of small winning G and small winning H are set in the second special symbol. In the small hit E, "0 to 3" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4, and in the small hit F, "4 to 198" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4. there is On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit G, and the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit H is set to "99 to 198".

In this embodiment, by executing the small hit E, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0, and the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol is configured to be switched. . In addition, by executing the small hit G, the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is initialized to 0, and the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol is configured to be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the small winning E of the first special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small winning F of the first special symbol is set to "no reset". ing. Further, the small winning G of the second special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small winning H of the second special symbol is set to "no reset".

In addition, as in the first embodiment, the small hits of the first special symbol (small hits E, F) are small hits that are difficult (or impossible) to pass through V, and the small hits of the second special symbol. (Small hits G, H) are small hit types that allow easy (or possible) V passage.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table is configured to be switched according to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (that is, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n), and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. (That is, the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p) is configured to switch the variation pattern selection table according to. As a result, by combining the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol, a state advantageous to the player (for example, the first special A symbol variation pattern selection table is a table with a long variation time) and a disadvantageous state (for example, a second special symbol variation pattern selection table is a table with a long variation time) can be set.

In addition to this, in this embodiment, the timing at which the number of lotteries for the first special symbol and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to the game state changing according to the lapse of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game and improve the interest of the player.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(a). As shown in FIG. 82(a), the ROM 222 of this embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(a)) in that a rear image selection table 222c is added. do.

Here, the back image selection table 222c provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(c). The back image selection table 222c defines the back image to be set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. It is a table that has been

Concretely, first, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second long variation table, the back image of "town" with the degree of expectation of "1" (lowest) is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of "mountain" with the degree of expectation of "2" is selected. In the case of the second short-variation table, the back image of "sand beach" with an expectation level of "3" is selected.

Next, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first medium variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second long variation table, the back image of "mountain" with the degree of expectation "2" is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of "sand beach" with the degree of expectation of "3" is selected. In the case of the second short-variation table, the back image of the "bottom of the sea" with the degree of expectation of "4" is selected.

Next, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second long variation table, the back image of "sand beach" with the degree of expectation of "3" is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of "bottom of the sea" with the degree of expectation of "4" is selected. In the case of the second short-variation table, the back image of the "school of fish" with the degree of expectation of "5" (highest) is selected.

In this way, when a variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, a back image with a high degree of expectation is likely to be selected. Further, when a variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, a back image with a high degree of expectation is likely to be selected. That is, when there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol will be stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the rear image with high expectation is likely to be selected. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the display of the highly anticipated back image, which enhances the interest of the player.

Next, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(c). As shown in FIG. 82(c), the RAM 223 of the present embodiment has a rear image information storage area 223m added to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(c)). differ.

The back image information storage area 223m is an area for storing the currently set back image type. This back image information storage area 223m is referred to in order to determine the current back image (see S5004 in FIG. 90) in the back image change process (see FIG. 90), and based on the back image selected in the process. This is the area to be updated (see S5006 in FIG. 90).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 83 to 88. FIG. First, the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) in the third embodiment performs lottery for the first special symbol, and selects a variation pattern based on the lottery result. Then, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is counted (counted), and the setting of the variation pattern selection table of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries counted (counted).

In the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) in this third embodiment, the processes of S301 to S304 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. After completing the processing of S304, the processing of S351 to S353 is executed instead of the processing after S305 of the first embodiment.

Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n (S351), and then it is determined whether it is time to change the setting of the fluctuation pattern table (S352). In the process of S352, if it is determined that it is not the time to change the setting of the variation pattern table (S352: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S352, if it is determined that it is time to change the setting of the variation pattern table (S352: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n and the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 Based on this, the small hit variation pattern selection is set (S353), and then the process is terminated.

Next, the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first special symbol variation stop processing 3 (S204) in the third embodiment stops the variation of the first special symbol in the same manner as the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204, see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. It is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n to 0 when performing a process for making a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit E).

In the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S204) in the third embodiment, the processes of S601 to S607, S608 and S609 are executed as in the first embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment is that the process of S651 is executed after finishing the process of S607, and the special figure 1 small per stop process 3 is executed instead of the special figure 1 small per stop process of S610. is. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S204), after executing the process of S607, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S651), and this process ends. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that becomes a big hit is executed in the first special symbol.

Also, in the process of S602, if it is determined that the big hit flag is not turned on for the special figure 1, that is, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 ( S610) is executed, and the process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, in this special figure 1 small winning stop processing 3 (S610), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a specific small winning (small winning E), special figure 1 The value of the lottery number counter 203n is initialized to zero. Thereby, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop to be a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed in the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85, the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) performed by MPU201 in the main control unit 110 is demonstrated. The special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610) in the third embodiment is similar to the special figure 1 small hit stop processing (S610, see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. It is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n to 0 when executing a fluctuation stop process that becomes a specific small hit (small hit E).

In the special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610) in the third embodiment, the processing of S621 to S625 is executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. A difference from the first embodiment is that the processes of S661 and S662 are executed after the process of S625 is completed. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610) in the third embodiment, after executing the processing of S621 to S625, it is determined whether it is a specific small hit (small hit E) (S661). If it is determined in the process of S661 that it is not a specific small win (that is, it is a small win F) (S661: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a specific small hit in the process of S661 (that is, it is a small hit E) (S661: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S662) , and then terminate this process. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that becomes a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second special symbol variation start process (Fig. 86, S206), the special figure 2 lottery number counter instead of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n for the above-described first special symbol variation start process (Figure 83, S203) The value of 203p is added (S751), and the variation pattern selection table is set based on the information of the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 instead of the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 (S752, S753 ), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation stop process 3 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 2nd special design fluctuation stop processing 3 (S207) in this 3rd execution form, vis-a-vis the 1st special design fluctuation stop processing 3 which mentions (refer to Figure 84), instead of special figure 1 lottery counter 203n special figure The only difference is that the value of the 2 lottery number counter 203p is initialized to 0 (S951 or S920), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (S920) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure 2 small per stop processing 3 (S920) in this third embodiment is a specific small per (small per E) with respect to the above-described special figure 1 small per stop processing 3 (see FIG. 85) Instead of determining whether it is a specific small hit (small hit G) or not (S961), and instead of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is set to 0 Since the only difference is the point of initialization (S962), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. First, the variable display setting process 3 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment differs from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment in that the rear image change process (S2651) is executed. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, the description thereof is omitted, and only the different parts are described.

In the variable display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment, the processes of S2601 to S2612 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process (S2113) in the first embodiment. After completing the process of S2610 or S2612, the back image change process is executed (S2651), and then the process ends.

Here, the rear image change processing (S2651) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The back image change processing (S2651) in the third embodiment is based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol, This is processing for changing the back image.

In the back image change processing (S2651) in the third embodiment, first, the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol that is set is determined (S5001), and then, for the second special symbol that is set (S5002). Then, based on the determination results of S5001 and S5002, a back image is selected from the back image selection table 222c (S5003).

Next, the current back image is determined from the back image information storage area 223m (S5004). It is determined whether or not the back image selected by the processing of S5003 is different from the current back image determined by the processing of S5004 (S5005). In the process of S5005, if it is determined that the selected back image is the same as the current back image (S5005: No), there is no need to change the back image, so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5005 that the selected back image is different from the current back image (S5005: Yes), the back image information storage area 223m is updated based on the selected back image (S5006). ), a background image change command is set based on the selected back image (S5007), and the process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol. Also, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. Thereby, the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of each special symbol, that is, the game time elapses. Since the game state changes according to the time, the game can be varied, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count of the number of lotteries for the first special symbols is reset when a big hit or a specific small hit (in this embodiment, a small hit E). Also, the count (count) of the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is reset when a big win or a specific small win (in this embodiment, a small win G). As a result, the timing at which the number of lotteries for the first special symbol and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to the game state changing according to the lapse of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game and improve the interest of the player.

In the third embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on a variation pattern selection table that is set for selecting variation patterns for each special symbol. According to this rear image, the current game state is a game state (that is, a game state disadvantageous to the player) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier than the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the second special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, in a state advantageous to the player). As a result, the player can be interested in the setting (display) of the back image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this embodiment, the back image is set (displayed) based on the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol, but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, instead of setting (displaying) the back image, the effect mode may be changed, a specific character pattern may be displayed, or a notification sound may be output. Naturally good.

In the third embodiment, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is reset (initialized to 0) based on the specific small winning type (small winning E) in the first special symbol. It is not something that can be done. For example, based on a specific small hit type (small hit E) in the first special design, the number of lotteries of the second special design may be reset, or both the first special design and the second special design It is of course possible to reset the number of lotteries for . Also, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol may not be reset until the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit. In this case, when the number of lotteries for the first special symbols is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player may be set (a so-called ceiling is provided). As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's desire to play even if the state in which the big win is not achieved continues for a long time. In addition, the configuration described above is not limited to the first special symbol, and may be similarly applied to the second special symbol.

You may combine the structure of this 3rd Embodiment with 1st Embodiment mentioned above. Specifically, in addition to changing the game state (setting of the variation pattern selection table for each special symbol) according to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), the lottery result is a specific small A game state (setting of a variation pattern selection table for each special symbol) is changed even when a win (or a big win) is achieved. As a result, the variation in which the game state changes increases, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 100. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a rune 900 (flowing period extending means) in which the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one is provided above the second winning hole 64b. It is configured so that the game ball does not (or is difficult to enter) into the opening 64b at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds in this embodiment). As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the second winning hole 64b excessively.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 64b while the second special symbol is changing, the winning information is reserved. On the other hand, it is configured so that the winning information of the first special symbol cannot be reserved. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, if the game ball does not enter the first winning hole 64a (that is, if the shooting of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second A state in which the variation of the special symbols is stopped (fixed), that is, a state advantageous to the player can be created. As a result, since the player plays the game expecting that the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, the winning information (start of variation) of the second special symbol can be held, and the interval (20 seconds) at which the game ball enters the second winning hole 64b is based on the first special symbol. It is configured to be longer than the fluctuation time of fluctuation (maximum 19 seconds). Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, two or more game balls do not enter the second winning hole 64b (that is, the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld. This does not result in a situation that is advantageous to the player). Although the details will be described later, when a jackpot game is being executed, the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, which is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation from becoming excessively advantageous for the player.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs in construction from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a croon 900 is provided above the second winning hole 64b of the game board, and third symbol display control is performed. The effect mode displayed on the device 81 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the one executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. This is because the partial processing has been changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with a left frame button 22a on the front left side of the front frame 14 and a right frame button 22a on the front right side of the front frame 14, unlike the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. 22b is provided, and other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The front frame 14 has a frame left button 22a provided on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1) and a frame right button 22b provided on the right side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are spaced apart (approximately 500 mm) to make it difficult to operate with one hand. , it is necessary to release the operating handle 51 and use both hands.

This frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b), for example, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changes the effect contents of super reach. It is operated by the player when changing it. Although the details will be described later, an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) of simultaneously operating both frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) is also executed. By displaying (executing) an effect of simultaneously operating both frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) as shown in FIG. ) can be temporarily suspended.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. The game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that a croon 900 is provided above the second winning hole 64b. are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a crewon 900 is provided above the second winning hole 64b. The croon 900 is composed of a mortar-shaped (inverted dome-shaped) body portion and a tubular portion extending downward from the center of the mortar shape, and the body portion and the tubular portion are integrally molded of resin.

The main body portion is composed of a bottom portion (circumferential portion) whose bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center, and a wall portion formed on the outer edge of the bottom portion. The cylindrical portion is provided with a through-hole having a diameter through which only one game ball can pass from the upper portion to the lower portion, and the game ball reaching the center of the bottom portion of the main body portion can flow down. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, but the game ball that has entered (flowed down) into the croon 900 circles the bottom surface (ball circulation portion) of the main body portion, passes through the through hole of the cylinder portion, and descends downward. flow down to

The croon 900 is inserted from the front side of the game board into a through hole (not shown) made in the game board by router processing, and is pivotally supported from the back side of the game board (not shown). The position of the croon 900 in the front-back direction is a position where the cylindrical portion of the croon 900 contacts the game board, and the back (back) side of the main body portion is the back (back) side of the area where the game ball flows down. It is positioned so as to protrude from the back side of the board. In addition, a cover member (not shown) is provided on the upper part of the main body portion projecting to the back side of the game board so as to prevent game balls flowing down to the main body part from jumping out to the back side of the game board. ing.

In addition, the vertical position of the crew 900 is provided above the second variable winning device 650 and below the position of the through gate 67 . As a result, it is possible for the game ball that has not entered the second variable winning device 650 or the game ball that has not passed through the through gate 67 to enter the croon 900 .

On the upper side of the croon 900, a nail is arranged from the upper right part to the upper central part, and the game ball can be entered only from the upper left part of the croon 900. - 特許庁A variable member 901 is provided in the upper left part of this clone 900 .

This variable member 901 is configured to move to the front side by applying a load equivalent to one game ball to the croon 900 (not shown). That is, when the game ball is circling the bottom surface of the body portion of the croon 900, the variable member 901 is moved to the front side, making it impossible (or difficult) for a new game ball to enter the croon 900. ) state. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) two or more game balls from flowing down to the bottom surface of the main body of the croon 900 and circling.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 is an enlarged perspective view of a croon 900 provided on the game board of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The game ball that has flowed down to the croon 900 circulates the bottom surface of the main body (ball circling portion) for a predetermined period (19 seconds in this embodiment), and then passes through the through hole of the cylindrical portion provided at the center of the bottom surface. and flow downwards. A game ball that has flowed downward from the cylindrical portion of the croon 900 enters the second winning hole 64b provided below when the electric accessory 64b1 is open. Since it takes 1 second for the game ball flowing down from the croon 900 to enter the second winning hole 64b, the game ball flowing down to the croon 900 enters the second winning hole 64b. The required time is 20 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b), an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 94(a) and (b) show an example of a presentation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 94(a) is a schematic diagram showing an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the first round). By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(a), the player can be urged to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 64b during the jackpot game.

In FIG. 94(b), when the game ball enters the second winning hole 64b during execution of the jackpot game, and the second special pattern is reserved at the end of the jackpot game, the third pattern display device 81 It is a diagram showing a mode of the ending effect displayed in . By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(b), it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game will end while the second special symbol is on hold. Further, by displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(b), the player is encouraged to simultaneously press the left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10. The firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51) can be temporarily interrupted.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is advantageous to stop the variation of the second special symbol before the variation of the first special symbol, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, since the winning of the first special symbol is not suspended, in the state where the second special symbol is suspended, if the variation of the first special symbol is not started, the variation of the second special symbol is surely stopped first. (ie, a state advantageous to the player). Therefore, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 94(b) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to temporarily suspend the shooting operation (operation of the operation handle 51), so that the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first without starting the variation of the first special symbol. can be done.

In addition, not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, a right through gate is arranged above the first variable winning device 65, and a game ball hit to the right passes through the right through gate. The gate may be easily passed through, the normal electric accessory 64b1 may be easily opened, and the game ball may be easily entered into the second winning hole 64b. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable member 901 is configured so that only one ball rolls on the clown means 900, but this is not restrictive. A nail is arranged so as not to enter the means 900, and only a right-handed game ball can enter the clown means 900. - 特許庁Then, if the player hits to the right other than during the jackpot game or the small hit game, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by passing through the right through gate, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (discontinued) or all the winning or not It may be configured such that the determination result is determined as a failure, an error is notified to the third pattern display device 81, an alarm sound is output, or an error signal is output from an external output terminal. Furthermore, in the normal game state, when passing through the right through gate, the variation time may be lengthened, or the winning probability of normal symbols may be decreased. Furthermore, always, as a time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is a normal game state such as during a jackpot game as the fluctuation time and winning probability of the normal pattern described in this embodiment In the normal game state), the change time of the normal symbols may be shortened, or the winning probability may be increased to make it easier to win the second winning opening 64b.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various counters in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is provided, and other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is composed of one execution area and one reserved area (first reserved area). In each of these areas, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64.

Specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second winning port 64b (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in one reservation area (reservation first area ) is stored in an empty area. In addition, when data is stored in the first reservation area, nothing is newly stored.

In the main controller 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

Shifting data from the reserved first area to the execution area empties the reserved first area. Then, based on the winning (starting winning) to the new second winning opening 64b, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 can be obtained and stored in the reserved first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 of this embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is added. The details of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r are as described with reference to FIG. 95, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 97 to 99. FIG. First, timer interrupt processing 4 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt processing 4 in the fourth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) in that a part of the special symbol variation processing (S104) is changed, and the starting The difference is that the winning process (S151) is executed, and the other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the timer interrupt process 4 in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment, after the processes of S101 to S104 are executed, the starting winning process is executed (S151). By executing this starting winning process (S151), the second special symbol can be reserved. When the processing of S151 is completed, the processing of S106 to S109 is executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment, and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the starting winning process (S151) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The starting winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment is one process in the timer interrupt process 4 (see FIG. 97) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment.

In the starting winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 64b (S6001). In the process of S6001, if the ball has not entered the second winning hole 64b (S6001: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if the ball has won the second winning hole 64b (S6001: Yes), then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is acquired (S6002), It is determined whether the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is greater than 1 (S6003: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003: Yes), add 1 to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s ( S6004), then set the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S6005). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r (S6006), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the same manner as the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. This is one process in the special symbol variation process (S104).

In the second special symbol variation start processing 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment, in place of the processing of S701 to S702 in the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, S751 The difference is that the processing from S755 is executed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206), first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is obtained (S751), and then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s. is greater than 0 (S752). If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S752: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S752, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is greater than 0 (S752: Yes), from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s 1 is subtracted (S753), the reserved ball number command is set (S754), and the data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is shifted (S755). After that, the processing of S703 to S708 is executed, and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, the command determination process 4 (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, like the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as those in the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted, and only different parts are described.

In the command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S2201 to S2207 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process in the first embodiment. If so (S2207: Yes), the process of S2208 is executed. After executing the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 (S2251). Specifically, when the pending ball number command is received during the execution of the variation of the second special symbol, it is determined that the pending ball number of the second special symbol is one. On the other hand, when the pending ball number command is received while the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, the variation of the second special symbol is immediately started based on the suspended winning information. That is, since it is a case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not substantially become 1, it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0.

In the processing of S2251, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 (S2251: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2251, when it is determined that the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 1 (S2251: Yes), the V chance command for display is set (S2252), and this process ends.

The display V-chance command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). ) to the display controller 114 . By receiving this display V chance command, the display control device 114 performs an effect ( (not shown) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the pending ball number command is not received (S2207: No), the process of S2209 to S2213 is not executed, and the process proceeds to S2253. In the process of S2253, it is determined whether the ending command is received (S2253), and if the ending command is received (S2253: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 is pending 1 (S2254). In the process of S2254, if the special figure 2 is pending 1 (S2254: Yes), the V chance ending command for display is set (S2255), and this process ends.

The display V-chance ending command set by the process of S2255 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and is used as a command output of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the process (S2102). The display control device 114 displays the effect shown in FIG. 94(b) on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this V-chance ending command for display.

On the other hand, in the process of S2254, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not reserved 1 (S2254: No), the normal ending command for display is set (S2256), and this process ends.

In the process of S2253, if the ending command has not been received (S2253: No), the processes of S2214 to S2217 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the rune 900 (flowing period extending means) is provided above the second winning hole 64b, in which the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one. Thus, it is configured such that game balls do not (or are difficult to enter) into the second winning hole 64b at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the second winning hole 64b excessively.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 64b while the second special symbol is changing, the winning information is reserved. On the other hand, it is configured so that the winning information of the first special symbol cannot be reserved. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, if the game ball does not enter the first winning hole 64a (that is, if the shooting of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second A state in which the variation of the special symbols is stopped (fixed), that is, a state advantageous to the player can be created. As a result, since the player plays the game expecting that the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by providing a cloon 900 above the second winning opening 64b, the game ball is configured not to enter the second winning opening 64b at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds). , but not limited to these. For example, using a known sorting device, game balls may be sorted so as to enter the second winning hole 64b at predetermined intervals (or at intervals longer than the predetermined intervals).

In the present embodiment, the game ball revolves around the bottom surface (revolving part) of the croon 900, so that the time required for the game ball to pass through the croon 900 is increased, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Instead of the croon 900, the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one, and means for extending the falling period of the game balls (flowing period extending means) may be provided. Concretely, means such as forming a meandering flow path to lengthen the flow distance, and using a member (speed reducing member) for reducing the speed of the game ball in the flow path are conceivable. As the speed reducing member, for example, a member exhibiting a high coefficient of friction (such as urethane rubber) that increases the frictional force generated when the ball rolls can be considered. It is also conceivable to increase the frictional force between the balls and the ball rolling surface of the downflow passage by roughening the ball rolling surface of the downflow passage or providing protrusions, thereby reducing the downflow speed of the balls.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent two or more game balls from entering (flowing down) into the croon 900 at the same time, a movable member that is moved by the load on the croon 900 is used, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, a known non-electric accessory or electric accessory may be provided at the entrance of the croon 900 as a matter of course. Specifically, when a game ball enters the croon 900, if it is a non-electric accessory, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved, and if it is an electric accessory, it is electrically operated based on ball detection. At the same time, the electric accessory at the entrance is movably controlled, making it impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the croon 900 . Then, when the game ball flows down below the croon 900, if it is a non-electric accessory, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved again, and if it is an electric accessory, it is electrically based on the flow detection. The electric accessary at the entrance is movably controlled again, and the entry of the game ball into the croon 900 becomes possible (or easy).

In the present embodiment, the cloon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b, but it may not be provided. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107. FIG. Unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is provided with a second variable winning device 650 on the left side of the game board. Then, the jackpot game and the small winning game of the special figure 1 are the games that enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small winning game of the special figure 2 is on the right side of the game board. A game (a so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is entered into the provided first variable winning device 65 is assumed. Thereby, the game of the small winning game and the normal game of the special figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operation for executing the game can be made the same), and frequently occurs It is possible to reduce the operation burden of the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1. - 特許庁

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in contrast to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a jackpot type is provided in which a time-saving game state, which is an advantageous state for the player after the jackpot game is completed, is provided. made it As a result, the player executes the game expecting that the time-saving game state will be provided after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed. The points are that the configuration is partly changed, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 101, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 moves from the position on the right side of the game board to the position on the left side with respect to the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. The points that have been changed, the point that the right first prize winning port 640a is provided above the first variable prize winning device 65, and the point that the right through gate 670 is provided above the right first prize winning port 640a. , and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (whether or not it is possible to enter a ball) in the big win game, and the first variable winning in the small win game of special figure 2 The device 65 is opened and closed (whether or not the ball can be entered is variable). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 small winning game, instead of the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (whether or not it is possible to enter a ball).

Therefore, the big hit game and the small hit game of the special figure 1 are a game of shooting a game ball to the left side of the game board (so-called left hitting). Thereby, the game of the small winning game and the normal game of the special figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operation for executing the game can be made the same), and frequently occurs It is possible to reduce the operation burden of the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the game board, and the first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the game board, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 may be arranged in the center of the game board. As a result, in all games (normal game, jackpot game, special figure 1 small winning game, special figure 2 small winning game), the operation for executing the game can be the same, so the player's Operation burden can be reduced. Also, since each prize-winning device is arranged in the center of the game board, the player can select whichever he prefers, right-handed or left-handed, thereby improving the interest of the player.

By configuring in this way, there is no need to hit right at the time of the small winning of the first special symbol, and by continuing the left hitting game, the small winning game in the first special symbol is executed, and then the normal game to be executed. can be continued while hitting left. Therefore, in this embodiment, although it is the structure which the small hit of a 1st special design is performed frequently, the trouble which switches frequently to a right-handed game can be skipped, and a game can be continued easily. In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit B is executed, the time saving game is given eight times (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol). Even in that case, the right through gate 670 and the right first winning hole 640a (the winning hole that triggers the start of the first special symbol) are placed on the right side of the game area (first variable Since it is arranged above the winning device 65), it is possible to execute a time-saving game in a right-handed state. Furthermore, even in the normal game state, the game can be played either left-handed or right-handed, so that the player can easily understand the game method and play the game easily.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is configured so that the second variable winning device 650 is open, but the first variable winning device 65 may be opened. In this case, by controlling the switching member 65h without actuating it, it is possible to suppress the problem that the big winning game is continuously executed. Further, even when the time-saving game is provided, the game can be played by continuing the right-handed game, and the game operation can be facilitated.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. The ROM 202 of this embodiment differs in that the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 102(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. In this embodiment, as the types of jackpots, jackpot A (15R jackpot, no electric sapo) and jackpot B (15R jackpot, electric sapo 8 times) are provided.

Here, "jackpot A (15R jackpot, no electric sapo)" means that the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds (1 round is 30 seconds or up to 10 balls won), and then the normal state (states A to C) It is a big hit. In addition, "jackpot B (15R jackpot, electric sapo 8 times)" is a time-saving state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is shortened) after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. It's a big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the time saving state, compared to the normal state (states A to C), it is easy to select a shorter variation time of the second special symbol than the variation time of the first special symbol (that is, the second The variation of the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the variation of the first special symbol), which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot type selection table 202d, the value of the first hit type counter CS2 "0 to 99" is set for the jackpot A, and the value of the first type counter CS2 "100 to 198" is set for the jackpot B. is set. That is, the probability that the jackpot A is selected is set to 100/199, and the probability that the jackpot B is selected is set to 99/199.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102(b), the details of the special figure 1 small per variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f will be described. This special figure 1 small per variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f is a small per variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol in the time saving state. The special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined in the special figure 1 small per variation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f.

Specifically, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, the probability that the special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected as the small hit variation pattern of the first special symbol in the time saving state is set to 199/199 (that is, 100%).

Next, with reference to FIG. 102(c), the details of the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f will be described. This special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f is a small per variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol in the time saving state. In the special figure 1 small per variation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f, special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) and special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) are defined.

Specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is defined for the value "0 to 65" of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 "66 to 198" In contrast, special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) is defined. That is, in the time saving state, the probability that the second variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern for the small hit of the second special symbol is set to 66/199, and the second variation pattern G ( The probability that the variation time of 6 seconds) is selected is set to 133/199.

Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected in the second special symbol is 66/199. As a result, compared with the normal state (states A to C), the time-saving state becomes a state (that is, a state advantageous to the player) in which the variation of the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the first special symbol.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 of this embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a time saving counter 203t is added, and the other points are the same. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The time-saving counter 203t is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with special symbols, and when the value of the time-saving medium counter 203t is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with special symbols. , and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This short time counter 203t is set to 8 at the end of the jackpot B (16R time short jackpot) (see S1453 in FIG. 106). In this time-saving state, a small winning variation pattern selection table for the time-saving state is set (S1452), and the variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened (see FIGS. 103(b) and (c)). ). In the first special symbol variation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 104) or the second special symbol variation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 105), 1 is subtracted each time the variation of each special symbol is stopped (S673 in FIG. 104 , S973 in FIG. 105).

As described above, the small hit variation pattern set in the time saving state is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol compared to the normal state (states A to C) compared to the variation time of the first special symbol. It is configured to be easily selected (that is, the variation of the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the variation of the first special symbol). As a result, after the big win B is finished, the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the first special symbol, which is advantageous for the player (time saving state). Therefore, since the game can be played with the goal of achieving a big hit B as one goal, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 104 to 107. FIG. First, the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S204) in the fifth embodiment, the processing from S671 to S676 is added to the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. are different, and the other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 in the fifth embodiment, similarly to the first special symbol variation stop processing in the first embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes), and the lottery result is a jackpot (S602: Yes), the processing of S603 to S607 is executed, the time saving counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S671), and the process proceeds to S675 in order to end the time saving state.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes) and the lottery result is a small hit (S602: No), the process of S610 is executed and the process proceeds to S672. Also, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (S601: No), when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is ON (S608: Yes), the process of S609 is executed and the process proceeds to S672.

In the process of S672, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203t is greater than 0 (S672), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S672: No), this process ends as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S672, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is greater than 0 (S672: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S673), and the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 It is determined whether or not (S674).

In the process of S674, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is not 0 (S674: No), the time saving state is continued, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S674, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S674: Yes), the process proceeds to S675 in order to terminate the time saving state.

After completing the processing of S671 or S674, the current state is acquired from the state setting area (S675), and based on the state acquired in the processing of S675, the variation pattern selection table is set (S676), and this processing is executed. finish. By the processing of this S676, it is possible to change the variation pattern selection table that has been set in the time saving state, it is possible to end the time saving state.

Next, the details of the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S207) is different from the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment in that processing from S971 to S976 is added. are the same. It should be noted that the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S207) is similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 104) described above for the second special symbol. Description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the details of the jackpot control process 5 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot control process 5 (S1304) is different from the jackpot control process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1451 to S1453 are additionally executed at the timing of the ending, Other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In jackpot control processing 5 (S1304), the processing from S1401 to S1409 is executed like the jackpot processing (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1409: Yes), an ending command is set (S1410), and the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big win B (S1451).

In the processing of S1451, when it is determined that the lottery result is the jackpot A (S1451: No), since it is not necessary to provide the time saving state after the jackpot ends, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1451, when it is determined that the lottery result is the jackpot B (S1451: Yes), the process proceeds to S1452 in order to provide the time saving state after the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1452, the small hit variation pattern selection table for the time saving state (see FIGS. 102(b) and (c)) is set as the small hit variation pattern selection table for each special symbol (S1452), and the value of the time saving counter 203t is set to 8, and this process ends. As a result, the time-saving state can be imparted after the jackpot game based on the jackpot B is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, details of the small winning control process 5 (S1305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This small hit control process 5 (S1305) is different from the small hit control process (FIG. 47) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1651 to S1654 are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In small hit control processing 5 (S1305), the processing of S1601 to S1605 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1605: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit (S1651).

In the processing of S1651, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a small hit (S1651: Yes), in order to open the second variable winning device 650, the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set ( S1652), the process ends. In the process of S1651, when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit (S1651: No), in order to open the first variable winning device 65, a small win operation process is executed (S1616), End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1605: No), the process proceeds to S1607. In the process of S1607, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S1607), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit (S1653).

In the processing of S1653, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a small hit (S1653: Yes), in order to close the second variable winning device 650, the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set ( S1654), the process ends. In the processing of S1653, when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit (S1653: No), in order to close the first variable winning device 65, the closing of the first variable winning device 65 is set ( S1608), the process ends.

According to this small hit control process 5 (S1305), when the first special symbol is small hit, the second variable winning device 650 provided on the left side of the game board is opened and closed (variable), and a so-called left-handed game can be played. can. In addition, when the second special symbol hits a small hit, the first variable winning device 65 provided on the right side of the game board can be opened and closed (variably) to allow a so-called right-handed game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the game board, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Then, the jackpot game and the small winning game of the special figure 1 are the games that enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small winning game of the special figure 2 is on the right side of the game board. A game (a so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is entered into the provided first variable winning device 65 is assumed. Thereby, the game of the small winning game and the normal game of the special figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operation for executing the game can be made the same), and frequently occurs It is possible to reduce the operation burden of the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1. - 特許庁

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in contrast to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a jackpot type is provided in which a time-saving game state, which is an advantageous state for the player after the jackpot game is completed, is provided. made it As a result, the player executes the game expecting that the time-saving game state will be provided after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115. FIG. In contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (that is, it is configured so that the variation that results in a big win is not forcibly stopped). As a result, for example, when the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is executed, the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is stopped first, so that the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is stopped first. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the change to an outlier. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a big win despite the execution (display) of an effect suggesting the occurrence of a big win, thereby preventing (suppressing) the players from lowering their willingness to participate. .

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a plurality of types of jackpots (jackets A1, A2, A3) are provided when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed. I have to. Then, according to the type of jackpot, the state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different. Thus, the game state can be shifted (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small win, but also when the lottery result is a big win, so that the game can be varied. It can improve the interest of people.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to execute (display) the SP ready-to-win effect when the lottery result is a big hit, unlike the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. As a result, the player can have a premonition of the arrival of a big win, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, even when the small win is shifted to the state B or the state C, the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small win) , Or, it is configured to execute (display) for special figure 2 small per. As a result, the frequency with which the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed increases, and thus the interest of the player can be improved. Since the state shifts to state B or state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's desire to play.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. 1. Part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110 is changed, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 108, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 108(a) to (c) are an example of the effect mode of the SP ready-to-win effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment.

In this embodiment, SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) is executed (displayed) when the second special symbol is a jackpot, and when the first special symbol is a small hit, and when predetermined conditions are met SP reach production (special figure 1 small hit) is executed (displayed), and when it becomes a second special pattern small hit, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, SP reach production (special figure 2 small hit) is executed (displayed) ) is done.

In various SP ready-to-win effects, variable display is executed in a normal effect mode (see FIG. 108(a)). Then, after a predetermined period of time (two seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the characters "SUPER READY!!" are displayed at the top of the screen (see FIG. 108(b)). Thereafter, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 2 jackpot, a stop symbol (for example, "777" etc.) indicating a jackpot is displayed (not shown). As a result, the player can be notified that the jackpot has been won. In addition, since the player plays the game expecting that the SP ready-to-win effect will be displayed, the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 1 small hit or a special figure 2 small hit, after the characters "Super reach !!" "341" etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 108(c)). The stop symbol indicating the small hit is shaken up and down a predetermined number of times (2 to 8 times in this embodiment), and then becomes a complete stop display (still state). The number of times the stop symbol shakes is determined in advance according to the type of small hit won.

The relationship between the small hit type and the number of times the stop symbol sways is the same as in the second embodiment. Specifically, in the case of a small win A, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 19", the number of shakes is "twice", and if the value of the effect counter 223g is "20 to 49", the number of shakes. If the value of the effect counter 223g is "50 to 198", the number of swings will be "0 times".

In the case of the small win B, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 49", the number of swings is "4 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "50 to 99", the number of swings is "6 times". , if the value of the effect counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of swings is "0 times".

In the case of small win C, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 74", the number of swings is "6 times", and if the value of the effect counter 223g is "75 to 149", the number of swings is "8 times". Thus, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "150 to 198", the number of swings is "0".

In the case of a small hit D, if the value of the performance counter 223g is "0 to 99", the number of swings is "8 times", and if the value of the performance counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of swings is "0 times". becomes.

As a result, the player can predict the type of small winning won from the number of times the stop symbol shakes (that is, it is possible to predict the game state to be set), so the number of times the stop symbol shakes It is possible to attract the attention of the player and improve the interest of the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed, there is a case where a stop symbol indicating a small win is stopped and displayed. In this case, an effect in which the stop symbols sway is executed, and a privilege is given that the game state to be set can be predicted. As a result, even if a small win (not a big win) occurs after the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed, the player is prevented from losing motivation to participate in the game ( control).

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109(a) to 109(c). As shown in FIG. 109(a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13), and the content of the variation pattern selection table 202f is partially changed. , V passage time jackpot type selection table 202k is added, other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 109(b), the contents of the winning variation pattern selection table 202f, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f, will be described. The winning variation pattern selection table 202f is a table defining variation patterns to be selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 when a big win is achieved in each special symbol.

In the first special symbol, a special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern E is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

In the second special symbol, a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern F is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 109(c), the contents of the V passage jackpot type selection table 202k will be described. The V passing time jackpot type selection table 202k is a table that defines the jackpot type selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. When the V winning flag 203e is ON in the small winning ending process 6 (see FIG. 113), the V passing time jackpot type selection table 202k (that is, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the small winning game) , is referenced to select the jackpot type.

In the V passage time jackpot type selection table 202k, the jackpot A1 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "0 to 89" of the first hit type counter C2, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 "90 to 179". In contrast, a jackpot A2 (15R jackpot) is set, and a jackpot A3 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "180 to 198" of the first hit type counter C2. That is, the jackpot type selected based on the game ball passing through the V prize switch 65e3 has a probability of selecting the jackpot A1 set to 90/199 and a probability of selecting the jackpot A2 set to 90/199. is set, and the probability of jackpot A3 being selected is set to 19/199.

Here, "jackpot A1 (15R jackpot)" is a jackpot that shifts to state A after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds (1 round is 30 seconds or up to 10 balls won). A “jackpot A2 (15R jackpot)” is a jackpot that shifts to state B after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. A “jackpot A3 (15R jackpot)” is a jackpot that shifts to state C after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. In this way, it is possible to change the state to be shifted after that according to the jackpot type given based on passing through the V winning switch 65e3.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 110 to 113. FIG. First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, S451 to S453 are added to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. are different, and the other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the second special symbol jackpot is being executed (S451). In the processing of S451, when it is determined that the variation based on the second special symbol jackpot is not being executed (S451: No), the processing of S401 to S409 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S451, if it is determined that the variation based on the second special symbol jackpot is being executed (S451: Yes), the first special symbol lottery is not performed, and the lottery result is forcibly removed. , the process proceeds to S452.

In the process of S452, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to be lost (S452), the lost symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S453), and this process is terminated. . As a result, when the lottery result of the second special pattern becomes a big hit and the variation to become the big hit is started, it is possible to forcibly set a loss as the lottery result without performing the lottery of the first special pattern. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from simultaneously becoming a big win, and to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment, S851 to S853 are added to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. are different, and the other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the first special symbol jackpot is being executed (S851). In the processing of S851, if it is determined that the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is not being executed (S851: No), the processing of S801 to S809 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S851, if it is determined that the variation based on the first special symbol jackpot is being executed (S851: Yes), the second special symbol lottery is not performed, and the lottery result is forcibly removed. , the process proceeds to S852.

In the process of S852, the lottery result of the second special design is set to be out (S852), the out design of the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S853), and this process is finished. . As a result, when the lottery result of the first special pattern becomes a big hit and the variation to become the big hit is started, the lottery result of the second special pattern is not drawn, and the loss can be forcibly set as the lottery result. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from simultaneously becoming a big win, and to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment differs from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes from S1471 to S1472 are added, and the other parts are are identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment, the processes from S1401 to S1409 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending of the jackpot game (S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to S1410. In the process of S1410, an ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1471.

In the processing of S1471, the state corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the state setting area 223h (S1471). Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A1, state A is set, when jackpot A2 is set, state B is set, and when jackpot A3 is set, state C is set (Fig. 109 (c)). Next, based on the state set in the process of S1471, the state counter 203k is set (S1472), a state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1473), and this process ends.

The status command set by the process of S1703 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201. , to the audio ramp controller 113 . The audio lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-state area 223h by receiving this state command (see S2210 in FIG. 53).

Next, the small hit ending process 6 (S1610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The small hit ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment differs from the small hit ending process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 49) in that the processing of S1851 to S1853 is added, and other The parts are identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the small winning ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment, the processes from S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is ON (S1802: Yes), then the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired (S1851).

Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the processing of S1851, the jackpot type is obtained from the V passage time jackpot type selection table 202k (S1852). A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type obtained in the process of S1852 is set (S1853), and the process proceeds to S1804. After executing the processing from S1804 to S1807, this processing ends. Since the processing from S1804 to S1807 is the same as in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. First, with reference to Drawing 114, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment, for the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 55), S2451 and S2452 processing instead of the processing of S2404 The only difference is that the execution is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment, the processing from S2401 to S2403 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. After that, the SP reach selection process is executed (S2451), and the process proceeds to S2452. Details of the SP reach selection process (S2451) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the SP reach is selected in the process of S2452 (S2452: No), the SP reach effect is executed (displayed) and the fusion effect is not executed (displayed), so the processes of S2405 to S2414 are skipped. , the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2451, when the SP reach is not selected (S2452: Yes), the processing of S2405 to S2414 is executed in order to execute (display) the fusion effect, and this processing ends. Note that the processing from S2405 to S2414 is the same as in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 115, the details of SP reach selection processing (S2451) performed within special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) in a 6th embodiment are explained. This SP reach selection process (S2451) is a process for selecting the SP reach effect.

In the SP reach selection process (S2451), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101). In the process of S5101, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot (S5101: No), the process proceeds to S5102 in order to execute (display) the SP reach effect based on the jackpot.

In the process of S5102, SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) is selected (S5102), and this process is terminated. Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol jackpot is selected is the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds). Therefore, the performance time of the SP reach performance (special figure 2 jackpot) was also set to 9 seconds. As a result, the performance time of the SP ready-to-win performance (special figure 2 big win) can be matched with the fluctuation time of the second special symbol big win, and the performance without discomfort can be provided to the player. .

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit B or a small hit C. It is determined (S5103).

When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit A in the processing of S5103 (S5103: No), since it is a case of shifting to state A after the end of the small hit game, the SP reach effect is executed (displayed). In order to prevent this from happening, the processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit B or a small hit C in the process of S5103 (S5103: Yes), it is a case of transitioning to state B or state C after the end of the small hit game. , to execute (display) the SP reach effect, the process proceeds to S5104.

In the processing of S5104, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104). In the process of S5104, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: Yes), the variation of the first special symbol is greater than the variation of the second special symbol. is also stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105).

In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105: Yes), the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is SP Since it is within a range where reach production (per special figure 1 small) can be executed (displayed), SP reach production (per special figure 1 small) is selected (S5106), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than 8.7 seconds or longer than 9.7 seconds (S5105: No), the first special symbol Since the remaining variation time is not within the range in which the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) can be executed (displayed), the process is terminated as it is. When the SP reach effect (per special figure 1 small) is not selected, then the fusion effect is selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (see FIG. 114).

In the processing of S5104, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: No), the variation of the second special symbol is greater than the variation of the first special symbol. is also stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the variation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107).

In the process of S5107, when it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107: Yes), SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) is selected, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5107, when it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is not 9 seconds (S5107: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, according to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute (display) the SP reach production (special figure 2 small hit). As a result, the performance time of the SP ready-to-win performance (special figure 2 small win) can be matched with the variation time of the second special pattern small win, and the player can be provided with a performance without discomfort. can be done.

Thus, by executing (displaying) the SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the player can be made to feel the coming of the jackpot. can improve the interest of

In addition, when it becomes a small hit that moves to state B or state C, SP reach production (special figure 1 small hit) or SP reach production (special figure 2 jackpot), which is the same production mode as SP reach production Figure 2 small hit) is executed (displayed). As a result, the frequency with which the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed increases, and thus the interest of the player can be improved. Since the state shifts to state B or state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's desire to play.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a variation to become a big hit is started in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly drawn. It was configured to perform variation off. As a result, for example, when the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is executed, the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is stopped first, so that the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is stopped first. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the change to an outlier. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a big win despite the execution (display) of an effect suggesting the occurrence of a big win, thereby preventing (suppressing) the players from lowering their willingness to participate. .

In the sixth embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types (jackpots A1, A2, A3) are provided when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed. Then, according to the type of jackpot, the state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different. Thus, the game state can be shifted (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small win, but also when the lottery result is a big win, so that the game can be varied. It can improve the interest of people.

The sixth embodiment may be combined with the fourth embodiment described above. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured so as not to forcibly stop the variation of the jackpot. As a result, in the fourth embodiment, although the second special symbol is reserved, the game ball enters the first winning hole 64a, and the second special symbol that becomes a big hit is forced to change. It is no longer necessary to display an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) for preventing the game from being stopped. This eliminates the need to display an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) that prompts the player to press the left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b, thereby reducing the operational burden on the player.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described third embodiment, when the lottery based on the first special symbol is continuously executed, each special symbol The configuration is such that the rear image is selected regardless of the variation pattern selection table set for. When the lottery based on the first special symbols is continuously executed, until the variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, until the back image with high expectation is displayed), the second There is a high possibility that an illegal game is being played in which game balls are entered little by little into the 1 winning hole 64a. Therefore, in this modified example, when such a fraudulent game is being played, a background image with a low degree of expectation (a background image of "town") is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal game described above from being executed.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, The difference is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the third It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the third embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 116(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 116(a), the ROM 222 of this modification differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 80) in that the content of the rear image selection table 222c is partially changed. They are different, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Details of the back image selection table 222c will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 116(b), the RAM223 of this modified example has a special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r and a table selection effect counter 223s added to the configuration of the RAM223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 80). are the same in other respects. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is a counter for counting (counting) the number of times the variation of the first special symbol is continuously executed. This special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is, in the fluctuation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118), when the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is on (that is, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started) 1 is added to, and is initialized to 0 when the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag is ON (ie, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started). The value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is referred to in the back image change processing 7 (see FIG. 119), and is set for each special symbol when it is determined that the value is 10 or more. Regardless of the variation pattern selection table, the back image of "town" is selected.

If the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is large (10 or more in this modification), until the variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, the back image with high expectation is displayed until it is done), there is a high possibility that a fraudulent game is being played, such as entering game balls little by little into the first winning hole 64a. Therefore, in this modified example, when such a fraudulent game is being played, a background image with a low degree of expectation (a background image of "town") is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal game described above from being executed.

The table selection effect counter 223s is a counter for determining which of a high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 and a low-reliability back image selection table 222c2, which will be described later, is used to select a back image. This table selection effect counter 223s is a counter value that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 3". Although not shown, like the effect counter 223g, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the rear image set in this modified example will be described. First, with reference to the determination value calculation pattern table of FIG. 117(a), a method of calculating a determination value for selecting a back image will be described. In this modification, each determination value is set in various tables (first short variation table, second long variation table, etc.) set for each special symbol. There are three kinds of determination values "0", "1", and "2" set in each table, and a larger determination value is set for a table that is more advantageous to the player. This determination value is used to determine the combination of the variation pattern selection table set for each special symbol.

Specifically, among the variation pattern selection tables set for the first special symbol, "0" is set as the determination value of the first short variation table, and "1" is set as the determination value of the first medium variation table. is set, and "2" is set as the determination value of the first long variation table. That is, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the determination value is set to increase as the variation pattern having a longer variation time is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, among the variation pattern selection tables set for the second special symbol, "0" is set as the determination value of the second long variation table, "1" is set as the determination value of the second medium variation pattern, "2" is set as the judgment value of the second short fluctuation pattern. That is, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the value of the determination value is set to increase as the variation pattern with a shorter variation time is likely to be selected.

Here, in this modified example, it is advantageous for the player if the variation of the second special symbol is stopped earlier than the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is long, it is advantageous for the player. That is, when the variation pattern selection table with the above-described large determination value is set as the variation pattern for the first special symbol, it is in an advantageous state for the player. Also, when the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is also advantageous for the player. That is, even when a variation pattern selection table with a large determination value is set as the variation pattern for the second special symbol, the player is in an advantageous state.

As a result, as a combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol, when a variation pattern selection table with a large determination value is set for each special symbol, it is very advantageous for the player. state. That is, the larger the value obtained by summing the determination values of the variation pattern selection table for each set special symbol, the more advantageous the player is.

Therefore, in this modified example, a background image suggesting a degree of advantage for the player is selected based on the total value of the judgment values described above and the value of the effect counter 223g. Although the details will be described later, the higher the total value of the judgment values, the more likely it is that a back image with a high degree of expectation will be selected. is configured so that the rear image with a low .DELTA. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process of selecting the back image that suggests the degree of advantage for the player, and reduce the processing load.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117(b), the contents of the rear image selection table 222c in this modified example will be described. The back image selection table 222c is a table that is referred to when selecting a back image in back image change processing 7 (S2651). The back image selection table 222c is provided with a high reliability back image selection table 222c1 and a low reliability back image selection table 222c2. The back image selection table for each reliability level defines back images similar to those in the fourth embodiment ("city", "mountain", "sand beach", "seabed", "fish school" in descending order of expectation). ing.

Although the details will be described later, in the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1, when the sum of the discrimination values is small (“0”), the back image with high expectation (the back image of “bottom of the sea”) is specified not to be selected. Conversely, when the total value of the discrimination values is large ("4"), the back image with low expectations ("town" back image) is not selected. On the other hand, in the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2, even if the total value of the discrimination values is small (“0”), the back image with high expectation (the back image of “bottom of the sea”) is selected. It is stipulated that it may be selected. In addition, even if the sum of the discrimination values is large ("4"), it is stipulated that there is a possibility that the back image with low expectations (back image of "town") will be selected. there is That is, the back image set based on the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 makes it easy to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage for the player) set for each special symbol. This results in a so-called rear image with high reliability. On the other hand, the back image set based on the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2 makes it difficult to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage for the player) set for each special symbol. This results in a so-called rear image with low reliability.

Details of the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 will now be described with reference to FIG. 117(c). In the back image setting process 7 (see FIG. 119) described later, the high reliability back image selection table 222c1 has a value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter smaller than 10, and a value of the effect counter 223g is "151 to 198 , it is referred to select the back image (see S5055 in FIG. 119).

When the total value of the determination values of the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the production counter 223g A background image of "town" is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223g, a background image of "mountain" is set for the value "100 to 189" of the effect counter 223g, and a value "190" of the effect counter 223g is set. 198” is set with a back image of “sand beach”.

When the total value of the judgment values is "1", the background image of "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 149" for the effect counter 223g is set. , the back image of "mountain" is set, and the back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "2", the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "100 to 179" for the effect counter 223g is set. , the back image of "sand beach" is set, and the back image of "bottom of the sea" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "3", the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 149" for the effect counter 223g is set. , the back image of "sand beach" is set, and the back image of "bottom of the sea" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "4", the back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 179" for the effect counter 223g is set. , the back image of "bottom of the sea" is set, and the back image of "school of fish" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

Next, the details of the low-reliability rear image selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 117(d). In the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2, in the back image setting process 7 (see FIG. 119), which will be described later, the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is less than 10, and the value of the table selection effect counter 223s If it is "0 to 2", it is referred to select the back image (see S5054 in FIG. 119).

When the total value of the determination values of the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the production counter 223g A background image of "town" is set for the value "0-99" of the effect counter 223g, a background image of "mountain" is set for the value "100-149" of the effect counter 223g, and a value "150" of the effect counter 223g is set. A back image of "sand beach" is set for the values "189 to 189", and a back image of "sea bottom" is set for the values "190 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "1", the background image of "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 149" for the effect counter 223g is set. , a back image of "mountain" is set, a back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "150 to 179" of the effect counter 223g, and a "bottom of the ocean" is set for the value "180 to 189" of the effect counter 223g. back image is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "2", the background image of "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 99" for the effect counter 223g is set. , a back image of "mountain" is set, a back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "100 to 179" of the effect counter 223g, and a "bottom of the ocean" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g. back image is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "3", the back image of "town" is selected for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223g, , a back image of "mountain" is set, a back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the effect counter 223g, and a "bottom of the ocean" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g. back image is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "4", the back image of "town" is selected for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223g, , the back image of "mountain" is set, the back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the effect counter 223g, and the "bottom of the ocean" is set for the value "150 to 189" of the effect counter 223g. is set, and the back image of "fish school" is set for the value "190 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. First, the variable display setting process 7 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The variable display setting process 7 (S2113) in the modified example of the third embodiment has the processing of S2671 and S2672 added to the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 89) in the third embodiment. The difference is that the back image change processing 7 (S2651) is executed instead of the image change processing (see FIG. 90), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the fluctuation display setting process 7 (S2113), first, as in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is ON in the process of S2601 (S2601: Yes), S2602 and The process of S2603 is executed. When the processing of S2603 is finished, 1 is added to the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r (S2671), and the processing proceeds to S2604.

In the processing of S2604, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S2604: Yes), the processing of S2605 and S2606 is executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment. When the processing of S2606 is finished, the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S2672), and the processing proceeds to S2607.

In this way, until the variation based on the second special symbol is started, the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is not initialized, and each time the variation based on the first special symbol is started. will be added. As a result, when the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is large, the game ball is not entered into the second winning hole 64b, and the game ball is entered only into the first winning hole 64a. can be determined to be running.

In the processing from S2607 to S2612, the same processing as the processing from S2607 to S2612 of the third embodiment is executed. Thereafter, back image change processing 7 is executed (S2651), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 119, the back image selection process 7 (S2651) executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118) will be described. The rear image selection process 7 (S2651) in the modified example of the third embodiment adds the processes of S5051 to S5055 in place of the process of S5003 to the rear image selection process (see FIG. 90) of the third embodiment. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the back image selection process 7 (S2651), first, similarly to the third embodiment, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed, and the set variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol for The variation pattern selection table is discriminated (S5001, S5002).

When the processing of S5002 is finished, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter is 10 or more (S5051). In the process of S5051, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter is 10 or more (S5051: No), until the variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, the degree of expectation until a rear image with a high value is displayed), there is a high possibility that an illegal game is being played such that game balls are gradually entered into the first winning hole 64a. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the set variation pattern selection table for each special symbol, the back image of "town" is selected (S5052), and the process proceeds to S5004. As a result, even if a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set, the background image with a high degree of expectation is not set, thereby preventing (suppressing) execution of the above-described fraudulent game. can be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter is smaller than 10 (S5051: Yes), the back based on the variation pattern selection table set for each special symbol To set the image, the process proceeds to S5053.

In the processing of S5053, it is determined whether or not the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 0 to 2 (S5053). In the process of S5053, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223s for table selection is between 0 and 2 (S5053: Yes), a back image is selected using the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2 (S5054). , S5004. Since the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, the probability that the back image is selected using the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2 is 3/4. (75%).

On the other hand, in the process of S5053, if it is determined that the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 3 (S5053: No), a back image is selected using the highly reliable back image selection table 222c1 and the effect counter 223. (S5055), and the process proceeds to S5004. Since the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, the probability that the back image is selected using the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 is 1/4. (25%).

After the process of S5004, the processes of S5004 to S5007 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment, and this process ends.

As described above, in the modification of the third embodiment, the rear image is set based on the combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol (that is, the degree of advantage for the player). be. In this case, until a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set (that is, until a back image with a high degree of expectation is displayed), the game ball is allowed to enter the first winning hole 64a little by little. A game may be played. Therefore, in this modification, it is determined by counting the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r that the game ball has entered only the first winning hole 64a. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered only the first winning hole 64a, regardless of the set variation pattern selection table for each special symbol, the back image (" It is configured to set the back image of the city). As a result, even if a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set, the background image with a high degree of expectation is not set.

In this modification, a determination value is given to the variation pattern selection table for each special symbol based on the degree of advantage for the player. Then, based on the sum of the determination values of the variation pattern selection table for each set special symbol, the degree of advantage for the player is determined, and the rear image is selected. Therefore, it is not necessary to prescribe the degree of advantage for the player according to all the combinations of the set variation pattern selection tables for each special symbol. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process of selecting the back image that suggests the degree of advantage for the player, and reduce the processing load.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the special symbol lottery is performed once) is displayed. is used to select the variation pattern of each special symbol. As a result, even after the jackpot game ends, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are partially changed. The difference is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the main controller 110 has been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fourth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the fourth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 120(a), the configuration of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in this modification will be described. In this modification, part of the variation pattern selection table 202f in the ROM 202 is changed. FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table 202f in the variation pattern selection table 202f. Since other configurations of the ROM 202 are the same as those of the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (in this modification, until the variation is executed once), the variation of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation of the first special symbol. A variation pattern is defined. As a result, when the game ball enters the second winning port 64b during the jackpot game and the winning of the second special symbol is suspended, after the jackpot game ends, the second special symbol changes to the first special symbol. It will be in a state where it is stopped before the fluctuation of the pattern. That is, it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player.

Specifically, when the number of remaining selections after the end of the jackpot is 1 or more, in the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198", the special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set, and in the second special design, a special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120(b), the configuration of RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 in this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the RAM 203 of this modified example has a remaining selection count 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot and a The difference is that the number of remaining selections 203v is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the variation of the first special symbol is executed once). is. This special figure 1 remaining selection count after the end of the jackpot 203u is set to 1 when it is determined that it is the timing of the ending of the jackpot game in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 123) (see S1491 in FIG. 123), In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 121), when a variation pattern is selected from the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table, 1 is subtracted (see S552 in FIG. 121).

After the end of the special figure 2 jackpot, the number of remaining selections 203v is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the second special symbol is changed once). is. This special figure 2 after the end of the jackpot remaining selection number 203v is set to 1 when it is determined that it is the timing of the ending of the jackpot game in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 123) (see S1492 in FIG. 123), In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 122), when a variation pattern is selected from the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table, 1 is subtracted (see S952 in FIG. 122).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 121, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) in the modification of the fourth embodiment is the process from S551 to S554 for the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment. is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304), first, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S501 to S505 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S551.

In the processing of S551, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is greater than 0 (S551). In the process of S551, if it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S551: No), the current game state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, the fluctuation is executed once). In this case, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, if it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1 (S551: Yes), the current game state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S552 to process.

In the process of S552, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot (S552), and the process proceeds to S553. In the process of S553, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot that has been subtracted is 0 (S553). In addition, in this modification, since the value set to the remaining selection frequency 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1, the subtracted remaining selection frequency 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S553, if it is determined that the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S553: Yes), the current game state (state A to C ) is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S553, when it is determined that the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is not 0 (S553: No), the process of S554 is skipped and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) in the modification of the fourth embodiment is the process from S951 to S954 for the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 38) in the fourth embodiment. is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704), first, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S901 to S905 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S951.

In the process of S951, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is greater than 0 (S951). In the process of S951, if it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S951: No), the current game state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, the fluctuation is executed once). In this case, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S951, if it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1 (S951: Yes), the current game state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S952 to process.

In the process of S952, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot (S952), and the process proceeds to S953. In the process of S953, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot that has been subtracted is 0 (S953). In addition, in this modification, since the value set to the remaining selection frequency 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1, the subtracted remaining selection frequency 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S953, if it is determined that the value of the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S953: Yes), the current game state (state A to C ) is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S953, when it is determined that the value of the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is not 0 (S953: No), the process of S954 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the jackpot control process 8 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 8 (S1304) in the modification of the fourth embodiment differs from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 45) in the fourth embodiment in that the processes from S1491 to S1493 are added, and other The points are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S1304), first, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1401 to S1409 are executed. In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is time for the ending of the jackpot game (S1409), an ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1491.

In the process of S1491, 1 is set to the special figure 1 jackpot residual variation frequency 203u (S1491), and then 1 is set to the special figure 2 jackpot residual variation frequency 203v (S1492). It is possible to determine whether or not the game state is a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game by setting each big hit remaining fluctuation frequency by the processing of S1491 and S1492.

When the process of S1492 is completed, the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table 202f is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol (S1493). Then, as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the after-big-hit variation pattern selection table 202f is set (S1494), and this process is terminated. By the processing of S1493 and S1494, in a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to execute a variation with a variation pattern (the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first) different from the normal time.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the special symbol lottery is performed once), the player Using an advantageous variation pattern selection table, it is configured to select a variation pattern for each special symbol. As a result, even after the jackpot game ends, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Feature A group> (At the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 due to simultaneous fluctuation, the special figure 1 is always fluctuating)
A first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entering means for setting a period during which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means. a control means for dynamically displaying the first identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; and, based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, a display means for dynamically displaying second identification information; and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means; The ball-entering control means is characterized in that when the second ball-entering means is set to the enterable period, it is within a predetermined period after the game ball enters the first ball-entering means. Gaming machine A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine A1, a first ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means that is different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball can enter the second ball entering means. a ball entry control means for setting a period of time; and the first identification information is dynamically displayed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information based on the ball being thrown, and privilege granting for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means. and, when the second ball-entering means is set to the period in which the ball can be entered, the ball-entering control means has a predetermined time after the game ball enters the first ball-entering means. It is within the period. As a result, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the game ball enters the first entering means first, so the dynamic display of the first identification information is performed first. Since it has been executed, the dynamic display of the second identification information to which the privilege can be granted can be configured to be executed later, and the player is expected to display the first identification information in anticipation of the dynamic display of the second identification information. A dynamic display can be shown. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, since the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information can be suppressed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive awarding of benefits.

In the gaming machine A1, the ball entry control means is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. A variable member and variable control means for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is established, and the one state is defined as a period during which the game ball can be entered. (2) a game machine A2, wherein the variable member is variable by the variable control means;

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry control means is a variable member that can be varied between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. and variable control means for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is established, and the variable member is set to the one state as a period during which the game ball can be entered. The member is made variable by the variable control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the second identification information is dynamically displayed before the first identification information.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the privilege granting means can grant a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the privilege when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privilege giving means can give a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the privilege when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the dynamic display of the second identification information.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second ball entering means provides a first dynamic display period shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information after the game ball enters the first ball entering means. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged in a position where a ball can be entered within a period.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball-entering means is positioned within a first period shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information after the game ball has entered the first ball-entering means. It is placed in Therefore, there is an effect that a game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means; When the dynamic display displayed with the information and the dynamic display displayed with the specific second identification information are executed at the same time, the dynamic display displayed first with the predetermined first identification information. and termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the specific second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information when the is finished. A game machine A5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, dynamic display executing means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and dynamic display displayed with the predetermined first identification information. , and the dynamic display displayed with the specific second identification information are simultaneously executed, and when the dynamic display first displayed with the predetermined first identification information is completed, the specific a terminating means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information by displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information. Therefore, it is possible to change the advantage and the disadvantage according to the dynamic display period respectively executed by the first identification information and the second identification information, and it is possible to provide the player with novel game characteristics.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A5, the ball entry control means includes detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball that will enter the first ball entry means, and detection by the detection means. and period determination means for determining a period for the variable member to be varied from the first state to the second state by the variable control means based on the above.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the ball entry control means includes detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball that will enter the first ball entry means, and the variable control means based on the detection by the detection means. and period determining means for determining a period for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to change the profit given to the player according to the period determined by the period determining means, and to improve the interest of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 has determining means for performing determination based on whether a game ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and specified by the determining means A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means when the determination result of (1) is determined.

According to the gaming machine A7, when a specific determination result is determined in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a privilege advantageous to the player is given, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. .

In the gaming machine A7, when a special determination result is determined by the determining means, a special privilege more advantageous to the player than the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. Machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, a special benefit that is even more advantageous to the player is provided, so there is an effect that the game can be made fresh.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and a ball enters in the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state based on the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and variable control means for varying the state, wherein the privilege granting means grants a special privilege that is more advantageous than the privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. A game machine A9 to play.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the player can expect that the game ball entering the variable ball entry means will pass through the specific area, thereby improving the game. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

<Feature B group> (Simultaneous fluctuation, setting the deviation to a small hit, short opening for special 1 small hit, long opening for special 2 small hit)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first ball entering means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. determining means for performing determination and performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means; first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination; display means for simultaneously displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the determination; and dynamic display capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. execution means; dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; When the first identification information is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the game is played rather than the first privilege game. and the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result at the same time. When the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends earlier, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result terminating means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the display with the second identification information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result. Game machine B1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine B1, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. Based on that, a first determination is performed, a determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second determination based on the determination result of the first determination display means for simultaneously displaying the first identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; and dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. a dynamic display execution means capable of executing the dynamic display execution means; a dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; When the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed, the A privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result and the specific second determination result. When the second identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends first, the specific second determination result a termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second identification information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result; , has Therefore, by stopping the dynamic display of the second identification information before the dynamic display of the first identification information, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player, and to provide novel game characteristics. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, a specific ball entry means into which a game ball can enter and a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. a special privilege game execution means for executing; and an operation means for operating a ball entry guide member with a first action in which a game ball is likely to enter the specific ball entry means and a second action in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first action. , wherein the operation means is capable of executing the first operation more easily when the second bonus game is executed than the first bonus game.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means and the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game is executed. a privilege game execution means; and an operation means for operating a ball-entering guide member in a first operation in which a game ball easily enters the specific ball-entering means and in a second operation in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first operation. However, the operating means is easier to execute the first action when the second privilege game is executed than the first privilege game. Therefore, by the second privilege game executed when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the privilege to the player is variable depending on whether or not the game ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the player in multiple stages.

In the gaming machine B2, the operating means sets a period for operating the ball-entering induction member to a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means in the first action longer than in the second action. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operating means sets the period of operating the ball-entering induction member to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means in the first action longer than in the second action. be. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to switch between advantageous and disadvantageous conditions with easy control, and the control load can be reduced.

In a game machine B2 or B3, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game and variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is established, wherein the specific ball entry means is the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where a game ball entered into the is allowed to enter.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, by executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the variable ball entry means is set to the first state, and the specific ball entry means is switched to the specific ball entry means. is given, there is an effect that the value of the first privilege game or the second privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, when the first bonus game is executed, the operation means executes the first operation before the variable ball-entering means enters the first state, and then performs the first operation. 2 action is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the first action is executed during the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the first state. Game machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means during the second privilege game, and the value of the second privilege game can be improved.

In either gaming machine B4 or B5, the first privilege game and the second privilege game are those in which the variable ball entering means is varied to the first state the same number of times. B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4 or B5, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the difference between the first privilege game and the second privilege game from being determined from the operation of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that whether or not to enter the specific ball entering means is determined from the type of privilege game.

<Feature C group> (Giving types to the small hits, switching the special 2 fluctuation table with the special 1 small hit)
determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; Display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result. A game machine C1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine C1, the first determination is performed based on the establishment of the first condition and the second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result of and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; and displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result It has a variable control means for varying. Therefore, by displaying the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result, the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is changed, so that the playability is changed according to the determination result of the first determination. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C1, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine C2, characterized in that it has privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege when the second privilege is given.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege. Therefore, since the dynamic display period during which the second discrimination is determined which is advantageous to the player is varied according to the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information which is less profitable. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display executing means is configured to dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first. Then, a termination means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine C3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first, the specific and end means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting that the second identification information will be dynamically displayed in a short dynamic display period. .

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is preferentially performed based on a predetermined priority condition, and the dynamic display of the identification information set to be prioritized is preferentially performed. A game machine C4 characterized in that it has a priority means for playing.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is preferentially set based on a predetermined priority condition. It has priority means for preferentially performing dynamic display of identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information in any one of game machines C1 to C4; setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means, wherein the setting means is configured such that the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result is A game machine C5 characterized in that it is configured to be able to variably set the dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information based on the display.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the dynamic display period determination means can determine the dynamic display period. setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group for which the target display period is determined, and the setting means, based on the display of the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result, The dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage/advantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player receives more than the first privilege and the second privilege. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that an advantageous special privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C5, there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting a special determination result.

A gaming machine C7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the second privilege is set so that the special privilege is granted when a special condition is established.

According to the game machine C7, when the special condition is established in any one of the game machines C2 to C6, a special privilege is given, so that a further privilege advantageous to the player can be given. , there is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C7, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and a ball enters in the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition, and the second privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and variable control means for changing the state to the first state, wherein the privilege imparting means imparts the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. .

According to the gaming machine C8, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball entering the variable ball entering means will pass through the specific area, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Feature D group> (always SP in small hits where special 2 variation patterns are switched)
determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition; display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result by the determination means; and movement of the first identification information on the display means. dynamic display means for displaying a target; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result; When the first identification information indicating the determination result of is displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means a specific ball-entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first action for allowing a game ball to enter the specific ball-entering means, and a second action for making the ball-entering more difficult than the first action; and an operation means for operating an operation member; and an award granting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means, wherein the privilege granting means The privilege is given even when the first identification information based on the determination result by the means is displayed, and the first dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determination means The mode includes at least a special dynamic display mode in which a determination ratio is set high in the case of the special determination result, and the special dynamic display mode is the predetermined determination result. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the above.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine D1, based on the establishment of the first condition, the determination means for executing the first determination, the display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the display means dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; and dynamic display means for determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result. display mode determination means; privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating a predetermined determination result is displayed; When a game is executed, a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first action for allowing a game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and a ball entry more difficult than the first action. and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, wherein The privilege granting means grants the privilege even when the first identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed as a special determination result, and is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the first dynamic display mode, at least a special dynamic display mode in which a determination ratio is set high in the case of the special determination result is set, and the special dynamic display mode is the predetermined is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the determination result of . Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the determination means executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and the display means is based on the determination result of the second determination. The second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the bonus game execution means displays the second identification information based on a specific determination result. The gaming machine D2 is characterized by being constructed so as to be able to execute a second privilege game having a smaller privilege than the first privilege game when information is displayed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means executes the second determination based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and the display means performs the second determination based on the determination result of the second determination. Information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the bonus game execution means displays the second identification information based on a specific determination result. When the second privilege game is executed, the second privilege game having fewer privileges than the first privilege game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the advantage or disadvantage for the player between the first discrimination and the second discrimination, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the second privilege game is set to have a period in which the action member is in the first action shorter than that of the first privilege game.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the second privilege game is set to have a shorter period in which the action member is the first motion than the first privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to easily make it difficult to be imparted.

The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which a privilege is given by the privilege giving means with a high degree of expectation.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode with a high degree of expectation that a privilege will be given by the privilege giving means. Since the first privilege game is executed even if is not given, there is an effect that the disappointment of the player can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. Machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, the first identification information and the second identification information can be dynamically displayed at the same time in any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, so there is an effect that the game can be played efficiently. .

Termination means for forcibly terminating one dynamic display based on the termination of one dynamic display when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time in the game machine D5. A gaming machine D6 characterized by having:

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the end means forcibly ends the dynamic display of one of the machines in accordance with the end timing of the dynamic display of the other, so that the game can be played more efficiently. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D6, when the dynamic display is forcibly terminated by the termination means, it is regulated that a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the identification information for which the dynamic display is terminated. A game machine D7 characterized in that it has control means for

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, there is an effect that gambling can be suppressed by restricting the awarding of the privilege by the restricting means.

<Feature E group> (switches between special 1 and special 2 variation tables based on the number of variations)
determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; Display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result and second identification information based on the second determination result that is the determination result of the second determination, and the specific first determination result on the display means or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player; Dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, and a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means and a dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information by the dynamic display period determination means. A first dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is set and a second dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are set group determining means for determining each type, wherein the group determining means changes the type of each of the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group based on establishment of a change condition; The game machine E1 is characterized in that it is determined by

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine E1, the first determination is performed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the first determination result, which is the determination result of the second determination, and second identification information based on the second determination result, which is the determination result of the second determination, respectively; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on the specific first determination result or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed; dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying said first identification information and said second identification information simultaneously on said display means; and said first identification information dynamically displayed by said dynamic display execution means. dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a dynamic display period of the first identification information by the dynamic display period determination means A first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set for determining a second dynamic display period in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information and a group determining means for determining each type of the dynamic display period group, wherein the group determining means selects the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display based on the establishment of a change condition. This is determined by changing the type of the period group. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display executing means, either one of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result ends before the other dynamic display is displayed with the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to the predetermined determination result, and the game machine E2 has stopping means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are simultaneously dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the first identification information and the second identification information, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result precedes the other the other dynamic display is displayed with the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to the predetermined determination result to forcibly stop the dynamic display. , the player can expect the dynamic display of the second identification information to end first.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a dynamic display period longer than a predetermined first period is determined in the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. a long first dynamic display period group and a long second dynamic display period group, and a short first dynamic display period group and a short second dynamic display period in which a dynamic display period shorter than the first period is likely to be determined A game machine E3 characterized in that at least a display period group is set.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means have a predetermined number of A long first dynamic display period group and a long second dynamic display period group in which a dynamic display period longer than one period is likely to be determined, and a short first dynamic display period in which a dynamic display period shorter than the first period is likely to be determined. Since at least the dynamic display period group and the short second dynamic display period group are set, there is an effect that the game characteristics can be varied by switching the dynamic display mode group.

A gaming machine E4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E2 or E3, the predetermined determination result is set to a determination result that does not give a privilege advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, since no privilege advantageous to the player is given, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling nature.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which it is difficult to enter a ball, and based on the execution of the privilege game, and variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that the player can easily understand that the privilege game is being executed. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

In the gaming machine E5, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter, a regulation state that regulates the game ball from entering the specific area, and a release state that cancels the regulation. and a variable means that can be varied between and, and the privilege game execution means executes a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game when a game ball enters the specific area. A game machine E6 characterized by:

In the gaming machine E6, the variable means is set to the released state in the privilege game executed based on the specific second determination result, rather than in the privilege game executed based on the specific first determination result. The game machine E7 is characterized in that it is set to be easily variable.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the second identification information stops earlier than the first identification information, so that the player can be more advantageous.

<Feature F group> (With no special 1 reservation, special 2 reservation 1 configuration, aiming to win special 2 during big hit or small hit)
A first determination is performed based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entering the first ball entering means. , determining means for executing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; first identification information based on a first determination result, which is the result of the first determination by the determining means; Display means for displaying second identification information based on the second determination result, which is the determination result of the second determination, and first identification information based on the specific first determination result is displayed on the display means. When the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is executed. 2. Privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game; dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means; and the dynamic display thereof. dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by execution means; storage means for storing the execution right of the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means when the target is displayed; 1 When the identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information during the dynamic display period is performed other than the specific first determination result. or end means for forcibly displaying a determination result other than the specific second determination result to end the dynamic display, wherein the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display of the first identification information The dynamic display period of the second identification information longer than the display period is easily determined, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed, the determination is stored in the storage means and execution right control means for making it difficult for the right to be stored and for facilitating the storage of the right for execution in the storage means when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine F1 characterized by:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine F1, based on the first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the ball entering the first ball entering means, , determining means for executing the first determination and performing the second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; display means for displaying the first identification information based on the first identification information and the second identification information based on the second identification result, which is the identification result of the second identification, respectively; When the first identification information is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the second privilege game is higher than the first privilege game. Bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game advantageous to the player, and dynamic display execution capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means and a dynamic display period of the second identification information; A memory for storing the execution right of the second discrimination by the discriminating means up to a predetermined number of times based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. means for dynamically displaying the first identification information or the second identification information during a dynamic display period when the specific first identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed; end means for forcibly displaying a determination result other than the first determination result or the specific second determination result to end the dynamic display, and the dynamic display period determination means includes the The dynamic display period of the second identification information longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is configured to be easily determined, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed Execution right control means for making it difficult for the discrimination right to be stored in the storage means and for facilitating storage of the execution right in the storage means when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed. and Therefore, since the player can play the game in anticipation that the execution right will be memorized during the privilege game, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second ball entering means has a delay means for delaying the entry of game balls one by one at an interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the second ball entry means has a delay means for delaying the entry of game balls one by one at intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily suppress the storage of execution rights.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the predetermined interval is configured to be shorter than the execution period of the first privilege game.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the predetermined interval is configured in a period shorter than the execution period of the first privilege game, so that the first privilege game is executed. There is an effect that execution rights can be easily stored when executed.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is provided a specific area into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the specific area, and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. a variable member that can be varied between two states; and variable control means for varying the variable member between the second state and the first state, wherein the variable control means When the first privilege game is executed, it is easier to change the variable member to the first state than the second state, and when the second privilege game is executed, the variable member is changed to the second state. The game machine F4 is characterized in that it is easier to change to the second state than the first state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to change between a specific area into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the specific area, and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. and variable control means for changing the variable member to either the second state or the first state, wherein the variable control means executes the first privilege game. In this case, it is easier to change the variable member to the first state than the second state, and when the second privilege game is executed, the variable member is changed to the second state rather than the first state Since it is easy to change the value, the benefits can be provided step by step, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game and variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means to the open state based on the above.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the variable ball entry means is opened based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, so the first privilege game Alternatively, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the second privilege game is being played.

In the gaming machine F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the specific area is arranged at a position where a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can enter.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the specific area based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and the interest of the game. have the effect of improving

In any one of the game machines F2 to F6, the game machine F7 is characterized in that the delay means has a rolling surface capable of rolling the game ball for a period equal to or longer than the predetermined interval.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F2 to F6, there is an effect that a predetermined interval or more can be secured by the rolling surface that can be rolled for a period of the predetermined interval or more. be.

<Characteristic group G> (configuration for regulating the occurrence of hold in particular 2)
A first determination is performed based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entering the first ball entering means. , determining means for executing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; first identification information based on a first determination result, which is the result of the first determination by the determining means; Display means for displaying second identification information based on the second determination result, which is the determination result of the second determination, and first identification information based on the specific first determination result is displayed on the display means. When the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is executed. 2. Privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and dynamic display execution thereof dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by means; storage means for storing the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means when displayed; A state setting means capable of switching between a first state in which the execution right is easily stored and a second state in which the execution right is less likely to be stored than the first state is provided. Game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine G1, a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and a ball entering the first ball-entering means , determining means for executing the first determination and performing the second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; display means for displaying the first identification information based on the first identification information and the second identification information based on the second identification result, which is the identification result of the second identification, respectively; When the first identification information is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the second privilege game is higher than the first privilege game. Bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game advantageous to the player, and dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means and a dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively; Storage means for storing the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entry means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. and state setting means capable of switching and setting a first state in which the execution right is easily stored in the storage means and a second state in which the execution right is less likely to be stored than in the first state. is. Therefore, since it is possible to make it a special state that the game ball enters the second ball entering means continuously, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising a delay means for delaying the ball-entering interval of the game ball to a first interval or more when the game ball enters the second ball-entering means. Machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the delay means for delaying the ball entering interval to the first interval or more. , there is an effect that it is possible to easily suppress the continuous entry of game balls into the second ball entry means.

In the gaming machine G2, the delay means is arranged at a position that can be guided to the second ball entering means, and is capable of rolling the game ball for the first period or more, and the rolling means is: A gaming machine G3, further comprising a guide section for guiding a game ball that has rolled for the first period or longer to the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the delay means is arranged at a position that can be guided to the second ball entering means, and the rolling means capable of rolling the game ball for the first period or more, and the rolling means are arranged in the first and a guide section for guiding a game ball that has rolled for a period or longer to the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution right from being stored during a period other than the privilege game.

In the gaming machines G1 to G3, the state setting means is characterized by switching to and setting the first state based on execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game. Gaming machine G4.

In the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed, so that the execution right is easily stored, and only the dynamic display of the second identification information is performed. There is an effect that it can be easily done. Therefore, there is an effect that the second privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be easily executed.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game are executed. variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means to the open state, a specific area into which the game ball entering the variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the fact that the player has entered the ball.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, by executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the specific area is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved. Note that, as a privilege provided by the privilege providing means, the variable ball entry means may be left open until a predetermined condition is satisfied, or the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or second determination result may be set high. corresponds to

In the gaming machine G5, the gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the second privilege game is set such that the game ball enters the specific area more easily than the first privilege game.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the execution of the second privilege game makes it easier to give a privilege, and the execution right to dynamically display the second identification information is stored. has the effect of making it more valuable.

<Feature H group> (Giving types to the small hits, switching the special 2 fluctuation table with the special 1 small hit.Transition with the number of fluctuations on the special figure 1 side)
determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; Display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information is established. A gaming machine H1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine H1, the first determination is performed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result of and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; and displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information, and dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information is established. It has variable control means for varying the period. Therefore, the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is varied by establishing the variable condition that is established by displaying the first identification information, so that the interest of the game can be improved. There is If second identification information with a short change time is likely to be selected, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed efficiently. Here, the variable condition corresponds to the display mode in which the first identification information is displayed, the number of times of dynamic display is a predetermined number of times, and the like.

In the gaming machine H1, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine H2, characterized in that it has privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege when the second privilege is given.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second major privilege. Therefore, since the dynamic display period during which the second discrimination is determined which is advantageous to the player is varied according to the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information which is less profitable. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine H2, the variable condition is established when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed.

According to the gaming machine H3, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the first privilege having less privilege than the second privilege is executed. There is an effect that the establishment of the variable condition can be expected and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the game machine H2, the variable condition is established based on the number of dynamic display times of the first identification information reaching a predetermined number of times or exceeding a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed can make the player interested, and the effect of improving the amusement of the game can be obtained. be.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display execution means is configured to dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. When the first identification information based on the determination result of and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ending means for ending the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result by displaying the second identification information based on a determination result different from the specific determination result when finished first. A gaming machine H5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first, the specific and end means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting that the second identification information will be dynamically displayed in a short dynamic display period. .

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display of the identification information set to have priority is given priority based on a priority condition predetermined for the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that it has a priority means for executing the game.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is preferentially based on a predetermined priority condition. Since there is a priority means for preferentially executing the dynamic display of the set identification information, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of game machines H1 to H6, dynamic display period determination means capable of respectively determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information; setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means, wherein the setting means determines the second The game machine H7 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to variably set the dynamic display period group corresponding to the identification information.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the dynamic display period determination means can determine the dynamic display period. and setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which a target display period is determined, wherein the setting means sets the dynamic display period corresponding to the second identification information based on the establishment of the variable condition. It is configured such that the display period group can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage/advantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H7, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player is more likely to receive the first privilege than the second privilege. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that an advantageous special privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting a special determination result.

A gaming machine H9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines H2 to H8, the second privilege is set so that the special privilege is granted when a special condition is established.

According to the gaming machine H9, when the special condition is satisfied in any one of the gaming machines H2 to H8, a special benefit is granted, so that a benefit advantageous to the player can be further granted. , there is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H9, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and a ball enters in the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition, and the second privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and variable control means for varying the state to a first state, wherein the privilege imparting means imparts the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball entering the variable ball entering means will pass through the specific area, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H10, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H10 The game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a First winning port (first ball entry means)
64b Second winning port (second ball entry means)
64b1 electric accessory (entrance control means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
114 display control device (dynamic display execution means)
S303, S703 determining means S304, S704 dynamic display period determining means S1304, S1305 privilege game executing means S609, S919 ending means

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In some cases, a privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games.

JP 2003-265765 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first entering means. determining means for performing a first determination based on the game ball entering the ball means and performing a second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means; display means for simultaneously displaying first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, and dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; a dynamic display period determining means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification based on a specific determination result; privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the information is displayed; the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result; When the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed at the same time, and the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends first, dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result by displaying the second identification information indicating a determination result based on a determination result different from the specific second determination result; and termination means for forcibly terminating.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the game ball in the first ball entering means Determination means for performing a first determination based on the entry of the ball, and performing a second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means; and determination of the first determination display means for simultaneously displaying first identification information based on the result and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively A dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying, and a dynamic display period for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. a determining means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and displaying the second identification information based on a specific determination result; the first privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the first identification information and the specific second discrimination based on the predetermined first discrimination result. When the second identification information based on the result is dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends first, the specific second identification information Dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result is displayed with the second identification information indicating the determination result based on the determination result different from the specific second determination result, and the dynamic display is forcibly terminated. and terminating means. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. It is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along La-La, (b) is a cross-sectional view along Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (a)-(b) are rear views of a part of the first variable winning device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the relationship of the stop timing of the variable display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (a) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the stop timings of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 3A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. 2C, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fusion effect selection table in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a work RAM of the display control device; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 forced stop processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 small per stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 forced stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device, (b) is a special figure 2 small hit stop processing performed by the MPU in the main control device It is a flow chart showing. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows small hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command reception processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation time measurement processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing fusion effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is. (a) is a flow chart showing V winning effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a per variation pattern selection table provided in the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) ~ (c) is the voice in the second embodiment 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the lamp control device; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen of a third symbol display device in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a third embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of a RAM of a main controller in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. (a) to (e) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a rear image provided in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the details of a selection table, and FIG. 8C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation stop process 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 small per stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation stop process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 small hit stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing rear image change processing executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is an expansion perspective view of the croon provided in the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd design display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 4 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) and (c) are provided in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various tables in the table; It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit ending process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 6 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing SP reach selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a modification of the third embodiment; (b) is a schematic view of the audio ramp control device according to a modification of the third embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM typically. (a) is a judgment value calculation pattern table provided in the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the third embodiment, and (b) to (d) are the sound in the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a rear image selection table provided in a RAM within the lamp control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 7 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing rear image change processing 7 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a post-jackpot pattern selection table provided in a ROM of a main controller in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in an example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 73, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64a, second winning opening 64b, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal symbol starting opening (through gate ) 67, a variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64a, the second winning opening 64b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 11) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying in accordance with each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64a or the second prize winning port 64b. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 64b, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A and the second symbol display device 37B are configured to be operable (variable) at the same time, and the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed at the same time. It is configured so that it can be notified to the player (simultaneously displayed in a variable manner).

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64a and the second prize winning port 64b. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. A 15R jackpot (jackpot A) is prepared as the jackpot type determined here. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. . Here, "15R jackpot (jackpot A)" means a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. It is a jackpot in which a maximum of 15 jackpot rounds are performed in which a ball can be entered.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is determined that there is no big win in the big win lottery triggered by the winning of the first prize winning port 64a or the second prize winning port 64b, it is determined to be a small win. When it is determined as a small hit, the determination of the small hit type is performed. As the types of small wins determined here, small wins A, B and C are set as small wins based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64a. Also, a small win D is set as a small win based on the ball entering the second winning hole 64b. When the result of the lottery is a small win, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display a symbol corresponding to the type of the small win as a stop symbol after the end of variation.

Here, the "small win A" is a small win with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and is a small win in which the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed twice at maximum. . Similarly, the “small win B”, “small win C”, and “small win D” are also small wins with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, but each period during which the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened ( time) are configured differently. Although the details will be described later, it is set differently depending on the type of small win whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 can win.

Specifically, in the small winnings A to D, the switching member 65h rotates downward for 2 seconds from the start of the small winning game, the guide piece 65h2 rotates downward, and the special discharge port 65e2 The flow path to is opened. Then, in the "small win A", two seconds after the start of the small win game, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened and closed twice for 1 second. 65f1 is opened and closed twice for 1 second, and in the case of "small win C", the open/close door 65f1 is opened and closed twice for 1 second after 2 seconds from the start of the small win game. On the other hand, in the "small win D", opening and closing operations are performed twice for 1 second from the start of the small win game (immediately after the start of the small win game).

That is, in the small winning A to small winning C, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened after 2 seconds from the start of the small winning game, so when the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened, the switching member 65h is already in the normal discharge port 65e1. The state of guiding the ball (see FIG. 10(b)) (hereinafter referred to as normal guidance state) is switched, and the game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 with small hits A to C. However, it is difficult to pass the game ball to the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, the small wins A to C are set to be disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the small win D, since the open/close door 65f1 is opened from the start of the small win game, it is possible for the game ball entering the first variable winning device 65 to pass through the V winning switch 65e3. Thus, the switching member 65h is operated at the same operation timing from the start of the small winning game regardless of the small winning type. On the other hand, by configuring the opening timing of the open/close door 65f1 differently depending on the type of the small win, the small win D advantageous to the player and the small win A to C disadvantageous to the player are provided. are set respectively. By configuring in this way, the operation control of the switching member 65h can be facilitated. Further, since the operation timing of the switching member 65h is constant regardless of the type of small win, the player can expect the game ball to pass through the V prize switch 65e3. Therefore, the small win D is set to be a small win advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, since it is possible to win the small winning D only in the second special symbol, for the player, the second winning opening 64b is an advantageous winning opening, and the first winning opening 64a is disadvantageous. It is set as a winning entrance.

Here, in each small winning game, a display mode (in-round display mode) indicating that the small winning game is in progress is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning game. Specifically, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Right shot!" A notification prompting you to Then, the characters "Get a big hit with V winning!" ) will be started after this small winning game is notified to the player. The timing at which the display mode displayed during the small winning game is displayed is 3 seconds before the opening and closing door 65f1 in each small winning game is in an open state, and the game ball enters at the timing when the opening and closing door 65f1 opens. It is the timing when the ball becomes possible. As a result, the player can recognize the start of the small winning game as the timing when the display mode of the small winning game is started on the third symbol display device 81, and the small winning game is displayed at each small winning. Since the period from when the mode is displayed to when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened is constant at 3 seconds, it is difficult to recognize that the opening timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 differs depending on the type of small win. there is Therefore, it can be suppressed that the small hit type is determined at the opening timing of the open/close door 65f1. Therefore, when the small winning game is started, there is an effect that the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch 65e3 can be expected regardless of the small winning type.

Further, in each small hit (small hits A to C), a variation pattern table (see FIG. 16) when the second special symbol set after the end of the small hit game is set. Specifically, when the small hit game of "small hit A" ends, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 1 (state A) is set (see FIG. 16(b)). When the small hit game of "small hit B" is completed, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 2 (state B) is set (see FIG. 16(c)). When the small hit game of "small hit C" ends, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern table 3 (state C) is set (see FIG. 16(d)). Although the details of each variation pattern table will be described later, each variation pattern table is configured to vary the easily selected variation time. Therefore, it is possible to vary the variation time (dynamic display time) selected in the second special symbol according to the small hit type of the first special symbol. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, the second special symbol stops first, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol is If it is a small hit D, the small hit game of the small hit D is executed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol stops first, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol during fluctuation is a small hit D, it is forced to stop as a loss. Therefore, when the variation time of the second special symbol is likely to be selected shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it can be said that the player is set in a favorable state. Therefore, by setting a variation pattern table in which a short variation time is likely to be selected according to the type of small hit by the first special symbol, a state advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, by variably setting the variation pattern table, the state advantageous to the player can be varied, and the enjoyment of predicting not only the big win but also the type of the variation pattern table can be provided to the player.

In this embodiment, it is configured so as not to shift to a high probability state or a time saving state (electrical support state) after the end of the jackpot, but it is not limited to this, and a jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot is provided. good too. Here, the "high-probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a time during probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, it is easy to shift to a special game state. It is the game state. The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 64b. "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged, so that the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 64b. refers to the state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 64b more than when the electric accessory 64b1 is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 64b, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 associated with the second winning opening 64b during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 64b1 is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 64b1 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second prize winning opening 64b is opened and one win. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning opening 64b is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 64b1 is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64a and the second winning port 64b is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and a normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67 Triggered by the passage of the ball, the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64a (start winning), the first special symbol variation is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using this as a trigger. Also, when the ball enters the second winning hole 65b (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers the variation of the second special symbol. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively displayed (referred to as a special symbol in the second step), the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. As for the third symbol, a dedicated symbol is variably displayed with respect to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed. It should be noted that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variably displayed at the same time.

Since the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time, more lottery games can be executed in the same time and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the first special symbol is always in the process of being variably displayed. The details of this configuration will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the third symbol (○×) is the first special symbol. , is displayed for each of the second special symbols. Also, a fusion effect indicating whether or not a small win D advantageous to the player has been won is displayed in a display area larger than the third symbol. Details will be described later, but when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit D, the display mode indicating whether the second special symbol stops earlier than the first special symbol is a rabbit and a turtle. The player is notified in a display mode simulating competition. If the tortoise beats the rabbit, it means winning the jackpot D.

In this embodiment, the turtle wins only when the small win D is won. As a configuration in which a winning effect may be executed, the player may be given the pleasure of whether or not the game ball can enter the V winning prize switch 67e3 in the subsequent small winning game. Also, the result of the competition between the rabbit and the turtle may not be displayed when a small win is won, and the game ball may be entered into the V winning switch 65e3 so that the tortoise's victory is determined. By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the small winning game more.

As for the third design, as shown in FIG. 4(a), a first display area Ds1 in which the third design corresponding to the first special design is displayed is set at the lower left of the third design display device 81, and A second display area Ds2 in which a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed is set below. In both the first display area Ds1 and the second display area, "○×" symbols are displayed in parallel in two rows, and "○○" is displayed when the winning judgment result is a big win. If it is a small win, "◯×" is displayed, and if it is a loss, "XX" is displayed. During the variable display, the "○" symbols and the "X" symbols in each row are alternately displayed at high speed.

In the display area of the third pattern display device 81, in addition to the third pattern and the fusion effect, character patterns, characters, etc. are displayed as an advance notice display mode to be displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third pattern. be done. Further, when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest of the ready-to-win display mode is displayed.

A second symbol display device (not shown) displays a symbol “○” and a symbol “×” as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. '' alternately lighting up for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 64b1 associated with the second prize winning opening 64b is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled at a position above the first winning opening 64a in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and all game balls entering the first winning opening 64a is configured to pass through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and then enter the ball. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not suspended. Therefore, only when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 when the normal symbol variation is stopped, the winning lottery of the second symbol is performed, and the normal symbol variation display is started. be.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 0 times, and may be set to 1 or more times (for example, 4 times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the lower side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

Below the variable display device unit 80 and below the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a first winning opening 64a through which a ball can win is provided. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64a, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 11), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64a in front view, there is arranged a second winning opening 64b in which a ball can win. When the ball enters the second winning hole 64b, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 11), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

As shown in FIG. 2, the second prize winning port 64b is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64a. The second winning opening 64b passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the position where the game ball that did not win the first winning opening 64a can enter, or the game passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 Placed in a position where the ball can enter. In addition, above the second prize winning port 64b, a normal electric accessory 64b1 configured in a bow shape capable of blocking the ball entrance of the second prize winning port 64b is arranged. As shown, it is arranged at a position that restricts (does not allow) the game ball to enter the second starting port 64a, and when the normal pattern hits, it rotates counterclockwise about 90 degrees to the second start port 64a. The normal electric accessory 64b1 guides the game ball to the winning opening 64b, and the second winning opening 64b becomes in a state where the game ball can enter (hereinafter referred to as an open state).

Here, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a variation time of 0.5 second or 1 second is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol. After the variation time, when the winning pattern is normal, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is changed to the open state for 0.5 seconds. That is, the period in which the game ball can pass through the second winning hole 64b after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 is 0.5 seconds to 1 second after the game ball passes through the through gate 67. (In the case of 0.5 second fluctuation time of the normal design) or 1 second to 1.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (in the case of 1 second fluctuation time of the normal design). Sometimes. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to enter the first winning hole 64a without fail after that, and the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and enters the first winning hole 64a. Since the period until it is detected by a detection switch (not shown) that detects is about 0.2 seconds, after the first special symbol starts to change, the game ball is placed in the second start port 64b. The period during which the ball can be entered is the period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the game ball enters the first winning hole 64a (when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds) ), the period from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. In other words, the timing at which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate is the period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, or from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. There are two types of periods until later. Therefore, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is configured 1.3 seconds after the fluctuation start of the first special symbol even at the latest timing.

In this embodiment, when the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a small hit (in this embodiment, in the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, all the lottery results other than the big hit are small hits), the fluctuation of the shortest fluctuation time Even if it is a pattern, it is 5 seconds, and it is configured so that the first special symbol is always fluctuating when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery at the start of the variation of the second special symbol is also a small hit except for the big hit, and there is a variation in which the lottery result is a small hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At the same time, it is configured to be easily changed. However, when they are fluctuating at the same time, the small hit of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped first is executed, and the one special symbol is forcibly stopped by the result of determination that it is out. Therefore, when a small win is achieved with the second special symbol, the small win D is always executed, which is advantageous for the player, but the remaining variation of the first special symbol at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. If the time is shorter than the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol, the lottery small win D is forcibly stopped as a failure, and a small win advantageous to the player is forcibly stopped. It is configured so that winning D is not executed.

In addition, since the first winning opening 64a (first special symbol) and the second starting opening 64 (second special symbol) are configured so that the held ball is not stored, the game is played continuously to the second winning opening 64b. Even if two balls enter, the problem that the second special symbol fluctuates independently can be suppressed.

Also, the first winning hole 64a and the second winning hole 64b are also one of the winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64a and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 64b are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64a and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 64b are different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64a The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 64b may be set to five.

The probability of a big win and the probability of a small win are the same when a ball enters the first winning hole 64a and when a ball enters the second winning hole 64b (see FIG. 14(b)). However, the type of small win selected in the case of a small win is more likely to occur when the ball enters the second winning port 64b than when the ball enters the first winning port 64a. It is configured to select a small hit D that allows the game ball to easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to win a small prize at the second winning hole 64b.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the second prize winning port 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a small win is discriminated in the big win lottery performed due to the winning in the first prize winning port 64a or the second prize winning port 64b, a variable time is selected based on the result of the discrimination. When the variation of the special symbol is started and it is stopped and displayed before the other special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a small winning stop symbol, and the small symbol is displayed. A stop symbol corresponding to the win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the small win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (small win) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the open/close door 65f1 is opened twice with an open time of 1 second at the opening timing according to the small hit type already described above.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided above the first variable winning device 65 . Specifically, the second variable prize winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the second specific prize winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid ( not shown). The second specific prize winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the front lower side, and the tilted opening/closing plate receives the game ball flowing down the front surface of the game board, thereby causing the ball to move to the second specific winning opening 650a. An open state in which it is easy to win a prize is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed as a result of winning a prize in the first prize winning port 64a or the second prize winning port 64b results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot is won. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to become a stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the second variable winning device 65 is opened by the jackpot game. This open state is continued until 10 game balls enter the second specific winning port 650a or 30 seconds elapse, and then closed. This operation is regarded as one round, and after repeating up to 15 rounds, the jackpot game ends. In addition, although the details will be described later, a big hit also occurs when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 650 described above. After that, the game state transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state) in which the ball is likely to win.

It should be noted that the jackpot game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used instead of the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64a.

An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first prize winning port 64a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 11) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
Details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. The first variable prize winning device 65, as shown in FIG. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. A LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening and closing for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d An opening/closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that protrudes to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear cover body 65j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g, and its rear cover A channel solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the channel solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. consists of

FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 9(c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 9(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 9B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 9(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 10(b).

As shown in FIG. 9(b), the opening of the specific winning slot 65a is opened and closed by an open/close door 65f1 constructed of a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring in this way, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves toward the second winning port 64b. configured to be induced.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 9(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 9(b). As shown in FIG. 9A, a magnetic sensor 65c1 having a detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 10, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 10(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . A game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a V winning switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be.

In this embodiment, in small hits A to D (all small hits), the induction piece 65h2 is switched to the open state shown in FIG. 10(a) for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is in the open state after 2 seconds from the start of the small prize game in the small prizes A to C, and at that time, the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that the specific prize winning is achieved. A game ball that has won the opening 65a cannot be guided to the specific discharge opening 65e2. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set to be impossible (difficult) to win.

On the other hand, in the small winning D, the door 65f1 is opened for 1 second from the start of the small winning game, closed for 0.2 seconds, and opened again for 1 second. As a result, when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance 65a in the open state in the small hit D, it becomes a period in which the guide piece 65h2 is set to the open state, so the game ball is discharged to the special discharge port 65e2 by the guide piece 65h2. is induced to win the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small winning D, the start of the big winning game is executed.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 described above during the small winning game (small winning D), so that the big winning game is played after the small winning game. is started. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set as a winning opening for awarding a jackpot game. The probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 1/400, but the probability of winning a small win is as high as 399/400. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting a big win game by winning the small win D rather than a big win by lottery of special symbols.

With reference to FIG. 10(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described. In addition, in the small hits A to D in the present embodiment, when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit game, it is changed to the closed state shown in FIG. 10(b). FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state (closed state) in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, there is provided a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of game balls. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have entered the first variable prize winning device 65 have been discharged or not by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V prize winning switch 65e3.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the V prize switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed to determine whether or not to give a big win game state. can. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting a jackpot game state separately from the first variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

In this embodiment, it is configured such that a big hit is given based on the game ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 described above. As a result, even if the big winning lottery does not result in a big winning, the player plays the small winning game expecting the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. 1st hit type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the off in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for initial value setting of the 1st hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol execution area 203a corresponding to winning to the first winning opening 64a and a second special symbol performing area 203b corresponding to winning to the second winning opening 64b. A first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter are provided in each of these areas in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b. Each value of C3 and small hit type counter C4 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal pattern execution area 203c consisting of one execution area. Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take values between 0 and 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 44).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 14(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is When the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table matches, it is determined as the big win of the special symbol.

Here, the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). The jackpot random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "399" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If the result is "399", it is determined to be a big win. Further, it is determined whether the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 398".

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, a special symbol small hit If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop design displayed on the first design display device 37 will be the one at the time of the small hit of the special design (when one special design is stopped earlier).

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol execution area 203a.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first hit random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 400 as described above, the total number of random number numbers for a big hit is 1, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/400".

Further, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within a range of 0-198. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is any one of "0 to 198" is "15R jackpot (jackpot A)". In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of jackpot is provided, but the invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected.

The small hit type counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-198. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A to D) are selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIGS. 15(c) and 16) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202 .

A plurality of variation pattern tables (see FIGS. 15(c) and 16) are set in the variation pattern selection table 202f. As for this variation pattern table, a plurality of dedicated variation pattern tables are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each variation pattern table is set for each result of determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning pattern is set by the random number table 202b (see FIG. 14(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. However, when it coincides with the value of the random number set by the random number table 202b per normal pattern, it is determined as a normal pattern (second pattern).

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the random number table 202b per normal figure described above. In this random number table for normal symbols 202b, there are 10 random numbers that become normal symbol wins when the probability of normal symbols is low, and the range is "0 to 9". These random numbers are stored in the random number table 202b per normal pattern. Since the total number of winning random numbers is 10 out of 100 random numbers, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 0.5 seconds or 1 second. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 64b is opened only for "0.5 seconds x 1 time". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 339), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 44).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 44) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 43) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 42) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 13, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the jackpot random number table 202a, the normal pattern random number table 202b, and the jackpot type table 202c, which have already been described above, a small hit type selection table 202d, a state transition table 202e, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, and a normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g , small winning scenario table 202h, big winning scenario table 202i, and other data table 202z are set respectively.

With reference to FIG.14(d), small hit classification selection table 202d is demonstrated. This small hit type selection table 202d is selected based on the small hit type selection counter C4 that acquires the small hit type to be executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. is a selection table of The small hit type selection counter C4 is a random value that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is based on the game ball entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b. Numeric value. FIG.14(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table 202d. In the small hit type selection table 202d, dedicated small hit types are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, three types of small winning A, small winning B, and small winning C are set. In the small hit A, "0 to 179" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4, and in the small hit B, "180 to 195" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4. The small hit C is set to "196 to 198" as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit D, and the small hit D is always set in the small hit of the second special symbol. is configured as

In the present embodiment, by executing the small hits A to D, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is configured to be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), when the small hit A is executed, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) is set as the state A, When the small hit B is executed, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table 2 (see FIG. 16 (c)) is set as the state B, and when the small hit C and the small hit D are executed, As the state C, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern table 3 (see FIG. 16(d)) is set. In addition, as will be described later, when state B and state C are set, when the number of transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15(a)) is executed, It is configured so that state A is set. That is, after the small win B, the small win C, and the small win D are executed, each variation pattern table is selected only during the set number of transitions, and then switched to the variation pattern table of the state A. is configured as Therefore, the variation pattern table set in state A is set as a variation pattern table for normal times.

FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state transition table 202e. This state transition table 202e is a data table in which periods for which states A to C are set are set, as described above. In state A, an infinite number of times is set. That is, the state A is set until any one of the small hits B to D is executed. In state B, the number of state transitions is set to 40 times. When the small hit B is executed and the state B is set, the state B is set until the number of times of variation of the special symbols (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 40 times, and then the state A is set. In state C, the number of state transitions is set to 30 times. When the small hit C or the small hit D is executed and the state C is set, the state C is set until the number of times of variation of the special design (total of the first special design and the second special design) reaches 30 times. and then state A is set. In this embodiment, when the number of state transitions has elapsed, the state is shifted to state A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to shift to another state. For example, the state C may be changed to the state B, and then the state A may be changed. Further, in the state C, the number of state transitions is the same for the small winnings C and D, but the number of transitions may be different between the small winnings C and D. Furthermore, it may be configured to set a state other than the state C when the small win D is executed. In addition, although the small hit type of the second special symbol is one type, two types are set, one of which has a finite number of transitions (for example, 30 times) and the other has an infinite number of transitions, thereby increasing the probability variation game. Thus, a variation pattern table that facilitates winning of the next small win D can be continuously set, and a state in which the next big win game is likely to be given to the player and a state in which it is difficult to give the next big win can be sorted.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 15(c) and 16. FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202f is set with variation pattern tables exclusively selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. FIG. 15(c) is a hit variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 when the result of determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a selection table 202f; FIG. The winning variation pattern selection table 202f includes, as variation patterns of the first special symbol, special figure 1 big winning variation pattern A (variation time 0.5 seconds), special figure 1 big winning variation pattern B (variation time 3 seconds), special figure 1 A big hit variation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set respectively. For the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern A, "0 to 50" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and for the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern B, the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 51 to 100" is set, and for the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C, "101 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. Thus, when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C configured with a variation time of 4 seconds is most likely to be selected, and the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern A, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern B is set at substantially the same selection ratio. In this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, if the variation of one of them stops first, the variation of the other is forcibly rewritten to the winning lottery result. is forced to stop even in the middle of the variable time. Therefore, even if the variation of the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, if the variation of the first special symbol of the first special symbol is stopped first, the variation of the first special symbol of the jackpot will be the result of the lottery. There is a possibility that the game will be rewritten and forcibly displayed to stop, invalidating the jackpot. However, as will be described later, the shortest variation time for the small hit of the second special symbol is 4 seconds, so the variation of the second special symbol of the small hit, which always starts to fluctuate after the first special symbol, stops first. It is configured so that there is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the fluctuation drawn by the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes invalid.

On the other hand, a special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern D (variation time 0.5 seconds) is set as a variation pattern for the second special symbol jackpot. In this embodiment, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and when the big hit is determined with the second special symbol, the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern D is always selected. It is configured. Since the variation time of this special figure 2 big hit variation pattern D is composed of 0.5 seconds, it is set to a variation time that always stops earlier than the variation of the first special symbol that is a small hit, so the second When a big win is determined with a special pattern, the change of the first special pattern to become a small win is stopped and displayed first, and the problem of invalidating the change of the second special pattern to become a big win can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(a), when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a small hit, special figure 1 small for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol The hit variation pattern selection table 202f will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small per variation pattern selection table 202f. In this embodiment, as a lottery result of the first special symbol, when it is not a big hit, that is, when it is out, it is configured to be determined as a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 16 (a), in the special figure 1 small per variation pattern selection table 202f, as the type of variation pattern to be selected, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern B (Variation time 7 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) are set . For the special figure 1 variation pattern A, "0 to 99" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and for the special figure 1 variation pattern B, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 "100 to 149" is set, for the special figure 1 variation pattern C, "150 to 179" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, for the special figure 1 variation pattern D , "180 to 190" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and for the special figure 1 variation pattern E, "191 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. It is Therefore, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit, it is set so that the special figure 1 variation pattern A of 5 seconds with the shortest variation time is selected with the highest probability of 100/199. is configured as Therefore, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit, a short variation time is likely to be selected. Variation time of 7 seconds Special figure 1 Variation pattern B has a probability of 50/199, variation time of 10 seconds Special figure 1 Variation pattern C has a probability of 30/199, variation time of 15 seconds Special figure 1 The variation pattern D is configured to be selected with a probability of 11/199 and the special figure 1 variation pattern E with a variation time of 20 seconds with a probability of 8/199.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the longer the variation pattern is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol stops first when the second special symbol varies. Therefore, it is configured to be advantageous to the player by executing a small winning of the second special symbol. Therefore, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the longer the fluctuation time, the lower the probability of selection of the fluctuation pattern is set, so that the disadvantage of the game parlor can be suppressed, and the gambling property can be suppressed from becoming too high. .

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of second special symbol variation pattern selection tables, which will be described later, are provided, and the probability (percentage) of each variation pattern being selected in each table is set to be different. Since the switching of the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol can be switched according to the small winning type of the first special symbol, even if the small winning of the first special symbol is disadvantageous to the player, By switching the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol to a variation pattern selection table in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected, a game state advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state that makes it easy to execute a small hit with the second special symbol) and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (a game state that makes it difficult to execute a small hit with the second special symbol) There is an effect that it can be performed by switching the variation pattern selection table of 2 special symbols.

With reference to FIGS. 16(b) to (d), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection tables 1 to 3 for selecting the variation pattern will be described. do. FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1. As shown in FIG. This special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 is a table that is set when the state A is set. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, states A to C are selected and set. As for the states A to C, when the small winning of the first special symbol is executed, the state corresponding to the small winning type is set (see FIG. 14(d)). When the state B and the state C are set, the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively variably displayed (the number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined specified number of times, or a new number of times. It is continuously set until it is set to a different state in the small hit of the first special symbol. When the specified number of times is reached, the state is shifted to state A and set. Therefore, state A is a state that is set at normal time (including the case where the power is turned on after being initialized). As described above, the specified number of times for state B and state C is set by the state transition table 202e shown in FIG. 40 times, and in state C, 30 times as the total number of fluctuations is set as the prescribed number.

Details will be described later, but when the state B is set, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2, and when the state C is set, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 are set respectively. The special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 is set with a higher probability that a short variation pattern is selected than the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1, and the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 The special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 is set with a high probability that a short variation pattern is selected. That is, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table in which the most advantageous game state is set for the player, and the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 is next It is advantageous to the player, and the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 1 becomes the variation pattern selection table that makes the game state most disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 16 (b) to (d), in the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2, special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds ), special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) is special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 to 3 are set.

As shown in FIG. 16 (b), in the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1, "0" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F, and the special figure "1 to 7" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the 2 variation pattern G, and "8 to 27" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. is set, "28 to 47" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J is " 48 to 198” is set. The probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time is selected is 1/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time is selected is 7/199, The probability that a short fluctuation time is selected is set low. On the other hand, the probability of selecting the special figure 2 variation patterns H to J, which is a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, is set higher than other variation pattern selection tables. Therefore, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 is set to have a low probability of selecting a short variation pattern, and is set to a variation pattern selection table disadvantageous to the player (game state disadvantageous to the player) ing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(c), the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 will be described. FIG. 16(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2. As shown in FIG. Special Figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-described state B is set. Since it is only different from the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16(b)) already described above in that the selection ratio of each variation pattern is different, only the selection ratio will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16 (c), in the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 2, "0 to 2" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F, and the special "3 to 17" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the FIG. 2 variation pattern G, and "18 to 47" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. It is set, "48 to 97" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J "98 to 198" is set. The probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time is selected is 3/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time is selected is 15/199. Therefore, compared to the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)), the special figure 2 variation pattern F is set with a selection probability of 3 times, and the special figure 2 variation pattern G is about 2 It is set with a double selection probability. Therefore, since the probability of selecting a variation pattern with a short variation time is high, the variation pattern in which the variation of the second special symbol stops before the variation of the first special symbol is easily selected, which is advantageous to the player. A small hit of the second special symbol is set to be easily executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16(d), the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 will be described. FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3. As shown in FIG. Special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-described state C is set. With the special figure 2 per variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)) and the special figure 2 per variation pattern selection table 2 (see FIG. 16 (c)), the selection ratio of each variation pattern is Since they are different only in different points, only the selection ratio will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 16 (d), in the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 3, "0 to 7" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F, and the special "8 to 48" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the FIG. 2 variation pattern G, and "49 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. It is set, "99 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J It is not set, that is, the special figure 2 variation pattern J is configured not to be selected. The probability that Special Figure 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time is selected is 8/199, and the probability that Special Figure 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time is selected is 41/199. Therefore, compared to the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16 (b)), the special figure 2 variation pattern F is set with a selection probability of 8 times, and the special figure 2 variation pattern G is about 6 It is set with a double selection probability. Therefore, since the probability of selecting a variation pattern with a short variation time is high, the variation pattern in which the variation of the second special symbol stops before the variation of the first special symbol is easily selected, which is advantageous to the player. A small hit of the second special symbol is set to be easily executed. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 3 is configured so that the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected.

Here, the special figure 2 small per variation pattern J (19 seconds) has already been described with reference to FIG. 18, the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the variation time of the first special symbol is 20 seconds special figure 1 variation pattern E (selection probability 8/199) is selected, the second special symbol can be stopped first, and the probability that the second special symbol stops first is set extremely low. Therefore, in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3, since it is configured so that the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected, it is set more advantageously for the player.

Thus, in this embodiment, by varying the probability that the variation time of the second special symbol is selected, it is set to switch between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, referring to FIGS. 17 and 18, the combination of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) with the variation pattern stops the variation of the second special symbol first. A combination of fluctuation patterns will be described. FIG. 17 is a quick reference table showing a combination of variation patterns in which the second special symbol stops first, and FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the stop timing of each variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. be.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, the case where the variable display periods of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may overlap will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, the first special symbol is always varied. The game ball entering the first winning hole 64a, which triggers the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, passes through the through gate 67 about 0.2 seconds before entering the first winning hole 64a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the normal pattern starts to change 0.2 seconds before the ball enters the first winning hole 64a (special figure 1 winning). The variation pattern selected for the determination result of the small hit of the first special symbol is the special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated as "A"), the special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B" ), Special Figure 1 variation pattern C (abbreviated as "C"), Special Figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as "D"), Special Figure 1 variation pattern E ("E" and are omitted), and each variation period is shown in the timing chart of FIG. 18(a).

As the fluctuation time of the normal design, two types of 0.5 seconds and 1 second are set, and the time chart of each fluctuation period of the second special design when the fluctuation time of the normal design is 0.5 seconds. FIG. 18(b) shows a time chart of each variation period of the second special symbol when the normal symbol variation time is 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, the normal symbol fluctuation ends 0.3 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, In the case of winning the normal pattern, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in an open state for 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 64b is set for 0.5 seconds. . That is, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is a period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate. In FIG. 18(b), as an example in which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate the earliest, the timing when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and wins in the second winning opening 64b 0.3 seconds later and starts to fluctuate. showed the chart. The variation pattern when it is determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol is, as shown in FIG. (abbreviated as "G"), special figure 2 variation pattern H (abbreviated as "H"), special figure 2 variation pattern I (abbreviated as "I"), special figure 2 variation pattern There are five types of J (abbreviated as "J"), and the fluctuation end timing is shown for each fluctuation pattern.

In the case of special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), even if special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) with the shortest variation time of the first special symbol is executed, the special The variation time of the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends 0.7 seconds earlier than the variation time of FIG. 1 variation pattern A ends. From this, even if any variation pattern is executed in the first special symbol, the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends first, and the small hit of the second special symbol is performed (see FIG. 17 (a) ). Also, as the second special symbol variation possible period, there is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. 0.2 seconds earlier special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F will be stopped. Therefore, when the normal symbol variation time is 0.5 seconds and the special figure 2 variation pattern F is selected, the variation of the second special symbol always stops earlier than the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A small prize advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the execution of the special figure 2 variation pattern F can be made an advantageous state for the player.

Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern G (6 seconds of variation time) stops earlier than 0.7 seconds earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern B (7 seconds of variation time). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern B, the special figure 1 variation pattern C, the special figure 1 variation pattern D, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E, the variation pattern to be stopped first Become. Special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops earlier than 0.7 seconds earlier than special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), it becomes a variation pattern that stops first with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern C, the special figure 1 variation pattern D, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops earlier than 0.7 seconds earlier than special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), the variation pattern stops earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern D and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special Figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops earlier than 0.7 seconds earlier than Special Figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), only for the special figure 1 variation pattern E, it becomes a variation pattern that stops first. As described above, the state shown in FIG. 17(a) does not change even if the ball is entered into the second winning hole 64b at the late timing (after 0.5 seconds). Therefore, when the normal pattern fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, if the ball is entered during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state, the player is not disadvantaged by the timing of entering the ball. It is

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(c), the case where the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second will be described. When the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the normal electric accessory 64b1 becomes an open state 1.3 seconds after the start of variation of the first special symbol shown in FIG. is a hit). Therefore, when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the period from 1.3 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the start of variation of the first special symbol is the period during which the second winning opening 64b can be won. . In FIG. 18(c), when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the second winning opening 64b is 1.3 seconds after the start of variation of the first special symbol, which is the timing at which the second special symbol starts to vary the earliest. A timing chart of a small hit variation pattern of each second special symbol when winning is shown.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), in the case of special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern A with the shortest variation time of the first special symbol (variation time 5 seconds) Even if is being executed, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends 0.3 seconds later than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation pattern A ends. From this, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern A will be stopped first, and at that timing, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F will be rewritten to the off and will be forcibly stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends first with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern B to the special figure 1 variation pattern E, and the small hit of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, although there is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. 18(c) as the period during which the second special symbol can be varied, even if the variation starts after the slowest 0.5 seconds, each of the above-described first special symbols The relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop timing remains unchanged. Therefore, when the variation time of the normal design is 1 second, if the special figure 1 variation pattern BE is executed, the special figure 2 variation pattern F is executed is advantageous to the player Become.

Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than the special figure 1 variation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), it becomes a variation pattern that stops first with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern C, the special figure 1 variation pattern D, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern D and the special figure 1 variation pattern E, it becomes a variation pattern that stops first. Special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), only the special figure 1 variation pattern E becomes a variation pattern that stops first. Special figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), it is a variation pattern that cannot be stopped earlier than all variation patterns of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the variation pattern is such that the small hit of the first special symbol is always executed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a summary will also be described for the variation stop timing when the small hit variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol vary simultaneously. In FIG. 17(a), when the variation pattern of the normal symbol having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected after passing through the through gate 67, the variation opens the normal electric accessory 64b1, When it is possible to stop the second special symbol first in combination with the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol and the variation pattern made in the second special symbol when winning the second prize opening 64b. is indicated by "○", and when the combination in which the first special symbol is stopped first (the combination in which the second special symbol cannot be stopped first) is indicated by "x".

When the special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated and indicated by the symbol "A") is selected in the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 variation pattern F ( Only when abbreviated and indicated by the symbol "F") is selected, the second special symbol can be stopped first. When the other special figure 2 fluctuation patterns G to J are selected, the first special symbol is stopped first, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped as being forced out.

Similarly, in the special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B" and symbolized) in the first special design, in the special figure 2 variation pattern F and the special figure 2 variation pattern G, the special figure 1 variation pattern C (abbreviated as "C" and symbolized), special figure 2 variation pattern F ~ H, special figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as "D" and symbolized), special figure 2 variation pattern F ~ I, in the special figure 1 variation pattern E (abbreviated and indicated by the symbol "E"), the special figure 2 variation pattern F to J (that is, the second special variation pattern that becomes a small hit of all the second special symbols symbol can be stopped first), the second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected in the first special symbol, it is most advantageous to the player, and by winning the second winning opening 64b, a small win is executed in the second special symbol. (If the lottery result is a small hit). Although omitted in this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected, the player is notified to prompt the player to win a prize to the second winning port 64b by voice or the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 , by notifying with a lamp or the like, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to win a prize through the second prize winning port 64b.

FIG. 17(b) is a quick view showing a combination of variation patterns in which the second special symbol is stopped first when 1 second is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol in relation to FIG. 17(a). display. As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the special figure 1 variation pattern A in the first special symbol (abbreviated as "A" and indicated by the symbol), for all the small hit variation patterns of the second special symbol, The small hit of the first special symbol is executed without the second special symbol stopping first.

In the first special pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B" and indicated by the symbol), the special figure 2 variation pattern F, the special figure 1 variation pattern C (abbreviated as "C" and indicated by the symbol) ), special figure 2 variation pattern F and special figure 2 variation pattern G, special figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as "D" symbol), special figure 2 variation pattern F ~ H, special figure 1 In the variation pattern E (abbreviated and indicated by the symbol "E"), the second special symbol stops first in the special figure 2 variation pattern F to I (that is, the variation pattern that becomes the small hit of all the second special symbols possible), the second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, if 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the period during which the second winning opening 64b can be won is delayed, so the second special symbols can be stopped earlier than in the case of 0.5 seconds. The number of possible combinations is reduced, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, not only the combination of the variation type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but also the variation pattern type of the normal symbol can vary the player's disadvantage and advantage. When 0.5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the normal pattern, the type of variation start sound of the normal pattern is varied, or the third pattern display device 81 displays an effect suggesting the variation type of the Futsu pattern. By doing so, it may be configured to suggest that the player is in an advantageous state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 13) of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g. This normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g is for determining the normal pattern fluctuation time (dynamic display period) based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. is a selection table of In this embodiment, as the variation pattern of the normal symbol to be selected, the normal pattern variation pattern A and the normal pattern variation pattern B are set respectively. Ordinary figure fluctuation pattern A is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern B is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms (1 second). The general pattern fluctuation pattern A is set to "0 to 29" as the determination value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern B is set to "30 to 198" as the determination value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. is set. In this way, as the variation time of the normal symbol, the variation time of 1 second is set to be more easily selected than the variation time of 0.5 seconds.

Here, in the present embodiment, the length of the variation time of the normal symbols gives different advantages and disadvantages to the player. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is detected by the detection switch in the first winning opening 64a after 0.2 seconds, and the variation of the first special symbol is started. Here, since the second special symbol stops earlier than the first special symbol, the small winning D is likely to be executed, so the second winning opening 64b at an earlier timing after the first special symbol starts to change. It is advantageous for the player to win the game ball at the time. Therefore, the shorter normal pattern fluctuation time is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, since the normal pattern fluctuation pattern A (0.5 second fluctuation) is set to be less likely to be selected than the normal pattern fluctuation pattern B (1 second), it is configured to suppress the gambling property.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table is constant, but not limited to that, it is configured to switch depending on when a small hit is executed or when a big hit game is executed. may By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch to a state advantageous to the player by switching to the regular pattern variation pattern table in which the variation time shorter than the normal time is easily selected.

The small winning scenario table 202h (see FIG. 13) is a data table for executing opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 65 when a small winning game is executed. In this small winning scenario table 202h, each small winning scenario table is set corresponding to each small winning type. The pointers are set in chronological order, and are updated one by one as time elapses. Each control of the first variable winning device 65 set by the pointer is executed. Thereby, even when opening control etc. differ for every small hit classification, control can be performed easily.

The jackpot scenario table 202i (see FIG. 13) will be described. The jackpot scenario table 202i is a scenario table that is set when a jackpot game is executed, and is a data table that defines the control details of the second variable prize winning device 650 . As in the small winning scenario table 202i, the control contents of the second variable winning device 650 are defined for each pointer set in chronological order, and the pointer is updated by one with the passage of time, and the updated pointer Control is executed according to the specified control contents.

The miscellaneous data table 202z is set with various data, tables, etc. necessary for other games, but since they are well-known contents unrelated to the contents of the present invention, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19 . FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol execution area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a general pattern execution area 203c, a first winning counter 203d1, a second winning counter 203d2, a V winning flag 203e, and a jackpot. Flag 203f, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h, special figure 1 small hit flag 203i, special figure 2 small hit flag 203j, state counter 203k, state setting area 203m, other memory area 203z is doing.

The first special symbol execution area 203a is composed of one execution area as shown in FIG. In the first special symbol execution area 203a, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64a (start winning), the first special symbol is stopped (change is finished), not during the small winning game or the big winning game. state), the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small per type counter C4 obtained based on the winning are stored respectively. . After that, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes each process for starting the variation of the first special symbol.

The second special symbol execution area 203b is different from the first special symbol execution area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for the winning to the second winning opening 64b are respectively stored. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The general pattern execution area 203c has one execution area like the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second special symbol execution area 203b. The normal pattern execution area 203c stores the values of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, the normal symbol is not in the winning game, and the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol variation is finished) ), the values of the second per random number counter C4 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the reservation first area of the normal pattern execution area 203c is the normal pattern execution area. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is shifted (moved) to 203c and stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c, determination such as lottery for winning normal symbols is performed. After that, based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 that has been acquired, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is selected, and the normal pattern fluctuation is executed.

The first winning counter 203d1 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 in one round (open state) in the small winning game (that is, the number of balls entering the second variable winning device 650). number of game balls hit), the second prize winning counter 203d2 counts the number of game balls that have won the first specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the first variable prize winning device It is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered 65). Specifically, when the game ball passes through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 8) provided in the first variable winning device 65 and is detected by the detection switch, the second winning counter 203d2 is incremented by one. The first winning counter 203d1 is incremented by 1 and updated based on the passage of the game ball being detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 650. be done. On the other hand, the value of the first winning counter 203d1 determines whether or not the number of winnings of the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches the discharged number when one round is completed. After that, it is reset to the initial value "0". Also, the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to the initial value of "0" based on the end of one round. The value of the winning number counter 203d is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The big hit flag 203e is a flag indicating that the result of determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. This jackpot flag 203e is configured to be able to identify whether it is the jackpot determination of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is set to ON when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is stopped for the second special symbol (see S913 in FIG. 39 and S941 in FIG. 40(b)). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203g is on during variation of the first special symbol, it is set to off (S611 in FIG. 34). As a result, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the variation of the second special symbol's big win or small win stops first.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the second special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON when the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is stopped for the second special symbol (see S603 in FIG. 33 and S621 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203h is on during variation of the second special symbol, it is set to off (S931 in FIG. 40(a)). As a result, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing at which the variation of the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol stops first.

The state counter 203k is a counter for counting the prescribed number of times of state B or state C in which special figure 2 per variation pattern 2 or special figure 2 per variation pattern 3 is selected. In this embodiment, as described above, when the small winning B or the small winning C of the first special symbol and the small winning D of the second special symbol are won, the small winning variation pattern table of the second special symbol is prepared after that. It is set to switch to a predetermined variation pattern table only a specified number of times. The specified number of times defines the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol have changed, and when the specified number of times is reached, the state is shifted to the state A, and a variation pattern table corresponding to the state A is set. . When the small winning of the first special symbol and the small winning of the second special symbol are finished, the corresponding states are set in the state counter 203k, and the value of the state counter corresponding to the set state is set. (S1807, S1809 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to fluctuate respectively, they are decremented by one and updated (S305 in FIG. 30, S705 in FIG. 36).

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol reservation lamp 84, a solenoid for opening and closing the first specific winning port 65a, A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing plate forward of the second specific winning opening 650a and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to them through the port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 42) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and gives instructions to the display control device 114 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 20, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a fusion effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs required for game control.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a data table in which variation pattern data for displaying variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is stored. In this embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 222a includes a variation display pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 shown in FIG. is stored. As the variable display pattern, a pattern is set in which the "○" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately displayed according to the variable time period determined by the main controller 110. FIG.

The fusion effect selection table 222b, as shown in FIG. 20(b), is composed of a winning fusion effect selection table 222b1, a losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, a preparing effect selection table 222b3, and a special effect selection table 222b4. This is a selection table for selecting a fusion effect to be displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the display device 81. FIG. The winning fusion effect and the losing fusion effect are fusion effects displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 during the period when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time. Specifically, in the win fusion effect, the display mode in which the rabbit and the tortoise start a competition shown in FIG. After that, it consists of a blackout production. The losing fusion effect differs from the winning fusion effect in that the rabbit wins. The victory of the tortoise informs that the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol and that the small win D of the second special symbol is executed. On the other hand, when the rabbit wins, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped first, and one of the small wins A to C of the first special symbol is executed.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol always starts to fluctuate before the second special symbol (see FIG. 4(a)). Here, for the player, even if the first special symbol is stopped first and the small winning of the first special symbol is executed, the profit obtained by the player is a small amount of balls (prize balls) or the first prize. The change pattern table of the 2 special symbols is switched, etc., which does not directly trigger the granting of a big win, and is set disadvantageously compared to the small win of the 2nd special symbol. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the second special symbol starting to fluctuate.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the third symbols (symbols displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2) showing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are indicated by "○", The display area was further reduced by the "x" display, and placed at the lower left and right ends of the display area so as not to stand out. On the other hand, the effect display area Ds3 is set larger than the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 so as to be conspicuous to the player. Therefore, the player plays the game mainly looking at the effect display area Ds3.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the variation of the second special symbol is started and the variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed simultaneously, the effect display area Ds3 shown in FIG. The race between the rabbit and the tortoise shown in FIG. The player is given a chance to win a V prize, which is advantageous to the player when the turtle wins, by displaying "Chance if the turtle wins the race!" It has been reported that In addition, in this embodiment, a small winning game is executed in which a game ball can pass through the V winning prize switch 65e3 by executing the small winning D of the second special symbol. Since the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the player is given the right to start the big win game after the small win game, so the execution of the small win D gives an advantageous condition for the player. It is assumed that

In the fusion effect, when the first special pattern stops first, a effect is executed in which the rabbit reaches the finish line before the turtle (see FIG. 5(a)), and when the second special pattern stops first. , an effect is executed in which the turtle reaches the goal ahead of the rabbit (see FIG. 5(b)). After that, the first special symbol is stopped first, and after displaying the fusion effect (see FIG. 5(a)) in which the rabbit reaches the goal ahead of the turtle, the message "Unfortunately!!" Normal chance!" is displayed. When the display mode of this fusion effect is displayed, the fluctuation time of the first special design passes and stops (stops at the combination of "○ ×" indicating a small hit), and at that timing the second special design is, In the middle of the variable time, the game is forcibly stopped by a symbol indicating a failure (stop with a combination of "xx"). In addition, when the display mode of the fusion effect of FIG. 6(a) is displayed, the player has a chance to win a V prize (that is, the right to execute the jackpot game). However, it can be recognized that a ball can be obtained in a small winning game. Therefore, the player prepares for a game in which a game ball is made to enter the first variable winning device 650 by a game method in which the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the fusion effect in which the turtle wins the race is displayed, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol elapses, and the symbol indicating the small win ("○×" At that timing, the first special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with a pattern (stop pattern of the combination of 'xx') indicating the deviation in the middle of the fluctuation time.例文帳に追加After that, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the characters "Congratulations! V winning chance!" be. Therefore, the player can prepare for a game aiming at winning a V prize by playing a right-handed game. Thus, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. Then, it can be determined whether or not a small winning game advantageous to the player is started by the content of the fusion performance, and the game can be played more easily.

It should be noted that the above-described fusion effect in which the rabbit and turtle race is performed is executed when the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both small hits. If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation display of the fusion effect is not started, and the character "big hit" is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern has passed. appears suddenly. Also, after the first special symbol fluctuates (the result of the judgment is a small hit), if the second special symbol does not start to fluctuate during the fluctuation period of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display of the fusion effect is not started. , a display mode indicating that a small winning game of the first special symbol shown in FIG. be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the fusion effect is not started, but not limited to that, the first special symbol At the timing when the fluctuation is started, the fluctuation of the fusion effect may be started (start of the rabbit and tortoise race). In this case, at the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, based on the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol whose fluctuation stops first, the control for resetting the fusion effect is set. In addition, in the present embodiment, only when the second special symbol stops first (the result of the determination is a small hit), the turtle is configured to execute the victory effect in the fusion effect, but not limited to that, the second special symbol A performance lottery is executed with a predetermined probability at the start of the variation of the special pattern, and whether the turtle wins or the rabbit wins is determined based on the lottery result. In this case, when the second special symbol is a combination of variation patterns that stop first (the result of the judgment is a small hit), the execution probability of the fusion effect that the turtle wins is set high, and the first special symbol In the case of a combination of variation patterns in which the symbols stop first (the result of the judgment is a small hit), the execution probability of the fusion effect in which the rabbit wins is set high. When the rabbit wins or the turtle wins, the display modes shown in FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are not displayed. A performance is executed to make the player think that there is a possibility of the following in the small winning game. Here, if the rabbit wins, the possibility of winning the V prize is low, and if the tortoise wins, the possibility of winning the V prize is high. Even during the small winning game, the game can be played with the expectation of the V winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, in the modified example described above, the fusion effect is started from the start of the variation of the second special symbol, but the fusion effect may be started from the start of the variation of the first special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the player is notified of the determination result between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner by the fusion effect, but the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is not limited to this. (For example, it consists of three rows of pattern rows, and the judgment result is notified by the combination of the patterns), and the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern (for example, consists of three rows of pattern rows, and the combination of the patterns (notifies the determination result), and the game may be performed in anticipation that the third symbol indicating a small hit with the second special symbol will be displayed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variably displayed.

The preparation effect selected from the preparation effect selection table 222b3 is the display mode before the start of the competition between the rabbit and the turtle shown in FIG. 4(a). In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and when the variable display of only the first special symbol is started, the preparation effect is selected and displayed. .

The special effect selection table 222b4 is a table in which a special effect to be selected when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate before the first special symbol is set. In this special effect, the characters "abnormal variation" are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an error comment. As a result, it is possible to quickly notify that a normal prize winning or game is not being played.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20(c). As shown in FIG. 20(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 1 Stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f, production counter 223g, slave state setting area 223h, special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i, special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j, fusion production start flag 223k, etc. At least a memory area 223z is provided.

The command storage area 223a is a storage area for temporarily storing commands output to the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 and each control device.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and one execution area corresponding to the second special symbol. Information such as the variation pattern output from the main controller 110 when the second special symbol starts to vary, and the success/failure determination result is stored.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command for the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2301 in FIG. 54), and the first special in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the variable display of symbols is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern for the first special symbol indicated by this display variation pattern command causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol. Display control of the variable effect is started so as to be performed.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2401 in FIG. 55), and the second special in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the variable display of symbols is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. The display variation pattern command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the variation pattern command for the first special symbol described above.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the special figure 1 stop type command corresponding to the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol display It is turned off when the stop type of the first special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. In the present embodiment, the stop mode of the display displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the special figure 2 stop type command corresponding to the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol display It is turned off when the stop type of the second special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. In the present embodiment, the stop mode of the display displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The sub-state setting area 223h is a storage area for storing state information (one of states A to states A to C) set by the main controller 110. FIG. When a state command output from main controller 110 (S308 in FIG. 30, S708 in FIG. 36, S1808 in FIG. 49) is received, state information indicated by the state command is stored in sub-state setting area 223h. (S2210 in FIG. 53). By configuring in this manner, the same state can be set by the sound lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the state set by the main controller 110 .

The special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol. When the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received, the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i sets the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command as the remaining variation time (see S2310 in FIG. 54). When the remaining variation time is set in the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i (special figure 1 remaining variation time > 0), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed time for each execution cycle of the main process (see FIG. 52) ( In this embodiment, 1) is subtracted and updated (see S2702 in FIG. 58). In addition, this special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is set to 0 in the initial state.

The special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the variation time of the second special symbol. This special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j determines the remaining variation time (value of special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i) of the first special symbol during variation when receiving the special figure 2 variation pattern command. , When the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the selected second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is set to the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j. set. On the other hand, when the variation time of the selected second special symbol is shorter than the remaining variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time of the selected second special symbol is set in the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j. By configuring in this way, even when the small winning variation of the second special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped when the small winning of the first special symbol is executed, the accurate second special symbol can be obtained. Residual fluctuation time can be set. In addition, the value of this special figure 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j is used to determine the fluctuation time of the fusion production when selecting the fusion production. Also in this case, since the correct remaining variation time for the second special symbol to stop varying is set in the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j, the fusion effect is stopped by the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively. It is possible to set the fusion effect of the variable time according to the timing.

The fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is time to start the fusion effect. This fusion effect start flag 223k receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command for the second special symbol, and is set to ON when the lottery result is a small hit (S2405 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the fusion effect command for display indicating the display mode (fusion effect pattern) of the selected fusion effect is set, it is set to OFF (S2609 in FIG. 57). It should be noted that this fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag that is set to OFF in initial settings such as when the power is turned on.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 81) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

Thus, in this embodiment, based on the reception of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and the second special symbol output from the main controller 110, each third symbol is variably displayed, A fusion performance is selected and executed in accordance with the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate and in accordance with the period until the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating. As a result, the small hit of the present embodiment is drawn with a high probability (398/399 for both the first special pattern and the second special pattern), and the small prize of the first special pattern is frequently executed. Even if there is, by displaying the fusion effect, the player can determine whether or not it is time to play the game with anticipation, and the game can be played with sharpness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the effect indicating that the small winning of the first special symbol is performed is frequently performed, and it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored.

Further, the game property of the present embodiment is that when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed as a result of the small winning lottery, the small winning of the special symbol that stops after the fluctuation time passes first. is executed. The small winning of the second special pattern is set to be more advantageous than the small winning of the first special pattern, and the variation of the second special pattern stops earlier than the first special pattern, which is advantageous to the player. A state (a state in which a second special symbol is executed) can be provided. However, it is difficult to identify from the third symbol whether the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first, and the interest in the game is also reduced. In this embodiment, the fluctuation of the fusion effect is started in accordance with the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol, and whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped first is notified by the race of the rabbit and the turtle. did. By doing so, the player simultaneously monitors the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol, and can see the fusion performance without discriminating the type of the special symbol to be stopped first. , you can learn about the special symbols that stop first. Therefore, even if the game is complicated, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner with a simple presentation.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed after the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 59) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 27) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 61(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 59).

The power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "O" and "X" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, an image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variation performance in the case of ``a special pattern jackpot'', and an image is displayed for a fixed period after the suspension of the variation performance in the case of ``out of the special pattern''.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entry is detected in the first ball entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the area 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. directed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64a, the variation performance is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation performance is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the through gate 67, so the chances of lottery of the normal pattern are increased and the chance of winning the normal pattern is also increased. As a result, there are more chances that the electric accessory will be released as a jackpot of normal symbols, so that the ball will easily enter the second winning hole 64b, and the special symbol lottery will be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64a is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64a. If it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information change over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also describes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 25) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The created configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. .

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2805 in FIG. 59). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4705 in FIG. 72(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3101 in FIG. 61B). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61B) and the simple display setting process (see S3108 in FIG. 61(b) S3109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 72(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 72(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) is executed to transfer the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 27) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 61(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 69) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 27), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed (Fig. 61(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4307 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 73). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 73). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4902 in FIG. 74).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 61B) is executed (see S4902 in FIG. 74).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 50. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 299, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). The details of this special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the special symbol variation processing, the processing for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the normal symbol variation processing for performing the processing associated with the ball passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are performed. (S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various judgments and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determined variation display is performed by predetermined control. In this mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to simultaneously perform variable display, or control is executed to stop display in a display mode showing the determination result. The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 29, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of a big hit game or a small hit game (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot or small hit is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the big hit or the small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed (S202). When it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), a first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), when the prescribed variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has passed, the processing of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. be done. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), the variation of the second special symbol is stopped in the symbol indicating the big win (or small win), and the big win game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during variable display is executed. It should be noted that, when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped with a symbol indicating a big win (or a small win), the variation of the first special symbol being displayed may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot, an extremely short variation time is selected so as not to be forcibly stopped due to the variation of the other. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the judgment of a big win from being forcibly stopped and displayed with the result of the lottery that is lost due to the forced stop. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), a process related to the start of variation of the first special symbol is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) or the second special symbol variation stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S205: Yes), a second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) will be described later in detail, but similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has passed , the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. The details of this second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), the process necessary to start the variation of the second special symbol is executed. This second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S301). If there is no winning in the first winning opening 64a (S301: No), this process is terminated. If there is a winning in the first winning opening 64a (S301: Yes), next, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. (S302).

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S303). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) will be described later in detail, but based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a, the set game state Judgment of a big hit, a small hit, etc. is executed based on. The details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S304). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), the variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. A process is performed to select based on each counter value. The details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the first symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), 1 is subtracted from the value of the state counter 203k (S305), and it is determined whether the value of the state counter 203k is greater than 0 (S306). If the value of the state counter 203k is greater than 0 (S306: Yes), this process is terminated. If the value of the state counter 203k is 0 (S306: No), then state A is set in the state setting area 203m (S307), a state command indicating state A is set (S308), and then this process is executed. exit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the value of the state counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and when the state counter 203k becomes 0, the state A, which is the initial state (normal state), is set. be done. As a result, when state B or state C is set, the value of the state counter becomes 0, so that state A is automatically set. Thus, by shifting the state according to the number of times of variation of the special symbols and switching the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol, it is possible to give the player an advantageous state for a certain period of time by easy control. can do.

Next, referring to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a is obtained (S401). Next, based on the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 14(a)), the lottery result is acquired based on whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value (S402). Here, as shown in FIG. 14(a), "399" is set as the big hit determination value with respect to the value of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 398" is set as the small hit determination value. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, all non-big hits are determined to be small hits.

It is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S403), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the jackpot flag 203f is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S404). , The special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is set to the big hit (S405), and the first special symbol big hit displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is based on the value of the acquired winning type counter. A pattern is set (S406), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S403, the lottery result is not a big hit, that is, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S403: No), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203i is set to ON (S407), and the special figure 1 The lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is set to a small hit (S408), the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and then this process is executed. finish.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S501), and then in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), the first It is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big win, that is, whether or not the big win flag is set to ON for the first special symbol (S502).

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S502: Yes), a jackpot variation pattern is selected based on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 (S503). , S505. In the process of S503, based on the hit variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 15 (c)) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, select one of the special figure 1 jackpot variation patterns A to C do.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (that is, the big hit flag 203f for the first special symbol is off) (S502: No), the acquired variation type counter Based on the value of CS1, a small hit variation pattern is selected from the set small hit variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 16(a)) (S504), and then the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated that indicates the selected variation pattern (S505), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the jackpot flag 203f is turned on for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set (S602). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203f is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON (S603). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is turned on is set.

After completing the processing of S603, the special figure 1 stop classification command indicating the set stop classification is set (S604). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, a special figure 1 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the first special symbol is set (S606). Then, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the jackpot flag 203f is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S602: No), the special figure 1 small hit stop process is executed (S610), and this process ends as it is. do. In this special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610), the process regarding the stop of the 1st special design corresponding to the small hit of the determination result is performed. In addition, this special figure 1 small hit stop processing (S610) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203g is on. Determine (S608). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is off in the process of S608 (S608: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203g is ON in the process of S608 (S608: Yes), the second special symbol is stopped by a big hit or a small hit, so the second special symbol being executed In order to stop the variation based on the 1 special symbol, a special figure 1 forced stop process is executed (S609). The details of this special figure 1 forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S204), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol during variable display has passed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game A process (S603 to S609 or S612) for stopping the variable display is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is a symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) and the variation is stopped, and the big win game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable display is performed. A process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big win (or small win) (S610: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the variable display is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, special figure 1 forced stop processing (S609), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 33, S204), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 forced stop processing (S609).

In the special figure 1 forced stop process (FIG. 34, S609), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is set to off (S611), then the special figure 1 fluctuation indicating the off of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g A stop command is set (S612). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to be off (S613), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped by the off symbol (S614), and the special figure 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is set (S615), the process ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is turned on (the timing at which the fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit with the second special symbol stops), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has not yet reached. Even if it has passed, it is forcibly stopped as a result of the determination that it is out of line. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is only necessary to execute a small win or a big win for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special figure 1 small hit stop process (S610) which is one process of 1st special symbol fluctuation|variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204) is demonstrated. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 small per stop process (S610).

In the special figure 1 small per stop process (FIG. 35, S610), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON (S621), then the special figure 2 indicating the ON of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h A fluctuation stop command is set (S622). Then, a small winning scenario corresponding to the selected small winning type is set (S623), a confirmation command of the first special design is set (S624), and the first special design of the first design display device 37 changes. After stopping (S625), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. 36 to 38 are flow charts showing this second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 36, S206), the process for the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol in contrast to the above-described first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203). , The only difference is that the processing for the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol, and since the same processing is executed for the other processing, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 36, S206), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703).

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37, S703) differs from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) in the following points. In the processing of S801 corresponding to the processing of S401, the first special design execution area 203a is changed to the second special design execution area 203b, and in each processing of S804 to S809 corresponding to each processing of S404 to S409 , Each differs in that special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to special figure 2 (second special symbol). Since the other points are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 38, S704) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304) in the following points. In the process of S902 corresponding to the process of S502, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), S503 to S505 In each process of S903 to S905 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (first special symbol variation pattern command) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207). The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204) in the following points. In the process of S912 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2", and in the process of S913 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The point that the fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag, the process of S1914 corresponding to the process of S604, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command, S608 In the process of S918 corresponding to the process, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the process of S917 corresponding to the process of S607, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is the second 920 corresponding to the processing of S610, the point of changing to the special symbol fluctuation stop, the processing of S919 corresponding to the processing of S609, the point of changing the special figure 1 forced stop processing to the special figure 2 forced stop processing, and the processing of S610 In the process, the special figure 1 small per stop process is changed to the special figure 2 small per stop process, respectively. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

In addition, the special figure 2 forced stop processing (see S919 of FIG. 39, FIG. 40(a)) executed in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 39), and the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 39 See) Special figure 2 small per stop processing (see S920 in FIG. 39, see FIG. 40 (b)) is similarly the above-mentioned special figure 1 forced stop processing (see FIG. 34) and special figure 1 small per Since the same processing as the stop processing (see FIG. 35) is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description is omitted.

Thus, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variably displayed. can be made Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can play the game while concentrating on the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big win or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1001). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display device (not shown) displays the winning to when the electric accessory 632 is controlled to open and close. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is being variably displayed (S1002). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1011 ). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1009, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

In the process of S1011, if the variation time has not passed (S1011: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols displayed in a variable manner has passed (S1011: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1012). In the processing of S1012, if the lottery of normal symbols is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1007, the second symbol display device (not shown) stops the "○" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the processing of S1010, the second symbol display device (not shown) displays the "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set so that it is stopped (lighted up). When the stop display is set by the process of S1012, the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol display mode set by the process of S1007 and the process of S1009. Stopped display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1013). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1013: Yes), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1014). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a loss (S1013: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S1003). When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S1003: No), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 are stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c. (S1004). The second hit random number value obtained based on the normal figure hit random number table 202b is executed to determine whether it is right or wrong (S1005). It is determined whether or not the lottery result of S1005 is winning (S1006). When it is determined that the lottery result of S1005 is winning (S1006: Yes), the display mode for winning is set (S1007). The opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1008). After that, the variation time of the second symbol is selected based on the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S1004 and the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g (S1009). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1006, when it is determined that the second symbol is out, the display mode at the time of the out is set (S1010), and after that, after executing the process of S1009, this process is finished.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1101), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 43), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1201). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1202). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1203).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1204), and if it is turned on (S1204: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205). (S1205: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1512.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1206). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data has been destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1212, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1212). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1213, S1514).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall opens, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed during startup processing, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1213, S1214).

Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1213, S1214) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1213, S1214), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1213), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1214). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1210.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1205: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is If it is normal (S1207: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1208). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S1209), and the process proceeds to S1210. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1210). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1211). Then, the process proceeds to main processing (S1600), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1600). This main process (see FIG. 44) is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 44), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1301).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 .

When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303). A jackpot control process is executed (S1304). Details of this jackpot control process (S1304) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but a process of setting the operation of the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S1304) is executed, the small hit control process (S1305) is executed. In this small winning control process (S1305), the process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 in the small winning game is executed. This small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric accessary product opening/closing process is executed (S1306). In this electric accessory opening/closing process (S1306), the opening/closing process of the normal electric accessory 64b1 is executed. Thereafter, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S3607).

Next, display control processing of the second pattern (for example, the pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display device 83 is executed (S1308). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Then, the variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol occurs, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1309). ), if the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process proceeds to S1310, and the above-described processes after S1301 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous main process (S1310: No), the second main process is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1311). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1301 (S1312).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1301 to S1308 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and displayed as a variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1308, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1309: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 42 has been executed, so the power-off process from S1313 onwards is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1313), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1314). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1315), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1316), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1319 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1301 to S1308, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1311 and S1312 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1251. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1301. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1304). This jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1621). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the pointer of the jackpot scenario that is set is updated (S1402). Here, in the jackpot scenario, processes specified for pointers updated in chronological order are respectively set, and processes necessary for the jackpot game are set in chronological order.

It is determined whether or not the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the updated pointer is the timing indicating the start of the jackpot game (S1403). Jackpot Start is data that is set the first time the pointer is updated after the jackpot scenario is set. When it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1403: Yes), an opening command is set (S1404). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1403, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the big win (S1403: No), it is determined whether data indicating that it is time to start a new round is set (S1405). When it is determined that the data indicating the start of a new round is set (S1405: Yes), the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1406). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1405: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407). When it is determined that the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407: Yes), the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1408). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1407 that the data does not indicate the end timing of the round (S1407: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the timing of the ending (S1409). When it is determined that the data indicates the start timing of the ending (S1409: Yes), a display command indicating the display mode of the ending is set (S1410), the set jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that the data does not indicate the timing of starting the ending (S1409: No), the first winning process is executed (S1412).

Here, referring to FIG. 46, the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 45, S1304) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first winning process (S1412). In this first winning process (S1412), the number of balls entered by the second variable winning device 650 during the round is counted, and the corresponding control logic is executed.

In the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), first, it is determined whether the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the pointer corresponds to the round period (S1501). If it is determined that it is not during the round period (S1501: No), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1502). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during the round period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650a (S1503). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650a (S1503: Yes), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is updated by adding 1 (S1504). It is determined whether the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1505). If it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is less than the upper limit (S1505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is equal to or higher than the upper limit (S1505: Yes), the second variable winning device 650 is set to the closed state (S1506). The pointer of the jackpot scenario is updated to the position indicating the data corresponding to the end of the round (S1507), after which this process is terminated. Thus, in the present embodiment, the end condition of one round is until 10 balls are entered or the release period of 30 seconds elapses. By updating the pointer at the end of the round, it is possible to immediately set the end of the round when 10 balls are won, and to shift to the subsequent process related to the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the small hit control process (S1305), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S1305). In the small winning control process (S1305), opening control of the first variable winning device 65 in the small winning game and the like are executed.

In the small hit control process (FIG. 47, S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S1601). If it is determined that the small winning scenario is not set (S1601: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the small winning scenario is set (S1601: Yes), the pointer of the small winning scenario is updated by 1 (S1602). Here, the small winning scenario is set for each small winning type, and the processing related to the first variable winning device 65 executed in each small winning game is set to the pointer in chronological order.

It is determined whether the data of the small winning scenario indicated by the updated pointer is data corresponding to the start timing of the small winning game (S1603). When it is determined that the data corresponds to the start timing of the small winning game (S1603: Yes), an opening command indicating the start of the small winning game is set (S1604). After that, this process ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B is displayed at the opening of the small winning game.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small winning game (S1603: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1605). When it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1605: Yes), small winning operation setting processing is executed (S1606). In this small winning operation setting process (1606), the operation of the channel solenoid 65k (the solenoid that operates the switching member 65h) of the first variable winning device 65 and the operation timing of the open/close door 65f are set. The details of this small hit operation setting process (S1606) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning operation setting process (S1606) which is one process in the small winning control process (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. FIG. In the small winning operation setting process (S1656), first, the opening operation data of the first variable winning device 65 corresponding to the small winning type is read from the small winning scenario (S1701). As the opening operation data read here, the opening timing of the open/close door 65f1 and the operation timing of the channel solenoid 65k are respectively read.

Based on the opening operation data read in S1701, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k is set (S1702). As for the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k, the operation from turning on the solenoid to turning it off is set. The opening operation (opening timing) of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set (S1703). After that, this process ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, the operation of the flow path solenoid corresponding to the small hit type and the opening and closing door 65f1 are set respectively. As a result, it is possible to easily switch and set the opening operation that makes it possible to enter the V winning switch 65e3 and the opening operation that makes it difficult to enter the V winning switch 65e3 (impossible to enter the ball).

In this embodiment, in small hits A to D (all small hits), the induction piece 65h2 turns on the flow path solenoid 65k to the open state shown in FIG. 10 (a) for 2 seconds from the start of the small hit game can be switched by On the other hand, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is in the open state after 2 seconds from the start of the small prize game in the small prizes A to C, and at that time, the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that the specific prize winning is performed. A game ball that has won the opening 65a cannot be guided to the specific discharge opening 65e2. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set to be impossible (difficult) to win.

On the other hand, in the small winning D, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened for 1 second from the start of the small winning game, and then closed for 0.2 seconds (interval period between the next rounds), and then opened and closed again for 1 second. The door 65f1 is opened. As a result, when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance 65a in the open state in the small hit D, it becomes a period in which the guide piece 65h2 is set to the open state, so the game ball is discharged to the special discharge port 65e2 by the guide piece 65h2. is induced to win the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small winning D, the start of the big winning game is executed.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description continues. In the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a new round (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the round (open period of 2 seconds has elapsed) (S1607). When it is determined that it is time to end the round (S1607: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S1608). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1607 that it is not the time to end the round (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the round (S1609). When it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1609: Yes), small winning ending processing is executed (S1610). The small winning ending process (S1610) will be described later with reference to FIG. If so, control processing such as setting of a jackpot game is executed.

With reference to FIG. 49, the small winning ending process (S1610) which is one process in the small winning control process (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning ending process (S1610).

In the small hitting ending process (FIG. 49, S1610), first, a small hitting ending command is set (S1801). It is determined whether the V winning flag 203e is set to ON (S1802). Here, the V winning flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small winning game, and is the second winning executed in the small winning control process (S1305) described later. In the process (FIG. 50, S1611), when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is ON, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203e is set to ON. be.

In the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is ON (S1802: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot A is set (S1803). The V winning flag 203e is set to OFF (S1804), and then the processing of S1805 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1802: No), the process of S1805 is executed. In the processing of S1805, the state (state A to state C) corresponding to the small hit type executed this time is set in the state setting area 203m (S1805). The state counter value corresponding to the set state is set in the state counter 203k (S1806).

The state corresponding to the small hit type set here is set based on the state after the small hit set in the small hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14(d)). Also, the value of the state counter corresponding to each small hit is set based on the value of the number of state transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15(a)). After S1806 is executed, a state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1807).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed, the state C, which is the most advantageous state, is set. Therefore, even after the small winning D is executed and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and the big winning game is executed, the state C advantageous to the player is set, so that the small winning D is easily executed. , it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Furthermore, even if the game ball cannot pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the execution of the small win D, the state C is set after the small win D, so it is expected that the small win D will be executed again. can be given to the player, and a significant decrease in the player's motivation for the game can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description continues. In the process of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing, the second winning process is executed (S1611). After that, this process ends. As for the second winning process (S1611), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 50, a process relating to entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 65 is executed.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second winning process (S1661) which is one process in the small winning control process (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In the second winning process (S1661), first, it is determined whether or not the data indicated by the small winning scenario pointer is within the round valid period (S1901). During the valid period of the round means the period from when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened, when the closing condition is satisfied and when it is closed, to when the game ball that entered the first variable winning device 65 is discharged. This period includes the brushing time. In this embodiment, the ball sweeping period is set to 2 seconds.

If it is determined in S1901 that the round is valid (S1901: Yes), the first winning counter 203d1 is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1902). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is determined that the round valid period is not reached (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first specific winning hole 65a (S1903). When it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first specific winning hole 65a (S1903: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first specific ball entrance 65a (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the first winning counter 203d1 to update it. It is determined whether or not the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1905). When it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is less than the upper limit, the process of S1908 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or higher than the upper limit (S1905: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set to be closed (S1906). The small winning scenario pointer is updated to the position of the data indicating the end timing of the round (S1907). After that, the process of S1908 is executed.

In the process of S1908, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 203e is ON (S1908). When the V winning flag 203e is ON (S1908: Yes), the game ball has already passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (the right to execute the big winning game in the small winning game has been acquired), so this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1908: No), it is determined whether the V winning switch 65e3 is ON, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (S1909). If it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is off (S1909: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is on (S1909: Yes), the V winning flag 203e is set to ON (S1910), and the V winning command is set (S1911). After that, this process ends. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this V winning command, a notification mode indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set. In this embodiment, the character "V" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect "cuin" is output, and the corresponding lamp is lit.

<Control Processing Executed by Sound Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 51, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S2117 (see FIG. 52) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 52, S2114), the power-off processing of S2117 is executed. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2003. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S2117, the audio lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see FIG. 52 and S2116). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010).

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or the previous process (S2101: Yes) was executed (S2101). , if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the processing of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S2102 to S2110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S2111 and the variable display setting process of S2112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). After that, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After that, variation time measurement processing for measuring the remaining variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed (S2111). This fluctuation time measurement process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. Run.

When the process of S2111 is executed, the command determination process (S2112) for performing the process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2113. The details of this command determination process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S2113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off processing is executed (S2117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2112). This command determination process (S2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S2112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 53, S2112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S2201). Here, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is the command in order to indicate the fluctuation in the 1st special design, mainly it is the command which designates the fluctuation time in the 1st special design. And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed to variably display the first special symbol (S2202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described. Figure 54 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202). In the special figure 1 variation start process (Fig. 54, S2202), first, the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the variation pattern type is selected from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command. Extract (S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. From this variation pattern type, the success/failure determination result (small win or big win) can be determined.

When the process of S2302 is executed, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) indicated by the received variation pattern command is determined (S2303). It is determined whether or not the lottery result indicated by the received variation pattern command is a small hit (S2304). It is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit of the first special symbol (S2304). If the result of the lottery is not a small win, that is, a big win (S2304: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2304: Yes), the fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON (S2305). It is determined whether the second special symbol is stopped (S2306). When it is determined that the variation of the second special symbol is stopped (S2306: Yes), based on the variation time of the first special symbol and the effect counter 223g, the effect selection table during preparation in the fusion effect selection table 222b The effect under preparation is selected from 222b3 (S2307). After that, the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, in the configuration of this embodiment, the first special symbol always starts to fluctuate first. Therefore, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, it indicates that the game is normal. Also, in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed, the variable display of the fusion effect is started. During the period when the variation of the first special symbol is started and the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, the fusion effect before the competition shown in FIG. 4(a) is started (before the start) is displayed. Here, a plurality of kinds of fusion effects before starting the competition as shown in FIG. A value of the effect counter 223g is assigned to each of the fusion effects before starting a plurality of competitions, and the corresponding fusion effect is selected based on the obtained value of the effect counter 223g. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the fusion effect before the competition starts, and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored. It should be noted that the fusion effect before the competition is configured, for example, in a display mode for 5 seconds, and is repeatedly set until a new fusion effect is set or a new display mode is set in the third symbol display device 81. be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fusion effect before the competition is configured to be selected by the value of the effect counter 223g, but not limited to this, for example, it may be selected according to the variation pattern of the normal symbol currently being varied. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the variation pattern of the normal symbols from the fusion effect before the race, and the variation pattern of the normal symbols that is advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, the variation pattern with a short variation time (0 The player can be notified that the variation pattern of .5 seconds)) is selected. Furthermore, by switching the type of fusion effect selected according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in an open state, and the game ball can enter the second winning hole 64b. It is possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to win a prize through the second prize-winning port 64b by stopping shooting.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating (S2306: No), based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the value of the effect counter, the special effect selection table in the fusion effect selection table 222b A special effect is set from 222b4 (S2308). An abnormal change command is set (S2309), and then the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, when the second special symbol is already varying when the first special symbol starts to vary, the configuration of the present embodiment is in an abnormal state. In the case where the variation of the second special symbol has already started when the variation of the first special symbol is started, it is possible to 64a), the game ball is stopped by a magnet or the like, and the game ball is entered into the second winning hole 64b, or the game is played between the second winning hole 64b and the ordinary electric accessory 64b1. It is conceivable that the game ball enters the second winning hole 64b after a while after the ball is caught. In this case, the special effect displayed in the effect display area Ds3 is an effect in which the characters "winning prize abnormal" are displayed. Also, an alarm sound is output to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the game parlor. Also, a command is output from the external output terminal to the hall computer to indicate that there is an abnormal change (a prize winning abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from fluctuating before the first special symbol due to dishonesty, malfunction, etc., or from causing only the second special symbol to fluctuate and display, thereby preventing the game parlor side from being greatly disadvantaged. .

In the processing of S2310, the special figure 1 remaining variation time is set to the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i based on the variation time of the first special symbol (S2310). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description continues. After the processing of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (figure 54, S2202) is executed, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S2203). Here, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is the special design which shows the fluctuation display feature in order to variably display the 2nd special design. Special Figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for mainly notifying the validity determination result of the second special symbol and the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol. And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204) is executed. Details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described. Figure 55 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204). In the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2401), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command ( S2402). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol. It is used when setting a second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the second special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When the process of S2402 is executed, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined from the received variation pattern command (S2403). It is determined whether or not the lottery result indicated by the received variation pattern command is a small hit (S2404). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2404: Yes), the fusion effect start flag 223k is set to ON (S2405). It is determined whether the first special symbol is fluctuating (S2406). When it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating (S2406: Yes), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is more than the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time). It is determined whether the time is long (S2407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time is shorter than the special figure 2 variation time (S2407: Yes), the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player stops first, and the first special symbol is small. Since winning is executed, a losing fusion effect is selected from the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 of the fusion effect selection table 222b based on the special figure 1 remaining variation time and the effect counter 223g (S2408).

In this losing fusion effect, the effect of starting the competition shown in FIG. 4B is displayed, and the effect of the rabbit winning shown in FIG. It is a performance that is executed. By displaying the effect that the turtle loses, the player can recognize that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first. In the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, a plurality of types of losing fusion effects are set corresponding to the values of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, the player can see various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early and predicting the result before the result of the effect is displayed.

After that, based on the special figure 1 remaining variation time, the second special symbol variation time is set to the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j as the second special symbol remaining variation time (special figure 2 remaining variation time) (S2409) . After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2407, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining variation time is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (S2407: No), the variation time of the special figure 2 and the value of the production counter 223g Based on this, the win fusion effect is selected and set from the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 of the fusion effect selection table 222b (S2410). The variation time of the second special symbol is set to the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i (S2411). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is set to the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time counter 223j (S2412).

Here, when the second special symbol determined as No in S2407 stops earlier than the first special symbol, a small hit of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, as the fusion effect, the effect of starting the competition shown in FIG. 4(b) is executed, and as a result of the competition, the winning fusion effect shown in FIG. 5(b) where the turtle wins is selected as the second special symbol. Runs for variable time. In addition, in this win fusion effect, a plurality of types of win fusion effect are set in the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, it is possible to select various win fusion effects, and it is possible to provide a wide variety of effects to the player.

It should be noted that each winning fusion production described above is set to win production corresponding to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, respectively, and the losing fusion production starts to fluctuate the second special symbol from the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. A production period is set by subtracting the minimum possible period (the period until the earliest second special symbol starts to fluctuate). In the losing fusion effect, the blackout screen is set for 3 seconds until the end, and by adjusting the display period of the blackout according to the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the remaining fluctuation of the first special symbol set on time.

In addition, in the processing of S2406, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not fluctuating (S2413), since it is an abnormal state in which only the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the fluctuation time and production of the second special symbol A special effect is selected based on the value of the counter 223g (S2413). An abnormal variation command indicating abnormal variation is set (S2414). After that, the process of S2412 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description continues. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is received from the main controller 110 (S2205). When it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the contents of this stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop classification command is received, the special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2501). The stop type (jackpot A, small hit A to D, off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2502). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. After executing the processing of S2502, this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description continues. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2205, if it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is not received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the state command is received from the main controller 110 (S2209 ). If it is determined that the state command has been received (S2209: Yes), the state information (one of state A to state C) indicated by the state command is set in the sub-state setting area 223h (S2210). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2209 that the status command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the V winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2211). When it is determined that the V winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2211: Yes), the V winning effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set (S2212). A display V winning effect command for instructing a V winning effect (displaying the letter "V" on the third symbol display device 81) is set (S2213). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, when it is determined that the V winning command is not received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S2214). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S2214: Yes), the special figure 1 confirmation command for display (if the special figure 1 confirmation command is received) or the special figure 2 for display Confirmation command (when special figure 2 confirmation command is received) is set (S2213). Reset the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i (when special figure 1 decision command is received) or special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j (when special figure 2 decision command is received) to 0 which is the initial value. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is not received in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S2217), this End the process.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2113). This variable display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A, small hit A to D), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type Run.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2601). And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2601: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S2604 to On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2601: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S2702).

Next, in the processing of S2603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the processing of S2203 of the command determination processing (FIG. 53, S2112) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. 223z, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S2603). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S2603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2604). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2604: No), the state of not receiving the special figure 2 variation pattern command from the main controller 110 Therefore, the process of S2607 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S2706). In the processing of S2402 of the special figure 2 variation start processing (Fig. 55, S2204), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is obtained from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is generated (S2606). Here, variable display of "o" and "x" displayed in the second display area Ds2 is set.

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S2606 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 54). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607). When it is determined that the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607: Yes), it is time to set the fusion effect in the effect display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, so the fusion effect start flag 223k is turned off. (S2608), and sets a fusion effect command for display indicating the selected fusion effect (S2609). After that, the process of S2610 is executed.

In the process of S2610, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON (S2610). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f are not set to ON (that is, they are OFF) (S2610: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is on , the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is set to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2612 ). After that, this process ends.

Next, the variation time measurement process (S2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the contents of this fluctuation time measurement process (S2111). In this variation time measurement process (S2111), a process of subtracting the remaining variation time of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the passage of time is executed.

It is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is a value greater than 0 (S2701). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is a value greater than 0 (S2701: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i to update (S2702). After that, the process of S2703 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is 0 (S2701: No), the process of S2703 is executed.

In the processing of S2703, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is a value greater than 0 (S2703). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is a value greater than 0 (S2703: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S2704). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is 0 (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol are updated by subtracting about 1 ms corresponding to the counter value 1, so that the correct first special symbol and second special symbol are updated. It is possible to measure the remaining fluctuation time of the design.

In the configuration of the present embodiment, it is configured to switch the variation pattern selection table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol according to the small hit type of the first special symbol, but not limited to that, the variation of the small hit of the first special symbol The pattern selection table may be switched. In this case, by switching to a variation pattern selection table in which a long variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to set an advantage for the player. In addition, not only the small hit of the first special symbol, but also a predetermined lottery (for example, every variation, table switching lottery with a predetermined probability) may be executed. Further, the table for selecting the variation time of the normal symbol may be switched by the small hit type of the first special symbol, or may be switched by the hit type of the normal symbol. In this case, it is advantageous for the player if the table is switched to a table in which the fluctuation time of the short normal symbols is easily selected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol were not set with reserved balls, but a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls) of reserved balls are set for both or only one of them. You may For example, by setting the reserved ball of the first special symbol, the first special symbol can be changed efficiently. Further, by setting a reserved ball for the second special symbol, it is possible to efficiently change the second special symbol. In addition, when setting the reserved ball to the second special symbol, it is preferable to set the open period of the normal electric accessory 64b1 to the open state only once in the period in which one game ball is entered. By constructing in this way, there is no difference between the number of reserved first special patterns (number of winning prizes) and the number of reserved second special patterns (number of winning prizes), and the problem that only the second special pattern fluctuates can be suppressed.

<Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 74. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2801), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2801) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used as a processor, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2902, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2902, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2904), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 59) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) (S2905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2801) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 60, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2903 to S2905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2901 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S2901. and the processing of S2902 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2903 to S2905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2903 to S2905 without performing the processes of S2901 and S2902 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2803). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2803, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2804, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 72(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S4602 in FIG. 72A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 61(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 23 is drawn. Determination processing (see S3108 in FIG. 61B) and simple display setting processing (see S3109 in FIG. 61B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first winning hole 64a (starting winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. It is possible to perform a variable production. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2805, interrupt permission is set (S2806), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(a). FIG. 61(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(b). FIG. 61(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 27) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 61(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101). If it is off (S3101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, command determination processing (S3102) is executed, and then display setting processing (S3103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3102), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S3103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3102), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S3104). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S3103) or the simple display setting processing (S3109). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S3106). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S3104), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S3105), 27, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and back reach, front and rear reach other than front and back, complete loss, chance The stop type table corresponding to the second eye) is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68, the details of the command determination process (S3102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3201). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3103) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S3202). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S3203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S3204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3204: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S3205) and returns to the processing of S3201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. 63(a). FIG. 63(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3301).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device actually produces a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third pattern display device 81 is displaying the variation performance according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3304), both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3305), and this processing ends.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 63), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3304, the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301 From the display data table, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, it is transferred by the processing of S3302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S3303 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation defined in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S3206), If there is a display variation type command (S3206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3207), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the stop type command process (S3207) will now be described with reference to FIG. 63(b). FIG.63(b) is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S3401), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop design counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) is executed, and the third design display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S3402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the stop symbols set by the processing of S3402 are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to OFF (S3403), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3402. In the above-described task processing (S3104), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3402 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3403, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description is continued. In the process of S3206, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S3206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command in the unprocessed commands (S3208), If there is a command (S3208: Yes), a jackpot-related command process is executed (S3209), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S3209) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S3209). This jackpot-related command processing (S3209) executes processing corresponding to the jackpot-related commands (display opening command, display round number command, display ending command) received from the sound lamp control device 114. FIG.

In the jackpot-related command process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display in the unprocessed commands (S3501), and if there is an opening command for display (S3501: Yes), the opening command process is executed. (S3502), and the process proceeds to S3503.

Details of the opening command process (S3502) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S3605), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description is continued. In the process of S3501, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S3503), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S3503: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Details of the round number command processing (S3504) will now be described with reference to FIG. 65(b). FIG. 65(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3503, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S3503: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3505). If there is an ending command for (S3505: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3506), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the ending command process (S3506) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3802).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3208, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S3208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3210), and the back image change command is determined. If there is a command (S3210: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S3211), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the back image change command process (S3211) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to ON ( S3901). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3902), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3901 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3902. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

In the task processing (S3104), if it is specified to display one of the back faces A to C according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S3902 is determined. , the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3902, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3210, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S3210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fusion effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3212), and the command is displayed. If there is a fusion effect command for use (S3212: Yes), the fusion effect command process is executed (S3213), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the fusion effect command process (S3213) will now be described with reference to FIG. 67(b). FIG. 67(b) is a flow chart showing the fusion effect command process (S3213). This fusion effect command process (S3213) executes the process corresponding to the display fusion effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the fusion effect command process (S3213), first, the fusion effect display data table is determined based on the display fusion effect command, the determined fusion effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S4001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S4002).

Then, based on the fusion effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4005), the fusion effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Thus, when the display fusion effect command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the fusion effect command process (S3213) is executed, and the fusion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIGS. 4 to 7). be. As described above, in the present embodiment, when only the first special symbol is fluctuating (the second special symbol is stopped), the display for displaying the production during preparation (see FIG. 7(a)) as the fusion production A fusion effect command is notified from the sound lamp control device 113 . On the other hand, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating, the fusion effect is a winning fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 and 5 (b)) or a losing fusion effect (FIG. 4 and The voice lamp control device 113 notifies a fusion effect command for display showing (see FIG. 5(a)). As a result, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a fusion effect corresponding to the varying state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description is continued. In the processing of S3212, if it is determined that there is no fusion effect command for display (S3212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a V winning effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3214). If there is a V winning effect command for display (S3214: Yes), V winning effect command processing is executed (S3215), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, the details of the V winning effect command process (S3215) will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). FIG. 68(a) is a flow chart showing the V winning effect command process (S3215). This V winning effect command process (S3215) is to execute the process corresponding to the display V winning effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the V winning effect command processing (S3215), first, the V winning effect display data table is determined based on the V winning effect display data table for display, and the determined V winning effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S4102).

Then, based on the V winning effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4105), the V winning effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, when the V winning effect command for display is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the V winning effect command processing (S3215) is executed, and the V winning effect (Fig. not shown) is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the V prize has been won.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description is continued. In the processing of S3214, if it is determined that there is no display V prize effect command (S3214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3216), and the error command If there is (S3216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3217), and the process returns to S3201.

Details of the error command processing (S3219) will now be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3216, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3216: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3218), and the process returns to S3201.

In the process of S3201, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes ), and the processing of S3202 to S3218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S3201 to S3218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 63(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63(a)) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3301. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in this case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3302, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S3103), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4302), S4303-S4304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4401).

In the task processing (S3104), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304), or if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4303: No), then the process proceeds to S4305.

In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4505), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4502: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 69, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the process of S4306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S4310), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S3104), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S4315, the stop design of the fluctuation effect performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4309, if the fixed display flag is ON (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing contents so that is displayed.

In the process of S4316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S3109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 23B or 23C) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, details of the transfer setting process (S3105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 72(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S4602), transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S4601, that is, if it is turned off (S4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 will be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 72(b). FIG. 72B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S4701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4702). In the processing of S4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4702 that the transfer process has not ended (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Also, as a result of the processing of S4701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing in S4703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 61B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S3108 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 73) (see S4601: No in FIG. 72(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 73, normal image transfer setting processing (S4603), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the previously executed display setting process (S3103) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Also, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4806).

In the process of S4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S4806 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4806: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so the normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4807. Also, as a result of the process of S4805, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807). is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S4807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is ON (S4809).

If the back image change flag 233w is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

In the process of S4809, if the back image change flag 233w is not ON, but OFF (S4809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S4815, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, details of the drawing process (S3106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S3104) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated (S4901). That is, in the process of S4901, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S3104), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3105), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S4902, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 61(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit compared to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. It is configured as follows. In the fusion effect based on the big win, a so-called cut-in effect called SP effect (see FIG. 75(b)) is displayed. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that the SP effect will be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the above-described SP effect is displayed even in the fusion effect executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed in spite of the fact that the lottery result is a small hit, an effect (shake performance) is displayed. As a result, even if a big win is not achieved in spite of the SP performance being displayed, the player is provided with a privilege that it becomes easy to determine the state to be shifted after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's desire to play.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the presentation mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 is partially changed. The configuration of the win variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the configuration of the winning fusion effect selection table provided in the voice ramp control device 113 is partially changed. 3, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, an example of the fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 75(a) to (c) are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of the fusion effect.

In the present embodiment, when winning the jackpot or small win with the second special symbol, various win fusion effects (win fusion effects A, B, C) are displayed, and the jackpot or small win with the first special symbol is won. In this case, various losing fusion effects (losing fusion effects A, B, C, D, E, F) are displayed (see FIGS. 76(b) and (c)).

In the winning fusion effect A or the losing fusion effect A displayed when the jackpot is won, a performance simulating a competition between a rabbit and a tortoise is started as in the first embodiment described above (FIG. 75 ( a) see). Then, after a predetermined period of time (two seconds in the present embodiment) has passed since the start of the competition between the rabbit and the tortoise, an SP effect (so-called cut-in) in which the words "SP Chance!" effect) is displayed (see FIG. 75(b)). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "777") indicating a big win is displayed (not shown). As a result, the player can be notified that the jackpot has been won. Also, since the player plays the game expecting that the SP effect will be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the fusion performance displayed when winning various small hits, various fusion performances with SP performance (winning fusion performance B, losing fusion performance B, C, D, E) in which the above-mentioned SP performance is displayed, and SP Various fusion effects without effects (winning fusion effect C, losing fusion effect F) are prepared (see FIG. 76(b)).

In various fusion effects with SP effects, SP effects are displayed after a predetermined time (2 seconds) from the start of the fusion effect, as in the above-described winning fusion effect A or losing fusion effect A (FIG. 75 ( b) see). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "341" etc.) indicating a small win is displayed (see FIG. 75(c)). The stop symbol indicating the small hit is shaken up and down a predetermined number of times (2 to 8 times in this embodiment), and then becomes a complete stop display (still state). The number of times the stop symbol shakes is determined corresponding to various fusion effects (win fusion effect B, loss fusion effect B, C, D, E), details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 76(b). do. As a result, the player can predict the type of small winning won from the number of times the stop symbol shakes (that is, it is possible to predict the game state to be set), so the number of times the stop symbol shakes It is possible to attract the attention of the player and improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the fusion effect without SP effect (winning fusion effect C, losing fusion effect F), the winning fusion effect similar to the above-described first embodiment or the losing fusion effect is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, the stop symbol indicating the small win may be stop-displayed. In this case, an effect in which the stop symbols sway is executed, and a privilege is given that the game state to be set can be predicted. As a result, even if a small win (not a big win) occurs after the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, the player's desire to participate in the game is not lost. It can be prevented (suppressed).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 76, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 76(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Other configurations of the ROM 202 are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so illustration and description thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the hit variation pattern selection table 202f of the present embodiment, special figure 1 big hit variation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, for the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thereby, it is possible to secure the effect time of the fusion effect (losing fusion effect A) displayed when the above-mentioned jackpot is won.

On the other hand, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern E (variation time 4 seconds) is set. Then, for the second big hit variation pattern E, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, like the first special symbol, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, it is possible to ensure the performance time of the win fusion effect (win fusion effect A) displayed when the above-described jackpot is won.

FIG. 76(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 provided in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 110 in the second embodiment, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the loss fusion production|presentation selection table 222b2 provided in ROM222 of the audio ramp control apparatus 110 in 2 embodiment. Other configurations of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76(b), the contents of the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 will be described. The win fusion effect selection table 222b1 is provided with win fusion effect A as a fusion effect type when the result of determination of whether the second special symbol is a jackpot. Then, for the win fusion effect A, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, when the result of judging whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit, the win fusion effect A of the second special symbol is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223g.

On the other hand, winning fusion production B and winning fusion production C are provided as the fusion production type in the case where the result of judging whether or not the second special symbol is a small hit D (outside). The determination value of the performance counter 223g is set to "0 to 99" for the win fusion effect B, and the determination value of the effect counter 223g is set to "100 to 198" for the win fusion effect C. It is Therefore, when the success/failure determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit D (out), the winning fusion effect B with SP effect is selected with a probability of 100/199, and the SP effect is absent with a probability of 99/199. win fusion effect C is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 76(c), the contents of the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 will be described. In the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2, the losing fusion effect A is selected as the fusion effect type when the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol is a jackpot. For the losing fusion effect A, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g. Therefore, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit, the losing fusion effect A is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223g.

On the other hand, loss fusion effects B, C, and F are provided as the fusion effect type in the case where the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit A (out). Then, "0 to 19" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production B, and "20 to 49" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production C. , and "50 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g for the losing fusion effect F. Therefore, when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit A (missing), the loss fusion effect B with SP effect is selected (2 swings) with a probability of 20/199, and 30/199 Loss fusion effect C with SP effect (the number of shakes is 4 times) is selected with a probability of , and Loss fusion effect F without SP effect is selected with a probability of 149/199.

In addition, loss fusion production C, D, and F are provided as the fusion production type in the case where the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit B (out). Then, "0 to 49" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production C, and "50 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production D. 100 to 198 are set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g for the losing fusion effect F. Therefore, when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit B (missing), the loss fusion effect C with SP effect is selected (four shakes) with a probability of 50/199, and 50/199 Loss fusion effect D with SP effect (six shaking times) is selected with a probability of , and Loss fusion effect F without SP effect is selected with a probability of 99/199.

Furthermore, loss fusion effects D, E, and F are provided as the fusion effect type when the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol is a small hit C (off). Then, "0 to 74" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production D, and "75 to 149" is set as the judgment value of the production counter 223g for the losing fusion production E. , and "150 to 198" is set as the determination value of the effect counter 223g for the losing fusion effect F. Therefore, when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol is a small hit C (off), the loss fusion effect D (swinging number of times 6) with SP effect is selected with a probability of 75/199, and 75/199 Loss fusion effect E with SP effect (8 swings) is selected with a probability of , and Loss fusion effect F without SP effect is selected with a probability of 49/199.

Thus, in the present embodiment, after the SP effect is displayed, if the symbol indicating the small win is stopped and displayed, the stopped symbol is completely stopped and displayed according to the type of the small win ( The number of times it shakes until it stops) is set. As a result, the type of the small win can be predicted (that is, the game state to be set can be predicted) based on the number of times the pattern indicating the small win shakes until it is completely stopped and displayed (stopped). It is possible to make the player pay attention to the stopped display of the shown symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the player. Incidentally, the selection ratio of each SP effect described above may be determined arbitrarily.

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the type of small winning won, until the design indicating the small winning is completely stopped, the number of times that the pattern is shaken is configured to be variable, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Specifically, a specific character image (for example, an image of a boy) may naturally be displayed in accordance with the type of small prize won.

In the present embodiment, in the fusion effect corresponding to all small hit types (or big hits), it is configured so that there is a possibility that the SP effect is displayed, but it is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in the fusion effect corresponding to a specific small win type (for example, the game state is switched to an advantageous state for the player). As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the specific small win type has been won (that is, the game state has become advantageous for the player).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. First, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 77, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (S2202) in the second embodiment, like the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment, is executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 processing. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and the description is abbreviate|omitted about the same part as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (refer FIG. 54) in 1st Embodiment, and only a different part is demonstrated.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, the processing of S2301 to S2303 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S2305 without executing the process of S2304. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win, the process proceeds to S2305. Thereby, even when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fusion effect can be displayed.

The processing after S2305 (processing of S2305 to S2310) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 78, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, like the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment, is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 . It should be noted that the same parts as the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, the explanation thereof is omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

In special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 in the second embodiment, the processing of S2401 to S2403 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S2405 without executing the process of S2404. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the process proceeds to S2405. Thereby, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win, the fusion effect can be displayed.

The processing after S2405 (processing of S2405 to S2410) is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing ends.

It should be noted that the processing of S2408 is different in that the losing fusion effect is selected using the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 76(c). Moreover, in the processing of S2410, it is different in that the win fusion effect is selected using the win fusion effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 76(b). As a result, in the fusion effect, the SP effect can be displayed, and then the effect of shaking the stop symbol of the small win can be displayed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, and the fusion effect is the SP effect (Fig. 75 (b) ) is configured to display a so-called cut-in effect. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that the SP effect will be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the above-described SP effect is displayed even in the fusion effect executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed in spite of the fact that the lottery result is a small hit, an effect (shake performance) is displayed. As a result, even if a big win is not achieved in spite of the SP performance being displayed, the player is provided with a privilege that it becomes easy to determine the state to be shifted after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the fusion effect corresponding to all small hit types (or big hits), it is configured so that there is a possibility that the SP effect is displayed, but it is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in the fusion effect corresponding to a specific small win type (for example, the game state is switched to an advantageous state for the player). As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the specific small win type has been won (that is, the game state has become advantageous for the player).

In the present embodiment, the number of times of shaking the pattern until the pattern indicating the small win is completely stopped is varied according to the kind of the small win won, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may of course be displayed according to the type of the winning small prize.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect is displayed as the SP effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of displaying a cut-in effect, the background image may be changed, the display mode of the effect may be changed, or a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may be displayed. You may make it display, and you may make it output an information sound, of course.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 90. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol. Also, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. Thereby, the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of each special symbol, that is, the game time elapses. Since the game state changes according to the time, the game can be varied, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count of the number of lotteries for the first special symbols is reset when a big hit or a specific small hit (in this embodiment, a small hit E). Also, the count (count) of the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is reset when a big win or a specific small win (in this embodiment, a small win G). As a result, the timing at which the number of lotteries for the first special symbol and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to the game state changing according to the lapse of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game and improve the interest of the player.

In the third embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on a variation pattern selection table that is set for selecting variation patterns for each special symbol. According to this rear image, the current game state is a game state (that is, a game state disadvantageous to the player) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier than the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the second special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, in a state advantageous to the player). As a result, the player can be interested in the setting (display) of the back image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 The configuration of the small hit type selection table 202d provided is partially changed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 The point is that some of the processes that are executed have been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display mode of an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment.

In this embodiment, the rear image is set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. . According to this rear image, the current game state is a game state (that is, a game state disadvantageous to the player) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier than the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the second special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, in a state advantageous to the player).

For example, a short variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a long variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. If so, the back image of "city" indicating that the expectation level is 1 (lowest) is displayed (see FIG. 82(b)). On the other hand, a long variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a short variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. In this case, a back image of a "school of fish" indicating that the expectation level is 5 (highest) is displayed (see FIG. 82(b)). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 79(a) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the back image of "mountain" is set as the back image. In this case, as in the first embodiment described above, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the lower left display area Ds1 of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the second special symbol is displayed in the lower right display area Ds2 of the screen. A variable display of special symbols is displayed. At the center of the screen, an effect (fusion effect) simulating a competition between a rabbit and a turtle is displayed, and a back image of a "mountain" is displayed as the back image.

Similarly, FIG. 79(b) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the back image of "sand beach" is set as the back image. c) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when a back image of "bottom of the sea" is set as the back image.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82(b), but each rear image includes a variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and a variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. is set in combination with Specifically, when a variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, the back image to be selected is a highly expected back image. Further, when a variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the back image to be selected becomes a highly expected back image. That is, when there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol will be stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the rear image with a high degree of expectation is selected. .

As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the display of the highly anticipated back image, which enhances the interest of the player.

In this embodiment, the rear image is set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. Instead of changing the setting of the back image, for example, it may be configured to display a character design, to change the presentation mode, or to output a notification sound. good.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the ROM202 of the present embodiment has the configuration of the ROM202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13), the contents of the small hit type selection table 202d are partially changed, and the variation table A setting information storage area 202j is added. Details of the small hit type selection table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 80(c).

The variation table setting information storage area 202j is an area for storing information defining the relationship between the number of lotteries and the variation pattern selection table to be set. A variation pattern selection table for each special symbol is set based on the information in the variation table setting information storage area 202j.

This variation table setting information storage area 202j is referred to when determining whether it is time to change the setting of the variation pattern table in the first special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 83) (see S352 in FIG. 83). It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n (see S353 in FIG. 83). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 86), it is similarly referred to when determining whether it is time to change the setting of the variation pattern table (see S752 in FIG. 86), and the special figure 2 lottery number of times It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol based on the value of the counter 203p (see S753 in FIG. 86).

Details of the variation table setting information storage area 202j will now be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 81(a), the variation table setting information storage area 202j has a special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 and a special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2. The special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 is a storage area in which the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n. The special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 is a storage area in which the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p.

First, with reference to FIG.81(b), the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 provided in MPU201 of the main control unit 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, as a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, a first short variation table (a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected) and a second 1 medium fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the 1st short fluctuation table) and the 1st long fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the 1st medium fluctuation table) ) and are provided. Details of the first short variation table, first medium variation table, and first long variation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81(d).

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, the first short fluctuation table is set for the value "0 to 7" of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, and the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n "8 to 18", the first medium fluctuation table is set for the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n value "19 to 48", the first long fluctuation table is set for the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n value " 49 to 98" is set to the first medium variation table, and the first long variation table is set to the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n "99 ~".

Next, with reference to Drawing 81 (c), special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 provided in MPU201 of main control unit 110 in a 3rd embodiment is explained.

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, as a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p, a second long variation table (a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected), A second medium fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the second long fluctuation table is more likely to be selected) and a second short fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the second medium fluctuation table) ) and are provided. The details of the second long variation table, the second medium variation table, and the second short variation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81(e).

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, a second long variation table is set for the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p "0 to 7", and the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p "8 to The second medium fluctuation table is set for 18 ”, the second short fluctuation table is set for the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p “19 to 48”, and the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p “ 49 to 98" is set to the second medium variation table, and the second short variation table is set to the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p "99 ~".

Next, with reference to Drawing 81 (d), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202f provided in MPU201 of main control unit 110 in a 3rd embodiment is explained. The special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202f defines a first short variation table, a first medium variation table, and a first long variation table.

The first short variation table is a variation pattern table in which the special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) with a short variation time is likely to be selected. Specifically, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 149" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "150 to 197" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first short variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 150/199, special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 48/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199.

As for the first medium fluctuation pattern, compared to the first short fluctuation table, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are likely to be selected. pattern table. Specifically, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 99" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "100 to 195" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "196 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first medium variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 100/199, special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 96/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 3/199.

In the first long variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and the special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) with a long variation time are more likely to be selected than in the first medium variation table. pattern table. Specifically, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 49" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "50 to 189" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "190 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first long variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 50/199, special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 140/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 9/199.

Next, with reference to Drawing 81 (e), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202f provided in MPU201 of main control unit 110 in a 3rd embodiment is explained. The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202f defines a second long variation table, a first medium variation table, and a first short variation table.

The second long variation table is a variation pattern table in which the special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) with a long variation time is likely to be selected. Specifically, a special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special figure 2 for the value "1 to 49" of the variation type counter CS1 A variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and a special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value "50 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the second long variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199, special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 50/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 149/199.

In the second medium fluctuation table, compared to the second medium fluctuation table, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) with a short fluctuation time are likely to be selected. pattern table. Specifically, a special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 3" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "4 to 99" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value of variation type counter CS1 "100 to 198". That is, when the second medium variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 4/199, special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 96/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 99/199.

In the second short variation table, compared to the second short variation table, the special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and the special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) with a short variation time are likely to be selected Variation pattern table. Specifically, a special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 9" of the variation type counter CS1, and a special value for the value "10 to 149" of the variation type counter CS1 FIG. 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value of variation type counter CS1 "150 to 198". That is, when the second short variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 10/199, special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) Is selected with a probability of 140/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 49/199.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description continues. FIG. 80(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80(b), the RAM 203 of the present embodiment has, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19), a special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n and a special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p. is added.

The special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is a counter for counting the lottery number of lotteries based on the first special symbol. This special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is incremented by 1 when the lottery based on the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 83) (see S351 in FIG. 83). In the 1 special symbol variation stop process 3 (see FIG. 84), it is initialized to 0 (see S651 in FIG. 84) when the stop process for a big hit is executed. In addition, in the special figure 1 small per stop processing 3 (see FIG. 85), it is initialized to 0 also when the stop processing that becomes a specific small per (small per E) is executed (see S662 in FIG. 85) .

The special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is a counter for counting the lottery number of lotteries based on the second special symbol. This special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is incremented by 1 when the lottery based on the second special symbol is executed in the second special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 86) (see S751 in FIG. 86). In the 1 special symbol variation stop process 3 (see FIG. 87), it is initialized to 0 (see S951 in FIG. 87) when the stop process for a big hit is executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 small hit stop processing 3 (see FIG. 88), it is initialized to 0 also when the stop processing to be a specific small hit (small hit G) is executed (see S962 in FIG. 88) .

Next, with reference to FIG.80(c), small hit classification selection table 202d provided in MPU201 of the main control unit 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. This small hit type selection table 202d is based on the value of the small hit type selection counter, the small hit type, the presence or absence of V passage, and each lottery number counter after the small hit (special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, special figure 2 This table is used to select whether or not to reset the lottery number counter 203p).

In the small hit type selection table 202d, dedicated small hit types are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, two kinds of small winning E and small winning F are set, and two kinds of small winning G and small winning H are set in the second special symbol. In the small hit E, "0 to 3" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4, and in the small hit F, "4 to 198" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4. there is On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit G, and the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit H is set to "99 to 198".

In this embodiment, by executing the small hit E, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0, and the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol is configured to be switched. . In addition, by executing the small hit G, the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is initialized to 0, and the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol is configured to be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the small winning E of the first special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small winning F of the first special symbol is set to "no reset". ing. Further, the small winning G of the second special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small winning H of the second special symbol is set to "no reset".

In addition, as in the first embodiment, the small hits of the first special symbol (small hits E, F) are small hits that are difficult (or impossible) to pass through V, and the small hits of the second special symbol. (Small hits G, H) are small hit types that allow easy (or possible) V passage.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table is configured to be switched according to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (that is, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n), and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. (That is, the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p) is configured to switch the variation pattern selection table according to. As a result, by combining the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol, a state advantageous to the player (for example, the first special A symbol variation pattern selection table is a table with a long variation time) and a disadvantageous state (for example, a second special symbol variation pattern selection table is a table with a long variation time) can be set.

In addition to this, in this embodiment, the timing at which the number of lotteries for the first special symbol and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to the game state changing according to the lapse of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game and improve the interest of the player.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(a). As shown in FIG. 82(a), the ROM 222 of this embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(a)) in that a rear image selection table 222c is added. do.

Here, the back image selection table 222c provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(c). The back image selection table 222c defines the back image to be set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. It is a table that has been

Concretely, first, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second long variation table, the back image of "town" with the degree of expectation of "1" (lowest) is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of "mountain" with the degree of expectation of "2" is selected. In the case of the second short-variation table, the back image of "sand beach" with an expectation level of "3" is selected.

Next, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first medium variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second long variation table, the back image of "mountain" with the degree of expectation "2" is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of "sand beach" with the degree of expectation of "3" is selected. In the case of the second short-variation table, the back image of the "bottom of the sea" with the degree of expectation of "4" is selected.

Next, the case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second long variation table, the back image of "sand beach" with the degree of expectation of "3" is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of "bottom of the sea" with the degree of expectation of "4" is selected. In the case of the second short-variation table, the back image of the "school of fish" with the degree of expectation of "5" (highest) is selected.

In this way, when a variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, a back image with a high degree of expectation is likely to be selected. Further, when a variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, a back image with a high degree of expectation is likely to be selected. That is, when there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol will be stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the rear image with high expectation is likely to be selected. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the display of the highly anticipated back image, which enhances the interest of the player.

Next, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(c). As shown in FIG. 82(c), the RAM 223 of the present embodiment has a rear image information storage area 223m added to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(c)). differ.

The back image information storage area 223m is an area for storing the currently set back image type. This back image information storage area 223m is referred to in order to determine the current back image (see S5004 in FIG. 90) in the back image change process (see FIG. 90), and based on the back image selected in the process. This is the area to be updated (see S5006 in FIG. 90).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 83 to 88. FIG. First, the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) in the third embodiment performs lottery for the first special symbol, and selects a variation pattern based on the lottery result. Then, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is counted (counted), and the setting of the variation pattern selection table of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries counted (counted).

In the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) in this third embodiment, the processes of S301 to S304 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. After completing the processing of S304, the processing of S351 to S353 is executed instead of the processing after S305 of the first embodiment.

Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n (S351), and then it is determined whether it is time to change the setting of the fluctuation pattern table (S352). In the process of S352, if it is determined that it is not the time to change the setting of the variation pattern table (S352: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S352, if it is determined that it is time to change the setting of the variation pattern table (S352: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203n and the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 Based on this, the small hit variation pattern selection is set (S353), and then the process is terminated.

Next, the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first special symbol variation stop processing 3 (S204) in the third embodiment stops the variation of the first special symbol in the same manner as the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204, see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. It is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n to 0 when performing a process for making a big hit or a specific small hit (small hit E).

In the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S204) in the third embodiment, the processes of S601 to S607, S608 and S609 are executed as in the first embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment is that the process of S651 is executed after finishing the process of S607, and the special figure 1 small per stop process 3 is executed instead of the special figure 1 small per stop process of S610. is. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S204), after executing the process of S607, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S651), and this process ends. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that becomes a big hit is executed in the first special symbol.

Also, in the process of S602, if it is determined that the big hit flag is not turned on for the special figure 1, that is, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 ( S610) is executed, and the process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, in this special figure 1 small winning stop processing 3 (S610), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a specific small winning (small winning E), special figure 1 The value of the lottery number counter 203n is initialized to zero. Thereby, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop to be a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed in the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85, the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) performed by MPU201 in the main control unit 110 is demonstrated. The special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610) in the third embodiment is similar to the special figure 1 small hit stop processing (S610, see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. It is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n to 0 when executing a fluctuation stop process that becomes a specific small hit (small hit E).

In the special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610) in the third embodiment, the processing of S621 to S625 is executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. A difference from the first embodiment is that the processes of S661 and S662 are executed after the process of S625 is finished. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610) in the third embodiment, after executing the processing of S621 to S625, it is determined whether it is a specific small hit (small hit E) (S661). If it is determined in the process of S661 that it is not a specific small win (that is, it is a small win F) (S661: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a specific small hit in the process of S661 (that is, it is a small hit E) (S661: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S662) , and then terminate this process. As a result, the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0 when the fluctuation stop that becomes a specific small hit (small hit E) is executed.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second special symbol variation start process (Fig. 86, S206), the special figure 2 lottery number counter instead of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n for the above-described first special symbol variation start process (Figure 83, S203) The value of 203p is added (S751), and the variation pattern selection table is set based on the information of the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 instead of the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 (S752, S753 ), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation stop process 3 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 2nd special design fluctuation stop processing 3 (S207) in this 3rd execution form, vis-a-vis the 1st special design fluctuation stop processing 3 which mentions (refer to Figure 84), instead of special figure 1 lottery counter 203n special figure The only difference is that the value of the 2 lottery number counter 203p is initialized to 0 (S951 or S920), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (S920) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure 2 small per stop processing 3 (S920) in this third embodiment is a specific small per (small per E) with respect to the above-described special figure 1 small per stop processing 3 (see FIG. 85) Instead of determining whether it is a specific small hit (small hit G) or not (S961), and instead of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is set to 0 Since the only difference is the point of initialization (S962), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. First, the variable display setting process 3 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment differs from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment in that the rear image change process (S2651) is executed. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, the description thereof is omitted, and only the different parts are described.

In the variable display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment, the processes of S2601 to S2612 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process (S2113) in the first embodiment. After completing the process of S2610 or S2612, the back image change process is executed (S2651), and then the process ends.

Here, the rear image change processing (S2651) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The back image change processing (S2651) in the third embodiment is based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol, This is processing for changing the back image.

In the back image change processing (S2651) in the third embodiment, first, the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol that is set is determined (S5001), and then, for the second special symbol that is set (S5002). Then, based on the determination results of S5001 and S5002, a back image is selected from the back image selection table 222c (S5003).

Next, the current back image is determined from the back image information storage area 223m (S5004). It is determined whether or not the back image selected by the processing of S5003 is different from the current back image determined by the processing of S5004 (S5005). In the process of S5005, if it is determined that the selected back image is the same as the current back image (S5005: No), there is no need to change the back image, so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5005 that the selected back image is different from the current back image (S5005: Yes), the back image information storage area 223m is updated based on the selected back image (S5006). ), a background image change command is set based on the selected back image (S5007), and the process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol. Also, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. Thereby, the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of lotteries of each special symbol, that is, the game time elapses. Since the game state changes according to the time, the game can be varied, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count of the number of lotteries for the first special symbols is reset when a big hit or a specific small hit (in this embodiment, a small hit E). Also, the count (count) of the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is reset when a big win or a specific small win (in this embodiment, a small win G). As a result, the timing at which the number of lotteries for the first special symbol and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to the game state changing according to the lapse of the game time, the game state can be changed according to the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game and improve the interest of the player.

In the third embodiment, the rear image is set (displayed) based on a variation pattern selection table that is set for selecting variation patterns for each special symbol. According to this rear image, the current game state is a game state (that is, a game state disadvantageous to the player) in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier than the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. It is possible to predict whether the second special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, in a state advantageous to the player). As a result, the player can be interested in the setting (display) of the back image, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this embodiment, the back image is set (displayed) based on the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol, but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, instead of setting (displaying) the back image, the effect mode may be changed, a specific character pattern may be displayed, or a notification sound may be output. Naturally good.

In the third embodiment, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is reset (initialized to 0) based on the specific small winning type (small winning E) in the first special symbol. It is not something that can be done. For example, based on a specific small hit type (small hit E) in the first special design, the number of lotteries of the second special design may be reset, or both the first special design and the second special design It is of course possible to reset the number of lotteries for . Also, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol may not be reset until the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit. In this case, when the number of lotteries for the first special symbols is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player may be set (a so-called ceiling is provided). As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a decrease in the player's desire to play even if the state in which the big win is not achieved continues for a long time. In addition, the configuration described above is not limited to the first special symbol, and may be similarly applied to the second special symbol.

You may combine the structure of this 3rd Embodiment with 1st Embodiment mentioned above. Specifically, in addition to changing the game state (setting of the variation pattern selection table for each special symbol) according to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), the lottery result is a specific small A game state (setting of a variation pattern selection table for each special symbol) is changed even when a win (or a big win) is achieved. As a result, the variation in which the game state changes increases, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 100. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a rune 900 (flowing period extending means) in which the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one is provided above the second winning hole 64b. It is configured so that the game ball does not (or is difficult to enter) into the opening 64b at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds in this embodiment). As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the second winning hole 64b excessively.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 64b while the second special symbol is changing, the winning information is reserved. On the other hand, it is configured so that the winning information of the first special symbol cannot be reserved. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, if the game ball does not enter the first winning hole 64a (that is, if the shooting of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second A state in which the variation of the special symbols is stopped (fixed), that is, a state advantageous to the player can be created. As a result, since the player plays the game expecting that the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, the winning information (start of variation) of the second special symbol can be held, and the interval (20 seconds) at which the game ball enters the second winning hole 64b is based on the first special symbol. It is configured to be longer than the fluctuation time of fluctuation (maximum 19 seconds). Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, two or more game balls do not enter the second winning hole 64b (that is, the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld. This does not result in a situation that is advantageous to the player). Although the details will be described later, when a jackpot game is being executed, the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, which is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation from becoming excessively advantageous for the player.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs in construction from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a croon 900 is provided above the second winning hole 64b of the game board, and third symbol display control is performed. The effect mode displayed on the device 81 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the one executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. This is because the partial processing has been changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with a left frame button 22a on the front left side of the front frame 14 and a right frame button 22a on the front right side of the front frame 14, unlike the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. 22b is provided, and other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The front frame 14 has a frame left button 22a provided on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1) and a frame right button 22b provided on the right side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are spaced apart (approximately 500 mm) to make it difficult to operate with one hand. , it is necessary to release the operating handle 51 and use both hands.

This frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b), for example, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changes the effect contents of super reach. It is operated by the player when changing it. Although the details will be described later, an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) of simultaneously operating both frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) is also executed. By displaying (executing) an effect of simultaneously operating both frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) as shown in FIG. ) can be temporarily suspended.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. The game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above in that a croon 900 is provided above the second winning hole 64b. are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a crewon 900 is provided above the second winning hole 64b. The croon 900 is composed of a mortar-shaped (inverted dome-shaped) body portion and a tubular portion extending downward from the center of the mortar shape, and the body portion and the tubular portion are integrally molded of resin.

The main body portion is composed of a bottom portion (circumferential portion) whose bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center, and a wall portion formed on the outer edge of the bottom portion. The cylindrical portion is provided with a through-hole having a diameter through which only one game ball can pass from the upper portion to the lower portion, and the game ball reaching the center of the bottom portion of the main body portion can flow down. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, but the game ball that has entered (flowed down) into the croon 900 circles the bottom surface (ball circulation portion) of the main body portion, passes through the through hole of the cylinder portion, and descends downward. flow down to

The croon 900 is inserted from the front side of the game board into a through hole (not shown) made in the game board by router processing, and is pivotally supported from the back side of the game board (not shown). The position of the croon 900 in the front-back direction is a position where the cylindrical portion of the croon 900 contacts the game board, and the back (back) side of the main body portion is the back (back) side of the area where the game ball flows down. It is positioned so as to protrude from the back side of the board. In addition, a cover member (not shown) is provided on the upper part of the main body portion projecting to the back side of the game board so as to prevent game balls flowing down to the main body part from jumping out to the back side of the game board. ing.

In addition, the vertical position of the crew 900 is provided above the second variable winning device 650 and below the position of the through gate 67 . As a result, it is possible for the game ball that has not entered the second variable winning device 650 or the game ball that has not passed through the through gate 67 to enter the croon 900 .

On the upper side of the croon 900, a nail is arranged from the upper right part to the upper central part, and the game ball can be entered only from the upper left part of the croon 900. - 特許庁A variable member 901 is provided in the upper left part of this clone 900 .

This variable member 901 is configured to move to the front side by applying a load equivalent to one game ball to the croon 900 (not shown). That is, when the game ball is circling the bottom surface of the body portion of the croon 900, the variable member 901 is moved to the front side, making it impossible (or difficult) for a new game ball to enter the croon 900. ) state. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) two or more game balls from flowing down to the bottom surface of the main body of the croon 900 and circling.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 is an enlarged perspective view of a croon 900 provided on the game board of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The game ball that has flowed down to the croon 900 circulates the bottom surface of the main body (ball circling portion) for a predetermined period (19 seconds in this embodiment), and then passes through the through hole of the cylindrical portion provided at the center of the bottom surface. and flow downwards. A game ball that has flowed downward from the cylindrical portion of the croon 900 enters the second winning hole 64b provided below when the electric accessory 64b1 is open. Since it takes 1 second for the game ball flowing down from the croon 900 to enter the second winning hole 64b, the game ball flowing down to the croon 900 enters the second winning hole 64b. The required time is 20 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b), an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 94(a) and (b) show an example of a presentation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 94(a) is a schematic diagram showing an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the first round). By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(a), the player can be urged to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 64b during the jackpot game.

In FIG. 94(b), when the game ball enters the second winning hole 64b during execution of the jackpot game, and the second special pattern is reserved at the end of the jackpot game, the third pattern display device 81 It is a diagram showing a mode of the ending effect displayed in . By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(b), it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game will end while the second special symbol is on hold. Further, by displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(b), the player is encouraged to simultaneously press the left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10. The firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51) can be temporarily interrupted.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is advantageous to stop the variation of the second special symbol before the variation of the first special symbol, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, since the winning of the first special symbol is not suspended, in the state where the second special symbol is suspended, if the variation of the first special symbol is not started, the variation of the second special symbol is surely stopped first. (ie, a state advantageous to the player). Therefore, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 94(b) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to temporarily suspend the shooting operation (operation of the operation handle 51), so that the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first without starting the variation of the first special symbol. can be done.

In addition, not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, a right through gate is arranged above the first variable winning device 65, and a game ball hit to the right passes through the right through gate. The gate may be easily passed through, the normal electric accessory 64b1 may be easily opened, and the game ball may be easily entered into the second winning hole 64b. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable member 901 is configured so that only one ball rolls on the clown means 900, but this is not restrictive. A nail is arranged so as not to enter the means 900, and only a right-handed game ball can enter the clown means 900. - 特許庁Then, if the player hits to the right other than during the jackpot game or the small hit game, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by passing through the right through gate, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (discontinued) or all the winning or not It may be configured such that the determination result is determined as a failure, an error is notified to the third pattern display device 81, an alarm sound is output, or an error signal is output from an external output terminal. Furthermore, in the normal game state, when passing through the right through gate, the variation time may be lengthened, or the winning probability of normal symbols may be decreased. Furthermore, always, as a time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is a normal game state such as during a jackpot game as the fluctuation time and winning probability of the normal pattern described in this embodiment In the normal game state), the change time of the normal symbols may be shortened, or the winning probability may be increased to make it easier to win the second winning opening 64b.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various counters in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is provided, and other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is composed of one execution area and one reserved area (first reserved area). In each of these areas, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64.

Specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second winning port 64b (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in one reservation area (reservation first area ) is stored in an empty area. In addition, when data is stored in the first reservation area, nothing is newly stored.

In the main controller 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

Shifting data from the reserved first area to the execution area empties the reserved first area. Then, based on the winning (starting winning) to the new second winning opening 64b, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 can be obtained and stored in the reserved first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 of this embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is added. The details of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r are as described with reference to FIG. 95, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 97 to 99. FIG. First, timer interrupt processing 4 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt processing 4 in the fourth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) in that a part of the special symbol variation processing (S104) is changed, and the starting The difference is that the winning process (S151) is executed, and the other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the timer interrupt process 4 in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment, after the processes of S101 to S104 are executed, the starting winning process is executed (S151). By executing this starting winning process (S151), the second special symbol can be reserved. When the processing of S151 is completed, the processing of S106 to S109 is executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment, and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the starting winning process (S151) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The starting winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment is one process in the timer interrupt process 4 (see FIG. 97) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment.

In the starting winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 64b (S6001). In the process of S6001, if the ball has not entered the second winning hole 64b (S6001: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if the ball has won the second winning hole 64b (S6001: Yes), then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is acquired (S6002), It is determined whether the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is greater than 1 (S6003: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003: Yes), add 1 to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s ( S6004), then set the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S6005). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r (S6006), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the same manner as the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. This is one process in the special symbol variation process (S104).

In the second special symbol variation start processing 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment, in place of the processing of S701 to S702 in the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, S751 The difference is that the processing from S755 is executed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206), first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is obtained (S751), and then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s. is greater than 0 (S752). If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S752: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S752, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is greater than 0 (S752: Yes), from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s 1 is subtracted (S753), the reserved ball number command is set (S754), and the data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is shifted (S755). After that, the processing of S703 to S708 is executed, and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, the command determination process 4 (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, like the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as those in the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted, and only different parts are described.

In the command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S2201 to S2207 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process in the first embodiment. If so (S2207: Yes), the process of S2208 is executed. After executing the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 (S2251). Specifically, when the pending ball number command is received during the execution of the variation of the second special symbol, it is determined that the pending ball number of the second special symbol is one. On the other hand, when the pending ball number command is received while the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, the variation of the second special symbol is immediately started based on the suspended winning information. That is, since it is a case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not substantially become 1, it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0.

In the processing of S2251, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 (S2251: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2251, when it is determined that the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 1 (S2251: Yes), the V chance command for display is set (S2252), and this process ends.

The display V-chance command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). ) to the display controller 114 . By receiving this display V chance command, the display control device 114 performs an effect ( (not shown) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the pending ball number command is not received (S2207: No), the process of S2209 to S2213 is not executed, and the process proceeds to S2253. In the process of S2253, it is determined whether the ending command is received (S2253), and if the ending command is received (S2253: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 is pending 1 (S2254). In the process of S2254, if the special figure 2 is pending 1 (S2254: Yes), the V chance ending command for display is set (S2255), and this process ends.

The display V-chance ending command set by the process of S2255 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and is used as a command output of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the process (S2102). The display control device 114 displays the effect shown in FIG. 94(b) on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this V-chance ending command for display.

On the other hand, in the process of S2254, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not reserved 1 (S2254: No), the normal ending command for display is set (S2256), and this process ends.

In the process of S2253, if the ending command has not been received (S2253: No), the processes of S2214 to S2217 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the rune 900 (flowing period extending means) is provided above the second winning hole 64b, in which the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one. Thus, it is configured such that game balls do not (or are difficult to enter) into the second winning hole 64b at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the second winning hole 64b excessively.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 64b while the second special symbol is changing, the winning information is reserved. On the other hand, it is configured so that the winning information of the first special symbol cannot be reserved. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, if the game ball does not enter the first winning hole 64a (that is, if the shooting of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second A state in which the variation of the special symbols is stopped (fixed), that is, a state advantageous to the player can be created. As a result, since the player plays the game expecting that the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by providing a cloon 900 above the second winning opening 64b, the game ball is configured not to enter the second winning opening 64b at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds). , but not limited to these. For example, using a known sorting device, game balls may be sorted so as to enter the second winning hole 64b at predetermined intervals (or at intervals longer than the predetermined intervals).

In the present embodiment, the game ball revolves around the bottom surface (revolving part) of the croon 900, so that the time required for the game ball to pass through the croon 900 is increased, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Instead of the croon 900, the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one, and means for extending the falling period of the game balls (flowing period extending means) may be provided. Concretely, means such as forming a meandering flow path to lengthen the flow distance, and using a member (speed reducing member) for reducing the speed of the game ball in the flow path are conceivable. As the speed reducing member, for example, a member exhibiting a high coefficient of friction (such as urethane rubber) that increases the frictional force generated when the ball rolls can be considered. It is also conceivable to increase the frictional force between the balls and the ball rolling surface of the downflow passage by roughening the ball rolling surface of the downflow passage or providing protrusions, thereby reducing the downflow speed of the balls.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent two or more game balls from entering (flowing down) into the croon 900 at the same time, a movable member that is moved by the load on the croon 900 is used, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, a known non-electric accessory or electric accessory may be provided at the entrance of the croon 900 as a matter of course. Specifically, when a game ball enters the croon 900, if it is a non-electric accessory, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved, and if it is an electric accessory, it is electrically operated based on ball detection. At the same time, the electric accessory at the entrance is movably controlled, making it impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the croon 900 . Then, when the game ball flows down below the croon 900, if it is a non-electric accessory, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved again, and if it is an electric accessory, it is electrically based on the flow detection. The electric accessary at the entrance is movably controlled again, and the entry of the game ball into the croon 900 becomes possible (or easy).

In the present embodiment, the cloon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b, but it may not be provided. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107. FIG. Unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is provided with a second variable winning device 650 on the left side of the game board. Then, the jackpot game and the small winning game of the special figure 1 are the games that enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small winning game of the special figure 2 is on the right side of the game board. A game (a so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is entered into the provided first variable winning device 65 is assumed. Thereby, the game of the small winning game and the normal game of the special figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operation for executing the game can be made the same), and frequently occurs It is possible to reduce the operation burden of the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1. - 特許庁

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in contrast to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a jackpot type is provided in which a time-saving game state, which is an advantageous state for the player after the jackpot game is completed, is provided. made it As a result, the player executes the game expecting that the time-saving game state will be provided after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed. The points are that the configuration is partly changed, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 101, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 moves from the position on the right side of the game board to the position on the left side with respect to the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. The points that have been changed, the point that the right first prize winning port 640a is provided above the first variable prize winning device 65, and the point that the right through gate 670 is provided above the right first prize winning port 640a. , and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (whether or not it is possible to enter a ball) in the big win game, and the first variable winning in the small win game of special figure 2 The device 65 is opened and closed (whether or not the ball can be entered is variable). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 small winning game, instead of the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (whether or not it is possible to enter a ball).

Therefore, the big hit game and the small hit game of the special figure 1 are a game of shooting a game ball to the left side of the game board (so-called left hitting). Thereby, the game of the small winning game and the normal game of the special figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operation for executing the game can be made the same), and frequently occurs It is possible to reduce the operation burden of the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the game board, and the first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the game board, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 may be arranged in the center of the game board. As a result, in all games (normal game, jackpot game, special figure 1 small winning game, special figure 2 small winning game), the operation for executing the game can be the same, so the player's Operation burden can be reduced. Also, since each prize-winning device is arranged in the center of the game board, the player can select whichever he prefers, right-handed or left-handed, thereby improving the interest of the player.

By configuring in this way, there is no need to hit right at the time of the small winning of the first special symbol, and by continuing the left hitting game, the small winning game in the first special symbol is executed, and then the normal game to be executed. can be continued while hitting left. Therefore, in this embodiment, although it is the structure which the small hit of a 1st special design is performed frequently, the trouble which switches frequently to a right-handed game can be skipped, and a game can be continued easily. In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit B is executed, the time saving game is given eight times (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol). Even in that case, the right through gate 670 and the right first winning hole 640a (the winning hole that triggers the start of the first special symbol) are placed on the right side of the game area (first variable Since it is arranged above the winning device 65), it is possible to execute a time-saving game in a right-handed state. Furthermore, even in the normal game state, the game can be played either left-handed or right-handed, so that the player can easily understand the game method and play the game easily.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is configured so that the second variable winning device 650 is open, but the first variable winning device 65 may be opened. In this case, by controlling the switching member 65h without actuating it, it is possible to suppress the problem that the big winning game is continuously executed. Further, even when the time-saving game is provided, the game can be played by continuing the right-handed game, and the game operation can be facilitated.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. The ROM 202 of this embodiment differs in that the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 102(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. In this embodiment, as the types of jackpots, jackpot A (15R jackpot, no electric sapo) and jackpot B (15R jackpot, electric sapo 8 times) are provided.

Here, "jackpot A (15R jackpot, no electric sapo)" means that the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds (1 round is 30 seconds or up to 10 balls won), and then the normal state (states A to C) It is a big hit. In addition, "jackpot B (15R jackpot, electric sapo 8 times)" is a time-saving state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is shortened) after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. It's a big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the time saving state, compared to the normal state (states A to C), it is easy to select a shorter variation time of the second special symbol than the variation time of the first special symbol (that is, the second The variation of the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the variation of the first special symbol), which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot type selection table 202d, the value of the first hit type counter CS2 "0 to 99" is set for the jackpot A, and the value of the first type counter CS2 "100 to 198" is set for the jackpot B. is set. That is, the probability that the jackpot A is selected is set to 100/199, and the probability that the jackpot B is selected is set to 99/199.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102(b), the details of the special figure 1 small per variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f will be described. This special figure 1 small per variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f is a small per variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol in the time saving state. The special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined in the special figure 1 small per variation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f.

Specifically, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, the probability that the special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected as the small hit variation pattern of the first special symbol in the time saving state is set to 199/199 (that is, 100%).

Next, with reference to FIG. 102(c), the details of the special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f will be described. This special figure 2 small per variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f is a small per variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol in the time saving state. In the special figure 1 small per variation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f, special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) and special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) are defined.

Specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is defined for the value "0 to 65" of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 "66 to 198" In contrast, special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) is defined. That is, in the time saving state, the probability that the second variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern for the small hit of the second special symbol is set to 66/199, and the second variation pattern G ( The probability that the variation time of 6 seconds) is selected is set to 133/199.

Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected in the second special symbol is 66/199. As a result, compared with the normal state (states A to C), the time-saving state becomes a state (that is, a state advantageous to the player) in which the variation of the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the first special symbol.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 of this embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a time saving counter 203t is added, and the other points are the same. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The time-saving counter 203t is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with special symbols, and when the value of the time-saving medium counter 203t is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with special symbols. , and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This short time counter 203t is set to 8 at the end of the jackpot B (16R time short jackpot) (see S1453 in FIG. 106). In this time-saving state, a small winning variation pattern selection table for the time-saving state is set (S1452), and the variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened (see FIGS. 103(b) and (c)). ). In the first special symbol variation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 104) or the second special symbol variation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 105), 1 is subtracted each time the variation of each special symbol is stopped (S673 in FIG. 104 , S973 in FIG. 105).

As described above, the small hit variation pattern set in the time saving state is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol compared to the normal state (states A to C) compared to the variation time of the first special symbol. It is configured to be easily selected (that is, the variation of the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the variation of the first special symbol). As a result, after the big win B is finished, the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the first special symbol, which is advantageous for the player (time saving state). Therefore, since the game can be played with the goal of achieving a big hit B as one goal, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 104 to 107. FIG. First, the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S204) in the fifth embodiment, the processing from S671 to S676 is added to the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. are different, and the other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 in the fifth embodiment, similarly to the first special symbol variation stop processing in the first embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes), and the lottery result is a jackpot (S602: Yes), the processing of S603 to S607 is executed, the time saving counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S671), and the process proceeds to S675 in order to end the time saving state.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes) and the lottery result is a small hit (S602: No), the process of S610 is executed and the process proceeds to S672. Also, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (S601: No), when the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is ON (S608: Yes), the process of S609 is executed and the process proceeds to S672.

In the process of S672, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203t is greater than 0 (S672), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S672: No), this process ends as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S672, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is greater than 0 (S672: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S673), and the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 It is determined whether or not (S674).

In the process of S674, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is not 0 (S674: No), the time saving state is continued, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S674, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S674: Yes), the process proceeds to S675 in order to terminate the time saving state.

After completing the processing of S671 or S674, the current state is acquired from the state setting area (S675), and based on the state acquired in the processing of S675, the variation pattern selection table is set (S676), and this processing is executed. finish. By the processing of this S676, it is possible to change the variation pattern selection table that has been set in the time saving state, it is possible to end the time saving state.

Next, the details of the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S207) is different from the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment in that processing from S971 to S976 is added. are the same. It should be noted that the second special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S207) is similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 104) described above for the second special symbol. Description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the details of the jackpot control process 5 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot control process 5 (S1304) is different from the jackpot control process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1451 to S1453 are additionally executed at the timing of the ending, Other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In jackpot control processing 5 (S1304), the processing from S1401 to S1409 is executed like the jackpot processing (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1409: Yes), an ending command is set (S1410), and the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big win B (S1451).

In the processing of S1451, when it is determined that the lottery result is the jackpot A (S1451: No), since it is not necessary to provide the time saving state after the jackpot ends, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1451, when it is determined that the lottery result is the jackpot B (S1451: Yes), the process proceeds to S1452 in order to provide the time saving state after the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1452, the small hit variation pattern selection table for the time saving state (see FIGS. 102(b) and (c)) is set as the small hit variation pattern selection table for each special symbol (S1452), and the value of the time saving counter 203t is set to 8, and this process ends. As a result, the time-saving state can be imparted after the jackpot game based on the jackpot B is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, details of the small winning control process 5 (S1305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This small hit control process 5 (S1305) is different from the small hit control process (FIG. 47) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1651 to S1654 are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In small hit control processing 5 (S1305), the processing of S1601 to S1605 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1605: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit (S1651).

In the processing of S1651, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a small hit (S1651: Yes), in order to open the second variable winning device 650, the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set ( S1652), the process ends. In the process of S1651, when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit (S1651: No), in order to open the first variable winning device 65, a small win operation process is executed (S1616), End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1605: No), the process proceeds to S1607. In the process of S1607, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S1607), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol is a small hit (S1653).

In the processing of S1653, when it is determined that the first special symbol is a small hit (S1653: Yes), in order to close the second variable winning device 650, the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set ( S1654), the process ends. In the processing of S1653, when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit (S1653: No), in order to close the first variable winning device 65, the closing of the first variable winning device 65 is set ( S1608), the process ends.

According to this small hit control process 5 (S1305), when the first special symbol is small hit, the second variable winning device 650 provided on the left side of the game board is opened and closed (variable), and a so-called left-handed game can be played. can. In addition, when the second special symbol hits a small hit, the first variable winning device 65 provided on the right side of the game board can be opened and closed (variably) to allow a so-called right-handed game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the game board, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Then, the jackpot game and the small winning game of the special figure 1 are the games that enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small winning game of the special figure 2 is on the right side of the game board. A game (a so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball is entered into the provided first variable winning device 65 is assumed. Thereby, the game of the small winning game and the normal game of the special figure 1 can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operation for executing the game can be made the same), and frequently occurs It is possible to reduce the operation burden of the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1. - 特許庁

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in contrast to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a jackpot type is provided in which a time-saving game state, which is an advantageous state for the player after the jackpot game is completed, is provided. made it As a result, the player executes the game expecting that the time-saving game state will be provided after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115. FIG. In contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (that is, it is configured so that the variation that results in a big win is not forcibly stopped). As a result, for example, when the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is executed, the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is stopped first, so that the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is stopped first. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the change to an outlier. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a big win despite the execution (display) of an effect suggesting the occurrence of a big win, thereby preventing (suppressing) the players from lowering their willingness to participate. .

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a plurality of types of jackpots (jackets A1, A2, A3) are provided when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed. I have to. Then, according to the type of jackpot, the state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different. Thus, the game state can be shifted (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small win, but also when the lottery result is a big win, so that the game can be varied. It can improve the interest of people.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to execute (display) the SP ready-to-win effect when the lottery result is a big hit, unlike the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. As a result, the player can have a premonition of the arrival of a big win, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, even when the small win is shifted to the state B or the state C, the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small win) , Or, it is configured to execute (display) for special figure 2 small per. As a result, the frequency with which the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed increases, and thus the interest of the player can be improved. Since the state shifts to state B or state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's desire to play.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. 1. Part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110 is changed, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 108, an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 108(a) to (c) are an example of the effect mode of the SP ready-to-win effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment.

In this embodiment, SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) is executed (displayed) when the second special symbol is a jackpot, and when the first special symbol is a small hit, and when predetermined conditions are met SP reach production (special figure 1 small hit) is executed (displayed), and when it becomes a second special pattern small hit, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, SP reach production (special figure 2 small hit) is executed (displayed) ) is done.

In various SP ready-to-win effects, variable display is executed in a normal effect mode (see FIG. 108(a)). Then, after a predetermined period of time (two seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the characters "SUPER READY!!" are displayed at the top of the screen (see FIG. 108(b)). Thereafter, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 2 jackpot, a stop symbol (for example, "777" etc.) indicating a jackpot is displayed (not shown). As a result, the player can be notified that the jackpot has been won. In addition, since the player plays the game expecting that the SP ready-to-win effect will be displayed, the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 1 small hit or a special figure 2 small hit, after the characters "Super reach !!" "341" etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 108(c)). The stop symbol indicating the small hit is shaken up and down a predetermined number of times (2 to 8 times in this embodiment), and then becomes a complete stop display (still state). The number of times the stop symbol shakes is determined in advance according to the type of small hit won.

The relationship between the small hit type and the number of times the stop symbol sways is the same as in the second embodiment. Specifically, in the case of a small win A, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 19", the number of shakes is "twice", and if the value of the effect counter 223g is "20 to 49", the number of shakes. If the value of the effect counter 223g is "50 to 198", the number of swings will be "0 times".

In the case of the small win B, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 49", the number of swings is "4 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "50 to 99", the number of swings is "6 times". , if the value of the effect counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of swings is "0 times".

In the case of small win C, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 74", the number of swings is "6 times", and if the value of the effect counter 223g is "75 to 149", the number of swings is "8 times". Thus, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "150 to 198", the number of swings is "0".

In the case of a small hit D, if the value of the performance counter 223g is "0 to 99", the number of swings is "8 times", and if the value of the performance counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of swings is "0 times". becomes.

As a result, the player can predict the type of small winning won from the number of times the stop symbol shakes (that is, it is possible to predict the game state to be set), so the number of times the stop symbol shakes It is possible to attract the attention of the player and improve the interest of the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed, there is a case where a stop symbol indicating a small win is stopped and displayed. In this case, an effect in which the stop symbols sway is executed, and a privilege is given that the game state to be set can be predicted. As a result, even if a small win (not a big win) occurs after the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed, the player is prevented from losing motivation to participate in the game ( control).

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109(a) to 109(c). As shown in FIG. 109(a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13), and the content of the variation pattern selection table 202f is partially changed. , V passage time jackpot type selection table 202k is added, other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 109(b), the contents of the winning variation pattern selection table 202f, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f, will be described. The winning variation pattern selection table 202f is a table defining variation patterns to be selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 when a big win is achieved in each special symbol.

In the first special symbol, a special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern E is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

In the second special symbol, a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern F is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 109(c), the contents of the V passage jackpot type selection table 202k will be described. The V passing time jackpot type selection table 202k is a table that defines the jackpot type selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. When the V winning flag 203e is ON in the small winning ending process 6 (see FIG. 113), the V passing time jackpot type selection table 202k (that is, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the small winning game) , is referenced to select the jackpot type.

In the V passage time jackpot type selection table 202k, the jackpot A1 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "0 to 89" of the first hit type counter C2, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 "90 to 179". In contrast, a jackpot A2 (15R jackpot) is set, and a jackpot A3 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "180 to 198" of the first hit type counter C2. That is, the jackpot type selected based on the game ball passing through the V prize switch 65e3 has a probability of selecting the jackpot A1 set to 90/199 and a probability of selecting the jackpot A2 set to 90/199. is set, and the probability of jackpot A3 being selected is set to 19/199.

Here, "jackpot A1 (15R jackpot)" is a jackpot that shifts to state A after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds (1 round is 30 seconds or up to 10 balls won). A “jackpot A2 (15R jackpot)” is a jackpot that shifts to state B after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. A “jackpot A3 (15R jackpot)” is a jackpot that shifts to state C after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. In this way, it is possible to change the state to be shifted after that according to the jackpot type given based on passing through the V winning switch 65e3.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 110 to 113. FIG. First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, S451 to S453 are added to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. are different, and the other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the second special symbol jackpot is being executed (S451). In the processing of S451, when it is determined that the variation based on the second special symbol jackpot is not being executed (S451: No), the processing of S401 to S409 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S451, if it is determined that the variation based on the second special symbol jackpot is being executed (S451: Yes), the first special symbol lottery is not performed, and the lottery result is forcibly removed. , the process proceeds to S452.

In the process of S452, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to be lost (S452), the lost symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S453), and this process is terminated. . As a result, when the lottery result of the second special pattern becomes a big hit and the variation to become the big hit is started, it is possible to forcibly set a loss as the lottery result without performing the lottery of the first special pattern. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from simultaneously becoming a big win, and to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment, S851 to S853 are added to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. are different, and the other parts are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the variation based on the first special symbol jackpot is being executed (S851). In the processing of S851, if it is determined that the variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is not being executed (S851: No), the processing of S801 to S809 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and this processing ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S851, if it is determined that the variation based on the first special symbol jackpot is being executed (S851: Yes), the second special symbol lottery is not performed, and the lottery result is forcibly removed. , the process proceeds to S852.

In the process of S852, the lottery result of the second special design is set to be out (S852), the out design of the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S853), and this process is finished. . As a result, when the lottery result of the first special pattern becomes a big hit and the variation to become the big hit is started, the lottery result of the second special pattern is not drawn, and the loss can be forcibly set as the lottery result. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from simultaneously becoming a big win, and to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment differs from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes from S1471 to S1472 are added, and the other parts are are identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment, the processes from S1401 to S1409 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending of the jackpot game (S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to S1410. In the process of S1410, an ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1471.

In the processing of S1471, the state corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the state setting area 223h (S1471). Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A1, state A is set, when jackpot A2 is set, state B is set, and when jackpot A3 is set, state C is set (Fig. 109 (c)). Next, based on the state set in the process of S1471, the state counter 203k is set (S1472), a state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1473), and this process ends.

The status command set by the process of S1703 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201. , to the audio ramp controller 113 . The audio lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-state area 223h by receiving this state command (see S2210 in FIG. 53).

Next, the small hit ending process 6 (S1610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The small hit ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment differs from the small hit ending process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 49) in that the processing of S1851 to S1853 is added, and other The parts are identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the small winning ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment, the processes from S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is ON (S1802: Yes), then the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired (S1851).

Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the processing of S1851, the jackpot type is obtained from the V passage time jackpot type selection table 202k (S1852). A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type obtained in the process of S1852 is set (S1853), and the process proceeds to S1804. After executing the processing from S1804 to S1807, this processing ends. Since the processing from S1804 to S1807 is the same as in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. First, with reference to Drawing 114, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment, for the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 55), S2451 and S2452 processing instead of the processing of S2404 The only difference is that the execution is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment, the processing from S2401 to S2403 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. After that, the SP reach selection process is executed (S2451), and the process proceeds to S2452. Details of the SP reach selection process (S2451) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the SP reach is selected in the process of S2452 (S2452: No), the SP reach effect is executed (displayed) and the fusion effect is not executed (displayed), so the processes of S2405 to S2414 are skipped. , the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2451, when the SP reach is not selected (S2452: Yes), the processing of S2405 to S2414 is executed in order to execute (display) the fusion effect, and this processing ends. Note that the processing from S2405 to S2414 is the same as in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 115, the details of SP reach selection processing (S2451) performed within special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S2204) in a 6th embodiment are explained. This SP reach selection process (S2451) is a process for selecting the SP reach effect.

In the SP reach selection process (S2451), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101). In the process of S5101, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot (S5101: No), the process proceeds to S5102 in order to execute (display) the SP reach effect based on the jackpot.

In the process of S5102, SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) is selected (S5102), and this process is terminated. Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol jackpot is selected is the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds). Therefore, the performance time of the SP reach performance (special figure 2 jackpot) was also set to 9 seconds. As a result, the performance time of the SP ready-to-win performance (special figure 2 big win) can be matched with the fluctuation time of the second special symbol big win, and the performance without discomfort can be provided to the player. .

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit B or a small hit C. It is determined (S5103).

When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit A in the processing of S5103 (S5103: No), since it is a case of shifting to state A after the end of the small hit game, the SP reach effect is executed (displayed). In order to prevent this from happening, the processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit B or a small hit C in the process of S5103 (S5103: Yes), it is a case of transitioning to state B or state C after the end of the small hit game. , to execute (display) the SP reach effect, the process proceeds to S5104.

In the processing of S5104, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104). In the process of S5104, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: Yes), the variation of the first special symbol is greater than the variation of the second special symbol. is also stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105).

In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105: Yes), the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is SP Since it is within a range where reach production (per special figure 1 small) can be executed (displayed), SP reach production (per special figure 1 small) is selected (S5106), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than 8.7 seconds or longer than 9.7 seconds (S5105: No), the first special symbol Since the remaining variation time is not within the range in which the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) can be executed (displayed), the process is terminated as it is. When the SP reach effect (per special figure 1 small) is not selected, then the fusion effect is selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (see FIG. 114).

In the processing of S5104, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: No), the variation of the second special symbol is greater than the variation of the first special symbol. is also stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the variation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107).

In the process of S5107, when it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107: Yes), SP reach effect (special figure 2 small hit) is selected, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5107, when it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is not 9 seconds (S5107: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, according to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute (display) the SP reach production (special figure 2 small hit). As a result, the performance time of the SP ready-to-win performance (special figure 2 small win) can be matched with the variation time of the second special pattern small win, and the player can be provided with a performance without discomfort. can be done.

Thus, by executing (displaying) the SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the player can be made to feel the coming of the jackpot. can improve the interest of

In addition, when it becomes a small hit that moves to state B or state C, SP reach production (special figure 1 small hit) or SP reach production (special figure 2 jackpot), which is the same production mode as SP reach production Figure 2 small hit) is executed (displayed). As a result, the frequency with which the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed increases, and thus the interest of the player can be improved. Since the state shifts to state B or state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's desire to play.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a variation to become a big hit is started in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly drawn. It was configured to perform variation off. As a result, for example, when the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is executed, the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is stopped first, so that the variation of the jackpot based on the second special symbol is stopped first. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the change to an outlier. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a big win despite the execution (display) of an effect suggesting the occurrence of a big win, thereby preventing (suppressing) the players from lowering their willingness to participate. .

In the sixth embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types (jackpots A1, A2, A3) are provided when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed. Then, according to the type of jackpot, the state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different. Thus, the game state can be shifted (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small win, but also when the lottery result is a big win, so that the game can be varied. It can improve the interest of people.

The sixth embodiment may be combined with the fourth embodiment described above. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured so as not to forcibly stop the variation of the jackpot. As a result, in the fourth embodiment, although the second special symbol is reserved, the game ball enters the first winning hole 64a, and the second special symbol that becomes a big hit is forced to change. It is no longer necessary to display an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) for preventing the game from being stopped. This eliminates the need to display an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) that prompts the player to press the left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b, thereby reducing the operational burden on the player.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described third embodiment, when the lottery based on the first special symbol is continuously executed, each special symbol The configuration is such that the rear image is selected regardless of the variation pattern selection table set for. When the lottery based on the first special symbols is continuously executed, until the variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, until the back image with high expectation is displayed), the second There is a high possibility that an illegal game is being played in which game balls are entered little by little into the 1 winning hole 64a. Therefore, in this modified example, when such a fraudulent game is being played, a background image with a low degree of expectation (a background image of "town") is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal game described above from being executed.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, The difference is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the third It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the third embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 116(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 116(a), the ROM 222 of this modification differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 80) in that the content of the rear image selection table 222c is partially changed. They are different, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Details of the back image selection table 222c will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 116(b), the RAM223 of this modified example has a special figure 1 continuous lottery counter 223r and a table selection effect counter 223s added to the configuration of the RAM223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 80). are the same in other respects. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is a counter for counting (counting) the number of times the variation of the first special symbol is continuously executed. This special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is, in the fluctuation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118), when the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is on (that is, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started) 1 is added to, and is initialized to 0 when the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag is ON (ie, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started). The value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is referred to in the back image change processing 7 (see FIG. 119), and is set for each special symbol when it is determined that the value is 10 or more. Regardless of the variation pattern selection table, the back image of "town" is selected.

If the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is large (10 or more in this modification), until the variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, the back image with high expectation is displayed until it is done), there is a high possibility that a fraudulent game is being played, such as entering game balls little by little into the first winning hole 64a. Therefore, in this modified example, when such a fraudulent game is being played, a background image with a low degree of expectation (a background image of "town") is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal game described above from being executed.

The table selection effect counter 223s is a counter for determining which of a high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 and a low-reliability back image selection table 222c2, which will be described later, is used to select a back image. This table selection effect counter 223s is a counter value that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 3". Although not shown, like the effect counter 223g, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the rear image set in this modified example will be described. First, with reference to the determination value calculation pattern table of FIG. 117(a), a method of calculating a determination value for selecting a back image will be described. In this modification, each determination value is set in various tables (first short variation table, second long variation table, etc.) set for each special symbol. There are three kinds of determination values "0", "1", and "2" set in each table, and a larger determination value is set for a table that is more advantageous to the player. This determination value is used to determine the combination of the variation pattern selection table set for each special symbol.

Specifically, among the variation pattern selection tables set for the first special symbol, "0" is set as the determination value of the first short variation table, and "1" is set as the determination value of the first medium variation table. is set, and "2" is set as the determination value of the first long variation table. That is, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the determination value is set to increase as the variation pattern having a longer variation time is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, among the variation pattern selection tables set for the second special symbol, "0" is set as the determination value of the second long variation table, "1" is set as the determination value of the second medium variation pattern, "2" is set as the judgment value of the second short fluctuation pattern. That is, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the value of the determination value is set to increase as the variation pattern with a shorter variation time is likely to be selected.

Here, in this modified example, it is advantageous for the player if the variation of the second special symbol is stopped earlier than the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is long, it is advantageous for the player. That is, when the variation pattern selection table with the above-described large determination value is set as the variation pattern for the first special symbol, it is in an advantageous state for the player. Also, when the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is also advantageous for the player. That is, even when a variation pattern selection table with a large determination value is set as the variation pattern for the second special symbol, the player is in an advantageous state.

As a result, as a combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol, when a variation pattern selection table with a large determination value is set for each special symbol, it is very advantageous for the player. state. That is, the larger the value obtained by summing the determination values of the variation pattern selection table for each set special symbol, the more advantageous the player is.

Therefore, in this modified example, a background image suggesting a degree of advantage for the player is selected based on the total value of the judgment values described above and the value of the effect counter 223g. Although the details will be described later, the higher the total value of the judgment values, the more likely it is that a back image with a high degree of expectation will be selected. is configured so that the rear image with a low .DELTA. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process of selecting the back image that suggests the degree of advantage for the player, and reduce the processing load.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117(b), the contents of the rear image selection table 222c in this modified example will be described. The back image selection table 222c is a table that is referred to when selecting a back image in back image change processing 7 (S2651). The back image selection table 222c is provided with a high reliability back image selection table 222c1 and a low reliability back image selection table 222c2. The back image selection table for each reliability level defines back images similar to those in the fourth embodiment ("city", "mountain", "sand beach", "seabed", "fish school" in descending order of expectation). ing.

Although the details will be described later, in the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1, when the sum of the discrimination values is small (“0”), the back image with high expectation (the back image of “bottom of the sea”) is specified not to be selected. Conversely, when the total value of the discrimination values is large ("4"), the back image with low expectations ("town" back image) is not selected. On the other hand, in the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2, even if the total value of the discrimination values is small (“0”), the back image with high expectation (the back image of “bottom of the sea”) is selected. It is stipulated that it may be selected. In addition, even if the sum of the discrimination values is large ("4"), it is stipulated that there is a possibility that the back image with low expectations (back image of "town") will be selected. there is That is, the back image set based on the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 makes it easy to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage for the player) set for each special symbol. This results in a so-called back image with high reliability. On the other hand, the back image set based on the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2 makes it difficult to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage for the player) set for each special symbol. This results in a so-called rear image with low reliability.

Details of the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 will now be described with reference to FIG. 117(c). In the back image setting process 7 (see FIG. 119) described later, the high reliability back image selection table 222c1 has a value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter smaller than 10, and a value of the effect counter 223g is "151 to 198 , it is referred to select the back image (see S5055 in FIG. 119).

When the total value of the determination values of the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the production counter 223g A background image of "town" is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223g, a background image of "mountain" is set for the value "100 to 189" of the effect counter 223g, and a value "190" of the effect counter 223g is set. 198” is set with a back image of “sand beach”.

When the total value of the judgment values is "1", the background image of "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 149" for the effect counter 223g is set. , the back image of "mountain" is set, and the back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "2", the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "100 to 179" for the effect counter 223g is set. , the back image of "sand beach" is set, and the back image of "bottom of the sea" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "3", the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 149" for the effect counter 223g is set. , the back image of "sand beach" is set, and the back image of "bottom of the sea" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "4", the back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 179" for the effect counter 223g is set. , the back image of "bottom of the sea" is set, and the back image of "school of fish" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

Next, the details of the low-reliability rear image selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 117(d). In the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2, in the back image setting process 7 (see FIG. 119), which will be described later, the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is less than 10, and the value of the table selection effect counter 223s If it is "0 to 2", it is referred to select the back image (see S5054 in FIG. 119).

When the total value of the determination values of the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the production counter 223g A background image of "town" is set for the value "0-99" of the effect counter 223g, a background image of "mountain" is set for the value "100-149" of the effect counter 223g, and a value "150" of the effect counter 223g is set. A back image of "sand beach" is set for the values "189 to 189", and a back image of "sea bottom" is set for the values "190 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

When the total value of the judgment values is "1", the background image of "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 149" for the effect counter 223g is set. , a back image of "mountain" is set, a back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "150 to 179" of the effect counter 223g, and a "bottom of the ocean" is set for the value "180 to 189" of the effect counter 223g. back image is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "2", the background image of "town" is set for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and the value "50 to 99" for the effect counter 223g is set. , a back image of "mountain" is set, a back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "100 to 179" of the effect counter 223g, and a "bottom of the ocean" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g. back image is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "3", the back image of "town" is selected for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223g, , a back image of "mountain" is set, a back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the effect counter 223g, and a "bottom of the ocean" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g. back image is set.

When the total value of the determination values is "4", the back image of "town" is selected for the value "0 to 49" of the effect counter 223g, and for the value "50 to 99" of the effect counter 223g, , the back image of "mountain" is set, the back image of "sand beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the effect counter 223g, and the "bottom of the ocean" is set for the value "150 to 189" of the effect counter 223g. is set, and the back image of "fish school" is set for the value "190 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. First, the variable display setting process 7 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The variable display setting process 7 (S2113) in the modified example of the third embodiment has the processing of S2671 and S2672 added to the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 89) in the third embodiment. The difference is that the back image change processing 7 (S2651) is executed instead of the image change processing (see FIG. 90), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the fluctuation display setting process 7 (S2113), first, as in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c is ON in the process of S2601 (S2601: Yes), S2602 and The process of S2603 is executed. When the processing of S2603 is finished, 1 is added to the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r (S2671), and the processing proceeds to S2604.

In the processing of S2604, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S2604: Yes), the processing of S2605 and S2606 is executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment. When the processing of S2606 is finished, the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S2672), and the processing proceeds to S2607.

In this way, until the variation based on the second special symbol is started, the value of the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r is not initialized, and each time the variation based on the first special symbol is started. will be added. As a result, when the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is large, the game ball is not entered into the second winning hole 64b, and the game ball is entered only into the first winning hole 64a. can be determined to be running.

In the processing from S2607 to S2612, the same processing as the processing from S2607 to S2612 of the third embodiment is executed. Thereafter, back image change processing 7 is executed (S2651), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 119, the back image selection process 7 (S2651) executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118) will be described. The rear image selection process 7 (S2651) in the modified example of the third embodiment adds the processes of S5051 to S5055 in place of the process of S5003 to the rear image selection process (see FIG. 90) of the third embodiment. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the back image selection process 7 (S2651), first, similarly to the third embodiment, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed, and the set variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol for The variation pattern selection table is discriminated (S5001, S5002).

When the processing of S5002 is finished, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter is 10 or more (S5051). In the process of S5051, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter is 10 or more (S5051: No), until the variation pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, the degree of expectation until a rear image with a high value is displayed), there is a high possibility that an illegal game is being played such that game balls are gradually entered into the first winning hole 64a. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the set variation pattern selection table for each special symbol, the back image of "town" is selected (S5052), and the process proceeds to S5004. As a result, even if a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set, the background image with a high degree of expectation is not set, thereby preventing (suppressing) execution of the above-described fraudulent game. can be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter is smaller than 10 (S5051: Yes), the back based on the variation pattern selection table set for each special symbol To set the image, the process proceeds to S5053.

In the processing of S5053, it is determined whether or not the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 0 to 2 (S5053). In the process of S5053, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223s for table selection is between 0 and 2 (S5053: Yes), a back image is selected using the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2 (S5054). , S5004. Since the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, the probability that the back image is selected using the low-reliability back image selection table 222c2 is 3/4. (75%).

On the other hand, in the process of S5053, if it is determined that the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 3 (S5053: No), a back image is selected using the highly reliable back image selection table 222c1 and the effect counter 223. (S5055), and the process proceeds to S5004. Since the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, the probability that the back image is selected using the high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 is 1/4. (25%).

After the process of S5004, the processes of S5004 to S5007 are executed in the same manner as in the third embodiment, and this process ends.

As described above, in the modification of the third embodiment, the rear image is set based on the combination of the variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol (that is, the degree of advantage for the player). be. In this case, until a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set (that is, until a back image with a high degree of expectation is displayed), the game ball is allowed to enter the first winning hole 64a little by little. A game may be played. Therefore, in this modification, it is determined by counting the special figure 1 continuous lottery number counter 223r that the game ball has entered only the first winning hole 64a. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered only the first winning hole 64a, regardless of the set variation pattern selection table for each special symbol, the back image (" It is configured to set the back image of the city). As a result, even if a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player is set, the background image with a high degree of expectation is not set.

In this modification, a determination value is given to the variation pattern selection table for each special symbol based on the degree of advantage for the player. Then, based on the sum of the determination values of the variation pattern selection table for each set special symbol, the degree of advantage for the player is determined, and the rear image is selected. Therefore, it is not necessary to prescribe the degree of advantage for the player according to all the combinations of the set variation pattern selection tables for each special symbol. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process of selecting the back image that suggests the degree of advantage for the player, and reduce the processing load.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, a variation pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the special symbol lottery is performed once) is displayed. is used to select the variation pattern of each special symbol. As a result, even after the jackpot game ends, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are partially changed. The difference is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the main controller 110 has been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fourth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the fourth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 120(a), the configuration of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in this modification will be described. In this modification, part of the variation pattern selection table 202f in the ROM 202 is changed. FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table 202f in the variation pattern selection table 202f. Since other configurations of the ROM 202 are the same as those of the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (in this modification, until the variation is executed once), the variation of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation of the first special symbol. A variation pattern is defined. As a result, when the game ball enters the second winning port 64b during the jackpot game and the winning of the second special symbol is suspended, after the jackpot game ends, the second special symbol changes to the first special symbol. It will be in a state where it is stopped before the fluctuation of the pattern. That is, it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player.

Specifically, when the number of remaining selections after the end of the jackpot is 1 or more, in the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198", the special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set, and in the second special design, a special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120(b), the configuration of RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 in this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the RAM 203 of this modified example has a remaining selection count 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot and a The difference is that the number of remaining selections 203v is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the variation of the first special symbol is executed once). is. This special figure 1 remaining selection count after the end of the jackpot 203u is set to 1 when it is determined that it is the timing of the ending of the jackpot game in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 123) (see S1491 in FIG. 123), In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 121), when a variation pattern is selected from the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table, 1 is subtracted (see S552 in FIG. 121).

After the end of the special figure 2 jackpot, the number of remaining selections 203v is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the second special symbol is changed once). is. This special figure 2 after the end of the jackpot remaining selection number 203v is set to 1 when it is determined that it is the timing of the ending of the jackpot game in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 123) (see S1492 in FIG. 123), In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 122), when a variation pattern is selected from the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table, 1 is subtracted (see S952 in FIG. 122).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 121, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) in the modification of the fourth embodiment is the process from S551 to S554 for the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment. is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304), first, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S501 to S505 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S551.

In the processing of S551, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is greater than 0 (S551). In the process of S551, if it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S551: No), the current game state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, the fluctuation is executed once). In this case, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, if it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1 (S551: Yes), the current game state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S552 to process.

In the process of S552, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot (S552), and the process proceeds to S553. In the process of S553, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot that has been subtracted is 0 (S553). In addition, in this modification, since the value set to the remaining selection frequency 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1, the subtracted remaining selection frequency 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S553, if it is determined that the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S553: Yes), the current game state (state A to C ) is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S553, when it is determined that the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is not 0 (S553: No), the process of S554 is skipped and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) in the modification of the fourth embodiment is the process from S951 to S954 for the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 38) in the fourth embodiment. is added, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704), first, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S901 to S905 are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S951.

In the process of S951, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is greater than 0 (S951). In the process of S951, if it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S951: No), the current game state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, the fluctuation is executed once). In this case, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S951, if it is determined that the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1 (S951: Yes), the current game state is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S952 to process.

In the process of S952, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot (S952), and the process proceeds to S953. In the process of S953, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining selections 203u after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot that has been subtracted is 0 (S953). In addition, in this modification, since the value set to the remaining selection frequency 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1, the subtracted remaining selection frequency 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S953, if it is determined that the value of the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S953: Yes), the current game state (state A to C ) is set, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S953, when it is determined that the value of the number of remaining selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is not 0 (S953: No), the process of S954 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the jackpot control process 8 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 8 (S1304) in the modification of the fourth embodiment differs from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 45) in the fourth embodiment in that the processes from S1491 to S1493 are added, and other The points are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S1304), first, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1401 to S1409 are executed. In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is time for the ending of the jackpot game (S1409), an ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1491.

In the process of S1491, 1 is set to the special figure 1 jackpot residual variation frequency 203u (S1491), and then 1 is set to the special figure 2 jackpot residual variation frequency 203v (S1492). It is possible to determine whether or not the game state is a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game by setting each big hit remaining fluctuation frequency by the processing of S1491 and S1492.

When the process of S1492 is completed, the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table 202f is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol (S1493). Then, as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the after-big-hit variation pattern selection table 202f is set (S1494), and this process is terminated. By the processing of S1493 and S1494, in a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to execute a variation with a variation pattern (the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first) different from the normal time.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the special symbol lottery is performed once), the player Using an advantageous variation pattern selection table, it is configured to select a variation pattern for each special symbol. As a result, even after the jackpot game ends, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Feature A group> (At the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 due to simultaneous fluctuation, the special figure 1 is always fluctuating)
A first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entering means for setting a period during which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means. a control means for dynamically displaying the first identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; and, based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, a display means for dynamically displaying second identification information; and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means; The ball-entering control means is characterized in that when the second ball-entering means is set to the enterable period, it is within a predetermined period after the game ball enters the first ball-entering means. Gaming machine A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine A1, a first ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means that is different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball can enter the second ball entering means. a ball entry control means for setting a period of time; and the first identification information is dynamically displayed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information based on the ball being thrown, and privilege granting for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means. and, when the second ball-entering means is set to the period in which the ball can be entered, the ball-entering control means has a predetermined time after the game ball enters the first ball-entering means. It is within the period. As a result, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the game ball enters the first entering means first, so the dynamic display of the first identification information is performed first. Since it has been executed, the dynamic display of the second identification information to which the privilege can be granted can be configured to be executed later, and the player is expected to display the first identification information in anticipation of the dynamic display of the second identification information. A dynamic display can be shown. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, since the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information can be suppressed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive awarding of benefits.

In the gaming machine A1, the ball entry control means is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. A variable member and variable control means for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is established, and the one state is defined as a period during which the game ball can be entered. (2) a game machine A2, wherein the variable member is variable by the variable control means;

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry control means is a variable member that can be varied between a first state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. and variable control means for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is established, and the variable member is set to the one state as a period during which the game ball can be entered. The member is made variable by the variable control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the second identification information is dynamically displayed before the first identification information.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the privilege granting means can grant a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the privilege when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privilege giving means can give a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the privilege when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the dynamic display of the second identification information.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second ball entering means provides a first dynamic display period shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information after the game ball enters the first ball entering means. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is arranged in a position where a ball can be entered within a period.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball-entering means is positioned within a first period shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information after the game ball has entered the first ball-entering means. It is placed in Therefore, there is an effect that a game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means; When the dynamic display displayed with the information and the dynamic display displayed with the specific second identification information are executed at the same time, the dynamic display displayed first with the predetermined first identification information. and termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the specific second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information when the is finished. A game machine A5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, dynamic display executing means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and dynamic display displayed with the predetermined first identification information. , and the dynamic display displayed with the specific second identification information are simultaneously executed, and when the dynamic display first displayed with the predetermined first identification information is completed, the specific a terminating means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information by displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information. Therefore, it is possible to change the advantage and the disadvantage according to the dynamic display period respectively executed by the first identification information and the second identification information, and it is possible to provide the player with novel game characteristics.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A5, the ball entry control means includes detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball that will enter the first ball entry means, and detection by the detection means. and period determination means for determining a period for the variable member to be varied from the first state to the second state by the variable control means based on the above.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the ball entry control means includes detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball that will enter the first ball entry means, and the variable control means based on the detection by the detection means. and period determining means for determining a period for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to change the profit given to the player according to the period determined by the period determining means, and to improve the interest of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 has determining means for performing determination based on whether a game ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and specified by the determining means A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means when the determination result of (1) is determined.

According to the gaming machine A7, when a specific determination result is determined in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a privilege advantageous to the player is given, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved. .

In the gaming machine A7, when a special determination result is determined by the determining means, a special privilege more advantageous to the player than the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. Machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, a special benefit that is even more advantageous to the player is provided, so there is an effect that the game can be made fresh.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and a ball enters in the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state based on the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition and the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and variable control means for varying the state, wherein the privilege granting means grants a special privilege that is more advantageous than the privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. A game machine A9 to play.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the player can expect that the game ball entering the variable ball entry means will pass through the specific area, thereby improving the game. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

<Feature B group> (Simultaneous fluctuation, setting the deviation to a small hit, short opening for special 1 small hit, long opening for special 2 small hit)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first ball entering means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. determining means for performing determination and performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means; first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination; display means for simultaneously displaying the second identification information based on the determination result of the determination; and dynamic display capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. execution means; dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; When the first identification information is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the game is played rather than the first privilege game. and the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result at the same time. When the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends earlier, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result terminating means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the display with the second identification information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result. Game machine B1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine B1, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. Based on that, a first determination is performed, a determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second determination based on the determination result of the first determination display means for simultaneously displaying the first identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; and dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. a dynamic display execution means capable of executing the dynamic display execution means; a dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; When the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed, the A privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result and the specific second determination result. When the second identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends first, the specific second determination result a termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second identification information indicating the discrimination result based on the discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result; , has Therefore, by stopping the dynamic display of the second identification information before the dynamic display of the first identification information, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player, and to provide novel game characteristics. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, a specific ball entry means into which a game ball can enter and a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. a special privilege game execution means for executing; and an operation means for operating a ball entry guide member with a first action in which a game ball is likely to enter the specific ball entry means and a second action in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first action. , wherein the operation means is capable of executing the first operation more easily when the second bonus game is executed than the first bonus game.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means and the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game is executed. a privilege game execution means; and an operation means for operating a ball-entering guide member in a first operation in which a game ball easily enters the specific ball-entering means and in a second operation in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first operation. However, the operating means is easier to execute the first action when the second privilege game is executed than the first privilege game. Therefore, by the second privilege game executed when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the privilege to the player is variable depending on whether or not the game ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the player in multiple stages.

In the gaming machine B2, the operating means sets a period for operating the ball-entering induction member to a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means in the first action longer than in the second action. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operating means sets the period of operating the ball-entering induction member to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means in the first action longer than in the second action. be. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to switch between advantageous and disadvantageous conditions with easy control, and the control load can be reduced.

In a game machine B2 or B3, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game and variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is established, wherein the specific ball entry means is the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where a game ball entered into the is allowed to enter.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, by executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the variable ball entry means is set to the first state, and the specific ball entry means is switched to the specific ball entry means. is given, there is an effect that the value of the first privilege game or the second privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, when the first bonus game is executed, the operation means executes the first operation before the variable ball-entering means enters the first state, and then performs the first operation. 2 action is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the first action is executed during the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the first state. Game machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means during the second privilege game, and the value of the second privilege game can be improved.

In either gaming machine B4 or B5, the first privilege game and the second privilege game are those in which the variable ball entering means is varied to the first state the same number of times. B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4 or B5, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the difference between the first privilege game and the second privilege game from being determined from the operation of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that whether or not to enter the specific ball entering means is determined from the type of privilege game.

<Feature C group> (Giving types to the small hits, switching the special 2 fluctuation table with the special 1 small hit)
determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; Display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result. A game machine C1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine C1, the first determination is performed based on the establishment of the first condition and the second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result of and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; and displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result It has a variable control means for varying. Therefore, by displaying the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result, the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is changed, so that the playability is changed according to the determination result of the first determination. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C1, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine C2, characterized in that it has privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege when the second privilege is given.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege. Therefore, since the dynamic display period during which the second discrimination is determined which is advantageous to the player is varied according to the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information which is less profitable. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display executing means is configured to dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first. Then, a termination means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine C3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first, the specific and end means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting that the second identification information will be dynamically displayed in a short dynamic display period. .

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is preferentially performed based on a predetermined priority condition, and the dynamic display of the identification information set to be prioritized is preferentially performed. A game machine C4 characterized in that it has a priority means for playing.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is preferentially set based on a predetermined priority condition. It has priority means for preferentially performing dynamic display of identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information in any one of game machines C1 to C4; setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means, wherein the setting means is configured such that the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result is A game machine C5 characterized in that it is configured to be able to variably set the dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information based on the display.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the dynamic display period determination means can determine the dynamic display period. setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group for which the target display period is determined, and the setting means, based on the display of the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result, The dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage/advantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player receives more than the first privilege and the second privilege. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that an advantageous special privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C5, there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting a special determination result.

A gaming machine C7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the second privilege is set so that the special privilege is granted when a special condition is established.

According to the game machine C7, when the special condition is established in any one of the game machines C2 to C6, a special privilege is given, so that a further privilege advantageous to the player can be given. , there is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C7, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and a ball enters in the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition, and the second privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and variable control means for changing the state to the first state, wherein the privilege imparting means imparts the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. .

According to the gaming machine C8, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball entering the variable ball entering means will pass through the specific area, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Feature D group> (always SP in small hits where special 2 variation patterns are switched)
determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition; display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result by the determination means; and movement of the first identification information on the display means. dynamic display means for displaying a target; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result; When the first identification information indicating the determination result of is displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means a specific ball-entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first action for allowing a game ball to enter the specific ball-entering means, and a second action for making the ball-entering more difficult than the first action; and an operation means for operating an operation member; and an award granting means for imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means, wherein the privilege granting means The privilege is given even when the first identification information based on the determination result by the means is displayed, and the first dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determination means The mode includes at least a special dynamic display mode in which a determination ratio is set high in the case of the special determination result, and the special dynamic display mode is the predetermined determination result. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the above.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine D1, based on the establishment of the first condition, the determination means for executing the first determination, the display means for displaying the first identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the display means dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; and dynamic display means for determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result. display mode determination means; privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating a predetermined determination result is displayed; When a game is executed, a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first action for allowing a game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and a ball entry more difficult than the first action. and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, wherein The privilege granting means grants the privilege even when the first identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed as a special determination result, and is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. In the first dynamic display mode, at least a special dynamic display mode in which a determination ratio is set high in the case of the special determination result is set, and the special dynamic display mode is the predetermined is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the determination result of . Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the determination means executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and the display means is based on the determination result of the second determination. The second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the bonus game execution means displays the second identification information based on a specific determination result. The gaming machine D2 is characterized by being constructed so as to be able to execute a second privilege game having a smaller privilege than the first privilege game when information is displayed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means executes the second determination based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and the display means performs the second determination based on the determination result of the second determination. Information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the bonus game execution means displays the second identification information based on a specific determination result. When the second privilege game is executed, the second privilege game having fewer privileges than the first privilege game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the advantage or disadvantage for the player between the first discrimination and the second discrimination, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the second privilege game is set to have a period in which the action member is in the first action shorter than that of the first privilege game.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the second privilege game is set to have a shorter period in which the action member is the first motion than the first privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to easily make it difficult to be imparted.

The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which a privilege is given by the privilege giving means with a high degree of expectation.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode with a high degree of expectation that a privilege will be given by the privilege giving means. Since the first privilege game is executed even if is not given, there is an effect that the disappointment of the player can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. Machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, the first identification information and the second identification information can be dynamically displayed at the same time in any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, so there is an effect that the game can be played efficiently. .

Termination means for forcibly terminating one dynamic display based on the termination of one dynamic display when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time in the game machine D5. A gaming machine D6 characterized by having:

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the end means forcibly ends the dynamic display of one of the machines in accordance with the end timing of the dynamic display of the other, so that the game can be played more efficiently. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D6, when the dynamic display is forcibly terminated by the termination means, it is regulated that a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the identification information for which the dynamic display is terminated. A game machine D7 characterized in that it has control means for

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, there is an effect that gambling can be suppressed by restricting the awarding of the privilege by the restricting means.

<Feature E group> (switches between special 1 and special 2 variation tables based on the number of variations)
determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; Display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result and second identification information based on the second determination result that is the determination result of the second determination, and the specific first determination result on the display means or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player; Dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, and a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means and a dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information by the dynamic display period determination means. A first dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is set and a second dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are set group determining means for determining each type, wherein the group determining means changes the type of each of the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group based on establishment of a change condition; The game machine E1 is characterized in that it is determined by

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine E1, the first determination is performed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the first determination result, which is the determination result of the second determination, and second identification information based on the second determination result, which is the determination result of the second determination, respectively; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on the specific first determination result or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed; dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying said first identification information and said second identification information simultaneously on said display means; and said first identification information dynamically displayed by said dynamic display execution means. dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a dynamic display period of the first identification information by the dynamic display period determination means A first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set for determining a second dynamic display period in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information and a group determining means for determining each type of the dynamic display period group, wherein the group determining means selects the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display based on the establishment of a change condition. This is determined by changing the type of the period group. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display executing means, either one of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result ends before the other dynamic display is displayed with the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to the predetermined determination result, and the game machine E2 has stopping means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are simultaneously dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the first identification information and the second identification information, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result precedes the other the other dynamic display is displayed with the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to the predetermined determination result to forcibly stop the dynamic display. , the player can expect the dynamic display of the second identification information to end first.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a dynamic display period longer than a predetermined first period is determined in the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. a long first dynamic display period group and a long second dynamic display period group, and a short first dynamic display period group and a short second dynamic display period in which a dynamic display period shorter than the first period is likely to be determined A game machine E3 characterized in that at least a display period group is set.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means have a predetermined number of A long first dynamic display period group and a long second dynamic display period group in which a dynamic display period longer than one period is likely to be determined, and a short first dynamic display period in which a dynamic display period shorter than the first period is likely to be determined. Since at least the dynamic display period group and the short second dynamic display period group are set, there is an effect that the game characteristics can be varied by switching the dynamic display mode group.

A gaming machine E4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E2 or E3, the predetermined determination result is set to a determination result that does not give a privilege advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, since no privilege advantageous to the player is given, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling nature.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which it is difficult to enter a ball, and based on the execution of the privilege game, and variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that the player can easily understand that the privilege game is being executed. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

In the gaming machine E5, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter, a regulation state that regulates the game ball from entering the specific area, and a release state that cancels the regulation. and a variable means that can be varied between and, and the privilege game execution means executes a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game when a game ball enters the specific area. A game machine E6 characterized by:

In the gaming machine E6, the variable means is set to the released state in the privilege game executed based on the specific second determination result, rather than in the privilege game executed based on the specific first determination result. The game machine E7 is characterized in that it is set to be easily variable.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the second identification information stops earlier than the first identification information, so that the player can be more advantageous.

<Feature F group> (With no special 1 reservation, special 2 reservation 1 configuration, aiming to win special 2 during big hit or small hit)
A first determination is performed based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entering the first ball entering means. , determining means for executing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; first identification information based on a first determination result, which is the result of the first determination by the determining means; Display means for displaying second identification information based on the second determination result, which is the determination result of the second determination, and first identification information based on the specific first determination result is displayed on the display means. When the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is executed. 2. Privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game; dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means; and the dynamic display thereof. dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by execution means; storage means for storing the execution right of the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means when the target is displayed; 1 When the identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information during the dynamic display period is performed other than the specific first determination result. or end means for forcibly displaying a determination result other than the specific second determination result to end the dynamic display, wherein the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display of the first identification information The dynamic display period of the second identification information longer than the display period is easily determined, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed, the determination is stored in the storage means and execution right control means for making it difficult for the right to be stored and for facilitating the storage of the right for execution in the storage means when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine F1 characterized by:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine F1, based on the first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the ball entering the first ball entering means, , determining means for executing the first determination and performing the second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; display means for displaying the first identification information based on the first identification information and the second identification information based on the second identification result, which is the identification result of the second identification, respectively; When the first identification information is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the second privilege game is higher than the first privilege game. Bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game advantageous to the player, and dynamic display execution capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means and a dynamic display period of the second identification information; A memory for storing the execution right of the second discrimination by the discriminating means up to a predetermined number of times based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. means for dynamically displaying the first identification information or the second identification information during a dynamic display period when the specific first identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed; end means for forcibly displaying a determination result other than the first determination result or the specific second determination result to end the dynamic display, and the dynamic display period determination means includes the The dynamic display period of the second identification information longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is configured to be easily determined, and when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is not executed Execution right control means for making it difficult for the discrimination right to be stored in the storage means and for facilitating storage of the execution right in the storage means when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed. and Therefore, since the player can play the game in anticipation that the execution right will be memorized during the privilege game, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second ball entering means has a delay means for delaying the entry of game balls one by one at an interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the second ball entry means has a delay means for delaying the entry of game balls one by one at intervals equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily suppress the storage of execution rights.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the predetermined interval is configured to be shorter than the execution period of the first privilege game.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the predetermined interval is configured in a period shorter than the execution period of the first privilege game, so that the first privilege game is executed. There is an effect that execution rights can be easily stored when executed.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is provided a specific area into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the specific area, and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. a variable member that can be varied between two states; and variable control means for varying the variable member between the second state and the first state, wherein the variable control means When the first privilege game is executed, it is easier to change the variable member to the first state than the second state, and when the second privilege game is executed, the variable member is changed to the second state. The game machine F4 is characterized in that it is easier to change to the second state than the first state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to change between a specific area into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the specific area, and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. and variable control means for changing the variable member to either the second state or the first state, wherein the variable control means executes the first privilege game. In this case, it is easier to change the variable member to the first state than the second state, and when the second privilege game is executed, the variable member is changed to the second state rather than the first state Since it is easy to change the value, the benefits can be provided step by step, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game and variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means to the open state based on the above.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the variable ball entry means is opened based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, so the first privilege game Alternatively, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the second privilege game is being played.

In the gaming machine F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the specific area is arranged at a position where a game ball entering the variable ball entering means can enter.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the specific area based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and the interest of the game. have the effect of improving

In any one of the game machines F2 to F6, the game machine F7 is characterized in that the delay means has a rolling surface capable of rolling the game ball for a period equal to or longer than the predetermined interval.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F2 to F6, there is an effect that a predetermined interval or more can be secured by the rolling surface that can be rolled for a period of the predetermined interval or more. be.

<Characteristic group G> (configuration for regulating the occurrence of hold in particular 2)
A first determination is performed based on a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entering the first ball entering means. , determining means for executing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; first identification information based on a first determination result, which is the result of the first determination by the determining means; Display means for displaying second identification information based on the second determination result, which is the determination result of the second determination, and first identification information based on the specific first determination result is displayed on the display means. When the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is executed. 2. Privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and dynamic display execution thereof dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by means; storage means for storing the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means when displayed; A state setting means capable of switching between a first state in which the execution right is easily stored and a second state in which the execution right is less likely to be stored than the first state is provided. Game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine G1, a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and a ball entering the first ball-entering means , determining means for executing the first determination and performing the second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; display means for displaying the first identification information based on the first identification information and the second identification information based on the second identification result, which is the identification result of the second identification, respectively; When the first identification information is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the second privilege game is higher than the first privilege game. Bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game advantageous to the player, and dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means and a dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively; Storage means for storing the right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entry means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. and state setting means capable of switching and setting a first state in which the execution right is easily stored in the storage means and a second state in which the execution right is less likely to be stored than in the first state. is. Therefore, since it is possible to make it a special state that the game ball enters the second ball entering means continuously, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising a delay means for delaying the ball-entering interval of the game ball to a first interval or more when the game ball enters the second ball-entering means. Machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the delay means for delaying the ball entering interval to the first interval or more. , there is an effect that it is possible to easily suppress the continuous entry of game balls into the second ball entry means.

In the gaming machine G2, the delay means is arranged at a position that can be guided to the second ball entering means, and is capable of rolling the game ball for the first period or more, and the rolling means is: A gaming machine G3, further comprising a guide section for guiding a game ball that has rolled for the first period or longer to the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the delay means is arranged at a position that can be guided to the second ball entering means, and the rolling means capable of rolling the game ball for the first period or more, and the rolling means are arranged in the first and a guide section for guiding a game ball that has rolled for a period or longer to the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution right from being stored during a period other than the privilege game.

In the gaming machines G1 to G3, the state setting means is characterized by switching to and setting the first state based on execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game. Gaming machine G4.

In the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed, so that the execution right is easily stored, and only the dynamic display of the second identification information is performed. There is an effect that it can be easily done. Therefore, there is an effect that the second privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be easily executed.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game are executed. variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means to the open state, a specific area into which the game ball entering the variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the fact that the player has entered the ball.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, by executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the specific area is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved. Note that, as a privilege provided by the privilege providing means, the variable ball entry means may be left open until a predetermined condition is satisfied, or the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or second determination result may be set high. corresponds to

In the gaming machine G5, the gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the second privilege game is set such that the game ball enters the specific area more easily than the first privilege game.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the execution of the second privilege game makes it easier to give a privilege, and the execution right to dynamically display the second identification information is stored. has the effect of making it more valuable.

<Feature H group> (Giving types to the small hits, switching the special 2 fluctuation table with the special 1 small hit.Transition with the number of fluctuations on the special figure 1 side)
determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; Display means for displaying the identification information and the second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information is satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the ball entrance that is opened as a privilege game, and there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine H1, the first determination is performed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result of and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; and displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information, and dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information is established. It has variable control means for varying the period. Therefore, the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is varied by establishing the variable condition that is established by displaying the first identification information, so that the interest of the game can be improved. There is If second identification information with a short change time is likely to be selected, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed efficiently. Here, the variable condition corresponds to the display mode in which the first identification information is displayed, the number of times of dynamic display is a predetermined number of times, and the like.

In the gaming machine H1, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine H2, characterized in that it has privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege when the second privilege is given.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. It has privilege giving means for giving a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the second major privilege. Therefore, since the dynamic display period during which the second discrimination is determined which is advantageous to the player is varied according to the discrimination result of the first discrimination, the player is also interested in the display of the first identification information which is less profitable. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine H2, the variable condition is established when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed.

According to the gaming machine H3, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the first privilege having less privilege than the second privilege is executed. There is an effect that the establishment of the variable condition can be expected and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the game machine H2, the variable condition is established based on the number of dynamic display times of the first identification information reaching a predetermined number of times or exceeding a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed can make the player interested, and the effect of improving the amusement of the game can be obtained. be.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display execution means is configured to dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. When the first identification information based on the determination result of and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ending means for ending the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result when finished first. A gaming machine H5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means at the same time. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first, the specific and end means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting that the second identification information will be dynamically displayed in a short dynamic display period. .

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display of the identification information set to have priority is given priority based on a priority condition predetermined for the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that it has a priority means for executing the game.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is preferentially based on a predetermined priority condition. Since there is a priority means for preferentially executing the dynamic display of the set identification information, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of game machines H1 to H6, dynamic display period determination means capable of respectively determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information; setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means, wherein the setting means determines the second The game machine H7 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to variably set the dynamic display period group corresponding to the identification information.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the dynamic display period determination means can determine the dynamic display period. and setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which a target display period is determined, wherein the setting means sets the dynamic display period corresponding to the second identification information based on the establishment of the variable condition. It is configured such that the display period group can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage/advantage of the game can be easily changed by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H7, when a special determination result is determined by the first determination or the second determination by the determination means, the player is more likely to receive the first privilege than the second privilege. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that an advantageous special privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting a special determination result.

A gaming machine H9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines H2 to H8, the second privilege is set so that the special privilege is granted when a special condition is established.

According to the gaming machine H9, when the special condition is satisfied in any one of the gaming machines H2 to H8, a special benefit is granted, so that a benefit advantageous to the player can be further granted. , there is an effect that the attractiveness of the second privilege can be improved.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H9, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and a ball enters in the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the specific area where the game ball can be entered based on the establishment of the passing condition, and the second privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and variable control means for varying the state to a first state, wherein the privilege imparting means imparts the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball entering the variable ball entering means will pass through the specific area, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H10 The game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the result of the lottery is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In some cases, a privilege game is executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two ball entrances as privilege games (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). Gazette).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which further enhances the enjoyment of games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means. determining means for performing a first determination based on the game ball entering the ball means and performing a second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means; display means for simultaneously displaying first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, and dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; a dynamic display period determining means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification based on a specific determination result; privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the information is displayed; the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result; When the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed at the same time, and the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends first, dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result by displaying the second identification information indicating a determination result based on a determination result different from the specific second determination result; and termination means for forcibly terminating.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the second A special privilege game executing means for executing a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game, a first action in which the game ball is likely to enter the specific ball entering means, and a ball is more difficult to enter than the first action. and an operating means for operating the ball-entering induction member in a second action, wherein the operating means executes the first action when the second privilege game is executed rather than the first privilege game. It is easy.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the operating means sets the period for operating the ball-entering induction member to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means. The first motion is set longer than the second motion.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a first ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and a game in the first ball-entering means determination means for performing a first determination based on the entry of a ball, and performing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry means; display means for simultaneously displaying first identification information based on the determination result and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying each, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means A period determining means executes a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result and the specific second When the second identification information based on the determination result is dynamically displayed at the same time, when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result ends first, the specific first identification information 2 Dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result is displayed with the second identification information indicating the determination result based on the determination result different from the specific second determination result, and the dynamic display is forcibly terminated. and a terminating means for As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when a game ball enters a specific ball entering means and a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game is executed. a privilege game executing means; and an operation means for operating a ball-entering guide member with a first operation in which a game ball is likely to enter the specific ball-entering means and a second operation in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first operation. However, the operating means is easier to execute the first action when the second privilege game is executed than the first privilege game. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the operation means has the ball-entering induction member so that the game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means. The period of movement to the position is set longer for the first operation than for the second operation. This has the effect of reducing the control load.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a First winning port (first ball entry means)
64b Second winning port (second ball entry means)
64b1 electric accessory (entrance control means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
114 display control device (dynamic display execution means)
S303, S703 determining means S304, S704 dynamic display period determining means S1304, S1305 privilege game executing means S609, S919 ending means

Claims (3)

a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means;
Determination to execute a first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and to perform a second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means means and
display means for simultaneously displaying first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination;
dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means;
dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means;
When the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and when the second identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game;
When the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the predetermined first determination result is firstly displayed. dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result when the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the determination result based on the determination result different from the specific second determination result and a termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying with the second identification information indicating . a specific ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter;
a special privilege game execution means for executing a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
an action means for operating the ball-entering guide member with a first action in which the game ball is likely to enter the specific ball-entering means and a second action in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first action;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the operation means is capable of executing the first action more easily when the second bonus game is executed than the first bonus game. The operating means are
A period in which the ball-entering guide member is moved to a position where a game ball can enter the specific ball-entering means is set longer in the first action than in the second action. Item 2. The gaming machine according to item 2.

Images